JP2020073070A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A first rotor and a second rotor are configured so as to be variable to a first position where a player can easily and visually recognize figures and a second position where the user cannot easily and visually recognize the figures, relative to the first position. Rotation control means rotates the first rotor and the second rotor to the second position by a predetermined amount each, and then varies the first rotor and the second rotor to the first position each when displaying a combination of the figures for indicating performance contents determined by performance content determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area where the game ball can flow down is provided with a starting opening into which the game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening, The lottery is executed, and the effect showing the result of the lottery is executed for a predetermined period. As an effect showing the lottery result, a gaming machine is proposed in which a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols are rotated a plurality of times and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the symbols displayed on the plurality of reels.

JP 2004-160759A

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols, the reel rotation time (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is located in the front is determined by the size of the reel, the number of symbols shown, etc.). However, there is a problem in that the time until the lottery result is displayed becomes longer and the interest in the game is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

  To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is driven by a driving means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and is rotated on the outer peripheral surface. The first rotary body and the second rotary body in which a plurality of figures are drawn, the production content determination means for determining the production content, the first rotary body and the second rotary body are rotationally controlled, respectively, and the production is performed. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the graphic is displayed in a combination indicating the effect contents determined by the content determination means, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are each a player. Is configured to be changeable between a first position where the graphic is easily visible and a second position where the graphic is more difficult to view than the first position, and the rotation control means is determined by the effect content determination means. Show content When displaying a combination of graphic patterns, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the first rotating body are placed at the first position. The two rotating bodies are made variable.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the rotation control means sets the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a first direction and in a direction opposite to the first direction. Rotation control is possible in the second direction, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively set in the first direction based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. It has a rotation direction deciding means for deciding in which of the second direction the rotation should be made.

  A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the driving means, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and the plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface. The first rotating body and the second rotating body, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotationally controlled, respectively, and determined by the effect content determining means. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the graphic is displayed in a combination indicating the effect contents produced, and the player visually recognizes the graphic in each of the first rotary body and the second rotary body. It is configured to be variable between a first position that is easy to perform and a second position that is more difficult to visually recognize the graphic than the first position, and the rotation control means indicates the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. Combination of shapes Is displayed, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved to the first position. To change each. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the rotation control means is configured to control the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. Rotation for deciding in which of the first direction and the second direction the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively rotated based on the content of the effect determined by the effect content determining means. It has a direction determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the rotation time can be shortened.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. Therefore, there is an effect that various combinations of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotating body lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotating body lifting unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rotating body lifting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a central unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a container. 18A is a side view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18A. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 1st rotating body. It is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a central floating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central floating unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a central floating unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st member. It is a front view of a horizontal rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right-and-left rotation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a right-and-left rotation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of the central floating unit arrange | positioned at the descent position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of the central floating unit arrange | positioned at the descent position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, (b) is a top view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, (c) is XLIc-XLIc of FIG. 41 (b). It is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit along the line. 42A is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and FIG. 42B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device taken along line XLIIb-XLIIb in FIG. 43A is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and FIG. 43B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device taken along the line XLIIIb-XLIIIb in FIG. 44A is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and FIG. 44B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device taken along the line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 45A is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and FIG. 45B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device taken along line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. (A) And (b) is a partially expanded top view of the plate glass of a glass unit. (A) is a side view of a container in a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is a front view of a container in the direction of arrow XLVIIb of Drawing 47 (a). It is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. 51A is a side view of the container according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 51B is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LIb in FIG. 51A. It is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. (A) is a top view of the central floating unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a central floating unit in the arrow LVb direction view of FIG. 55 (a), (c), FIG. 56 is a rear view of the central floating unit in a state where the arm body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left / right rotating unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left / right rotating unit. (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotating unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotating unit. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows a frame button typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows a selection switch typically. It is the figure which showed typically the area | region division | segmentation setting of the display screen in a 1st control example, and an effective line setting. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. is there. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control unit in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value, and (b) is a first hit type counter CS2 and a jackpot type. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the judgment value of the hit of a normal symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation types at the time of a big hit. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the fluctuation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probability change). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship between the fluctuation type. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example. It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table A in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table B in a 1st control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table C in a 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fish school notice selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the shaking action table in a 1st control example typically. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. 7 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 1st control. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a time setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a volume setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a left / right selection process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a swing control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the SW production control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special SW production control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a touch sensor control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the change pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing according to the present invention. 7 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM content in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the content of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed a part of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. 8 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the third control example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time effect in the third control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in period A1 of FIG. 119. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the period B of FIG. 119. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the production screen of the shaking production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 3rd control example. (B) is another example of (a). (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) showed typically the content of RAM of the main control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the rotary body operation table in the 3rd control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of the dog breed selection table in the 3rd control example, and (b) is a figure which showed the swaying motion table 2 in the 3rd control example typically. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the example of the 3rd control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows a prize change production change processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading reel display production processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting period management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows special production processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of the 3rd control. It is a flow chart which shows shaking control processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the reel scenario table in a 3rd control example.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the second through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, The peripheral portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see the various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are provided in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by tapping screws or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. While being attenuated, it is bounced back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync, by the lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device indicates a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is carried out when a prize is awarded to any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. Also, it refers to a game state in which a ball easily wins the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time to be changed is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in an open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are closed (closed state) Compared with the case of, the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of working hours, it becomes easy for the balls to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  It should be noted that the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or opened during the probability change or shortening of time. In addition to changing the time, the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened at one time may be changed to be larger than that during normal times. Further, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric winning accessory 640a and the second electric winning accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per one time. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of working hours, the time period during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, or the first hit per hit is made. The number of times the electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are released may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82. While synchronizing, the third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays the second symbol with passage as a trigger is provided.

  Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the center floating unit 400, and the left-right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least part of their relative displacement members 450 and driven members 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86 and open. It is visible through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device, each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) This is a variable display in which and are alternately turned on for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the second prize port 640 and the third prize port 82 are attached. The first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, so that the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric auditors product 640a and the second electric auditors product 82a of the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. be able to. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

  It should be noted that during the probability change or during the shortening of the time, the probability of hitting may be increased during the probability change or by other methods such as increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the first electric auditors product 640a and the second electric auditors product 82a per hit, which increases the winning probability. When it is in a state where the balls can easily win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the time saving, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured to allow a part of the balls that flow down the game board among the balls fired on the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the ball is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the second symbol. The hold lamp (not shown) also lights up. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting positions of the through gates are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. A third winning opening 82 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. Due to this, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first prize hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is prized in the second prize hole 640 and the third prize hole 82. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first prize hole 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the second prize hole 640 and the third prize hole 82. May be configured as five.

  A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is performed by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, The 1st electric auditors product 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  A second electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is performed by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, The second electric accessory 82a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol "○ Is easily displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the shortening of the working time, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened also becomes longer than usual. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a jackpot is high even when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 even if the probability is low. The situation is the same. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the type of jackpot that is selected when the jackpot is the jackpot is more likely to occur when the ball is placed in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 than in the first winning opening 64. It is set higher than when winning. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric winning object 640a and the second electric winning object 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win. It is in a state.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric prizes attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning port 64 without the electric accessory (so-called “left hitting”), and the winning in the first winning port 64 is achieved. It is more advantageous for the player to win the big hit lottery and aim for the big hit.

  On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning port 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning port 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the third winning opening 82 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the second through gate 67 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to open the second electric auditors product 82a and aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the third winning opening 82.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  Not limited to the above-described form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the ball passes, you may perform a winning lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol. The second electric winning combination 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state by the lottery of the symbol. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the balls passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric accessory that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 to open. Will be selected one by one.

  Thereby, for example, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when the second symbol is selected as a hit, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is selected by lottery. When the winning is selected in the lottery of the two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is selected and the second symbol is selected. When a hit is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, the first electric auditors product 640a can be in a game state in which it is opened.

  Thus, during the probability change, the game state where the lottery of the second symbol is easy to hit, and during the time saving, when the game state where a symbol different from the second symbol is easy to hit, during the probability change, the player right-hands to the second through gate 67. In the gaming state in which the second electric accessory 82a is passed through to easily win the ball, and during the time saving, the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66 to open the first electric auditors and win the ball. It can be in a game state that is easy to play. Therefore, the game states of the normal state, the time saving period, and the probability changing state can be set to different game states, so that the player can enjoy the respective game states.

  In addition, in addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when the hit is selected for the second symbol, if the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, it is different from the second symbol. The symbol is selected by lot, and when the winning is selected in the lottery of the symbol different from the second symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66, and then the second symbol. Is drawn, and when the winning is selected for the second symbol, the second electric auditors product 82a can be opened to the game state.

  In this case, when the ball passes the second through gate 67 by hitting the right, the first electric accessory is released and the ball is easily put into the second winning opening 640 regardless of the probability change and shortening of time. , When the ball hits the left and the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and the ball can be in a game state in which it is easy to win the ball into the third winning port 82. Therefore, the player needs to change the hitting method from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit at any time, and the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 64, and the third winning opening 82 is a big hit, a predetermined time (variation time) is set. After the passage of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times as a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. It The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (fire control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is a switch (sensor) for detecting the winning of a ball into each winning opening, a switch (sensor) for detecting that the ball has passed through various gates, or a switch (sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity. Are connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. To execute various processes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 has a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a switch (sensor) group used for various effects, and various variable members (movable accessory). Are connected to various switches including a group of switches (sensors) for monitoring the above operation, motors including driving motors 420, 530, and 630 for driving various variable members (movable accessory). The other device 228 includes a drive motor.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the state in which the rotating body elevating unit 300 is in the lowered position, the central floating unit 400 is in the raised position, and the left / right rotating unit 500 is in the retracted position. In FIG. The state is shown in which the unit 300 is arranged in the raised position, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position, and the left-right rotation unit 500 is arranged in the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the inner space of the rear case 210, the rotating body elevating unit 300 and the center floating unit are provided above and below the rear case 210. The units 400 are respectively arranged, and a pair of left and right rotation units 500 and a left and right sensor device 600 are arranged on the left and right sides of the center floating unit 400.

  The rear case 210 is provided with a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 that is provided upright from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by these wall portions 211 and 212. Formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  The rotary body elevating / lowering unit 300 includes a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) box-shaped accommodating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) accommodated in each of the accommodating bodies 330. ) Of the rotating body (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b).

  Each of the plurality of containers 330 is formed so as to be vertically movable (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8) independently. In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can visually recognize through the opening. To be done.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotatably supported by the container 330, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface are sequentially viewed by the player by the rotation. Let The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three outer peripheral surfaces.

  In the present embodiment, the drive source of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is shared by the single drive motor 350, and the component cost can be reduced, while the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are reduced. The combination of figures of 340b can be changed so that the player can visually recognize a total of nine combinations (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

  The central floating unit 400 includes a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the base body 410, and a tip end side of the pair of arm bodies 430 opposite to the base end sides. The first member 440 and the first member 440 are connected so that they can be displaced relative to each other (see FIG. 23).

  The pair of arm bodies 430 are driven by different drive motors 450, respectively, and are formed so that they can be displaced (rotated) independently of each other. Accordingly, the first member 440 can be moved not only in a linear movement in the vertical direction but also in a mode in which linear movement and rotary movement are combined, and the first member 440 can be raised and lowered while incorporating the movement. The movement of the first member 440 can be changed (see FIGS. 31 to 34). The details will be described later.

  The left-right rotation unit 500 includes bases (rear base 511 and front base 512) arranged on the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotary body lifting unit 300 and the front surface of the base body 410 of the central floating unit 400, and the base body 410. The displacement member 530 is rotatably supported on the base end side (see FIG. 29). The displacement member 530 is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 7), and a protruding position (which extends to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) ( (See FIG. 8). In this case, the displacing member 530 is arranged at the projecting position so that the displacing member 530 comes into contact with the first member 440 and its movement is regulated (see FIG. 41). The details will be described later.

  The left and right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 which are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46). The presence or absence of the player's fingers in front of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 can be detected.

  The first sensor 610 is arranged on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. It In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing inward. Therefore, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be arranged at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening, and can be seen by the player. It can be hard to be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 46, detailed configurations of the rotary body lifting unit 300, the center floating unit 400, the left / right rotation unit 500, and the left / right sensor device 600 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotary body lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotary body lifting unit 300. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary body lifting unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotary body elevating / lowering unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for elevating and lowering a central container 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for vertically elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. And 3 units. The left unit 300L is superposed on the front surface side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby the three containers 330 are arranged side by side in the width direction.

  Here, the detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C includes an L-shaped rear base 311 in front view, a front base 312 that is superposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. The drive motor 320 provided, the housing 330 that is moved up and down with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, the first rotating body 340a and the The two-rotation body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 are mainly provided.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack whose side surface is cut with a flat plate-shaped member, and the rack gear 324 is arranged on one side and the housing 330 is arranged on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts are projectingly provided on the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported by these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting members 325 (rack gear 324 ) And the container 330 are vertically guided. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear movement of the rack gear 324. With the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the housing 330 along with the connecting member 325 is vertically displaced (elevated) (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically long portion in which the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically long portion in which the housing 330 is arranged with their lower end sides by the horizontally long portion. Thus, it is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the central container 330 is arranged in the raised position while the left container 330 is arranged in the lowered position, the horizontally long portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  The slide guide 351 is a linear guide including a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back surface base 311 and a slide body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. It is formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R described later. In addition, the slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail fixed to the rear surface base 311 and the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism including an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left housing 330 is arranged side by side on the side of the central housing 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the lateral width of the connecting member 325 (left and right direction in FIG. 12) accordingly. ) The dimension becomes longer. Further, as described above, in order to avoid the visual recognition from the player, the horizontally elongated portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U shape in a front view, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the attitude of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swing in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the retractable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central container 330, the central container 330 is arranged in the raised position. However, the extended slide guide 352 can regulate the swinging in the left-right direction, and the posture of the central housing 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in the state where the central container 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L includes a rear base 313 which is vertically long when viewed from the front and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313. An intermediate base 314 stacked on the front side, a front base 315 stacked on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320. The housing 330 that is moved up and down with respect to the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and the housings between the facing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315. And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. A rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack whose side surface is formed by a flat plate member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft projects from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. A shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole and are rotatably supported.

  A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is vertically guided by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the guide plate 353 along the up-down direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is provided in the guide groove 353a via the collar C. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is vertically guided along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 becomes a linear movement of the rack gear 324. After being converted, the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 in accordance with the linear movement of the rack gear 324 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L has a rear base 316 formed in a substantially L shape on the front and connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. The front base 317 that is superposed on the front side of the back base 313, the drive motor 320 that is disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 moves up and down with respect to the back base 316 and the front base 317. The accommodating body 330, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b that are accommodated in the accommodating body 330, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 that is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the back base 316 and the front base 317. And a transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a flat plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324, which is formed as a rack whose side faces are toothed, and a connecting member 327 which connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330 are provided.

  A shaft is provided on the front surface of the back base 316, and a pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported on the shaft. A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 316 in such a manner that the guide direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is vertically guided by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the front base 316 along the up-down direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is provided in the guide groove 316a (see FIG. (Not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is vertically guided along the guide groove 316a of the back base 316. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 are regulated in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the linear motion of the rack gear 324. Accordingly, the housing 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the horizontal width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swing in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surface of the left container 330 and the right container 330, the lateral width of the connecting members 326 and 327 (see FIGS. 14 and 16). The rigidity can be increased by shortening the dimension in the left-right direction. Therefore, the postures of the left and right containers 330 can be stabilized (in the left-right direction and difficult to shake).

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to dispose a retractable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right housings 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the back base 316 guide the guide. Can stabilize the posture sufficiently. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18A is a side view of the container 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18A. Is. 18A and 18B, the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 is arranged on the inner surface side of the base body 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 arranged on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition body 334 and the decorative body 335 arranged on the front surface of the base body 331 are provided, and these parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

  The base 331 is a member that forms the back surface (the back side of the paper in FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (the upper and lower sides of FIG. 18B) of the container 330, and is a combination of three plate-shaped members. Are integrally formed. A reflection part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is provided on the front surface of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330.

  The reflection part RF is formed in a rectangular shape as viewed from the front, and has a size that extends over at least the vertical direction of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b when viewed from the front. Are formed (see FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members that form the left and right side surfaces of the housing body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes into which fixed shafts 341 of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, which will be described later, are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 such that they cannot rotate. Each of the holding holes 332a and 333a has an inner peripheral surface having a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis which is formed by removing one of the circles, which is defined by connecting two points on the circumference by a straight line.

  The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between the surfaces facing the side wall body 332. In addition, the partition body 334 has two insertion holes 334a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355.

  The decoration body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in a frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b and the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotary bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  In the container 330 thus formed, the drive motor 350 disposed in the partition wall 334, the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 320, and the drive motor A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotary body 340a are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the container 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 which are sequentially meshed with the drive gear 351. And a gear train consisting of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 include the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b. It is fixed to each of the axial end faces.

  Here, the detailed configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a is a typical example. And the description of the second rotating body 340b is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 rotatably supported by both axial ends (shaft portion 341b) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair of the end plates 342. It mainly includes three display plates (first display plate 343A, second display plate 343B, and third display plate 343C) that are installed between the end face plates 342.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and shaft portions 341b that are continuously provided at both axial ends of the body portion 341a. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side wall bodies 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing body 330, and connects the pair of shaft portions 341a located at both axial ends to the pair of shaft portions 341a. And a body portion 341b.

  The shaft portion 341b has a shape in which the cross-sectional shape of the shaft is unilaterally divided from a circle by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder is chamfered with a flat surface). The holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) have a slightly smaller similar shape. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341b into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the housing body 330 (side wall bodies 332 and 333).

  A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

  In this case, in the state in which the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and is non-rotatably held, the body portion 341b directs the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the housing body 330 (the decoration body 335). The opening 335a of FIG. 18B is disposed in a posture (rotational position) toward the front surface of FIG. 18B. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate arranged on the front surface (the “visual recognition position” described later) of the housing 330 among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. it can.

  Since the fixed shaft 341 (the shaft portion 341a and the body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends in the axial direction opened, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed and the wiring is routed using the internal space. It can be pulled out to the outside of the container 330 from the opening at the end of the direction. In addition, since the fixed shaft 341 is not rotatable with respect to the housing body 330 as described above, even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force such as twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

  The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape in a front view, and has a shaft support hole 342 having a circular axial section in the center. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end plate 342 is rotatably supported by the fixed shaft 341. As a result, the end plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, since the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft 341a, the end plate 342 is formed between the side wall bodies 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The position in the axial direction can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

  The first gear 353 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and the base gear 361 of the detection mechanism described later is fixed to the other. Although the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 of the second rotary body 340b, the base gear 361 is not attached to the other (FIG. 17 and FIG. 17). 18).

  Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and by connecting the outer edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, respectively, It is installed between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular columnar body together with the end face plates 342.

  Graphics are drawn on the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, respectively. Therefore, when the triangular prism is rotated, the figures respectively drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display plates 343A to 343C are sequentially visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a part of the outer surface of each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape protruding outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) in the rotational position between the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, each display plate 343A. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of the to 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the width direction end portions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved and formed in an arc shape that is convex outward, The central portion in the width direction is formed into a substantially flat surface shape. As a result, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the graphic and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the radius of the arc of the arc-shaped portion formed by bending is larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times). The following) is set.

  Here, in the following, as the arrangement positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism is rotated, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B) is set. The position where the outer surface of the decorative body 335 can be visually recognized through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "visual recognition position", and the outer surface is directed toward the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the ornament 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

  Therefore, for example, when the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). .. When the triangular column is rotated 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction from this state, one of the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C is placed at the visual recognition position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display is displayed. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are configured to transmit light. Is formed in part. Further, the inner surface of the first display plate 343A is provided with a reflection part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light.

  As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where the inner surface of the display plate of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C arranged at the visible position can be illuminated. Therefore, in the state where the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmissive portion PN of each of the display plates 343B and 343C to be directly visually recognized by the player. Can be made

  On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflection part RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. After being transmitted through the transmission part PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflection part RF of the base 331 of the housing 330, the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base 331. As a result, the player can indirectly recognize it.

  For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a and causing the LED 344 to emit light at the rotational position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 of the housing 330 is visually recognized. The player can be made to associate with the graphic of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a is rotated to a position where the graphic of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C can be visually recognized.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflector plate is rotated along with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) of each rotating body 340a, 340b, the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotating body 340a, 340b (upward and downward spacing in FIG. 18B), or The apparent diameter of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (each of the display plates 343A to 343C) faces the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmissive portion PN is visually recognized by the player as reflected light from the reflective portion RF of the base 441. The aspect (for example, the size of the area where the light is visually recognized) can be periodically changed.

  It returns to FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 and demonstrates. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. An end gear 363 having a detected plate 363a protruding outward in the direction and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detected plate 363a of the end gear 363 are provided.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the base body 331 in a state where the detection region is arranged on the movement locus of the plate 363a to be detected. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection body of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both rotary bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. When the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 through the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotary body 340a and the graphic of the second rotary body 340b visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, the combination of figures of both rotary bodies 340a and 340b was limited to three sets in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven in synchronization by the one drive motor, the combinations that can be formed are, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A. A first combination of arranging the first display plate 343A of the two-rotation body 340a at the display position, the second display plate 343B of the first rotation body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotation body 340a at the display position. There are only three sets of the second combination to be arranged, and the third combination to arrange the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340a at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are independently driven to rotate by different drive motors, a maximum of 9 combinations can be formed and the combinations can be formed. It can be displayed arbitrarily. However, in this case, since two drive motors are required, the cost of parts is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 to only one, and to combine the combinations. It can be displayed arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, by not allowing the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to be completely coincident with each other and allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions, the nine combinations are promptly displayed. Can be issued. A combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b showing transition states when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated. 21A to 21E are shown in FIG. 22 (a) to 22 (e) in the state shown as Nos. 1 to 5 in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

  Note that, in FIG. 20, a state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position as a combination of figures of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is indicated by reference numeral “A” or “A ′”, The state in which the second display plate 343B is arranged is indicated by reference sign “B” or “B ′”, and the state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged in the visual recognition position is indicated by reference sign “C” or “C ′”, respectively. To be done.

  For example, No. 1 in FIG. In the state represented by 10 “A, C ′”, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the respective visual recognition positions, and the first rotating body The figure drawn on the first display plate 343A from 340a and the figure drawn on the third display plate 343C from the second rotating body 340b correspond to the state visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C” and are referred to as the second display plate 343A. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340a are illustrated by reference numerals "A 'to C'", respectively.

  Here, in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the numbers of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to each other are set to different values. In the present embodiment, when the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. Is formed.

  20. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21A, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 1 "A ', A", first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b positions the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotary body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotary body 340a by 120 degrees, a difference (deviation) of 12 degrees occurs between the rotational positions of the second rotary body 340b and the rotary body 340a. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, the respective second display plates of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to recognize that the figures drawn on the outer surface of the 343B are arranged at the respective visual recognition positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed to be curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (I.e., the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b), so for a player who views the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each of the display boards 343A to 343C from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference (deviation) in the rotational positions of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b.

  20. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed at the visual recognition position, the No. 2 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21C, the second rotary body 340b is arranged at a position where its rotational position is displaced from the first rotary body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in the rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. In the rotation of the section up to the state shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22D, the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C at the visual recognition position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while rotating the second rotating body. The rotation position of 340b is displaced from the first rotation body 340a. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the deviation of the figures (the combination is not established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

  20. 9 and the state shown in FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. No. 20. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 22E, the second rotating body 340b positions the third display plate 343C at the visual recognition position. As a result, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  It should be noted that according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is performed even in a section in which a figure shift (combination non-establishment, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figure visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure is to be combined in the third combination.

  The subsequent steps are substantially the same as the above-described aspect (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 (a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 22 (e)). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table makes one round from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, No. 1 in FIG. 11-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, it may be considered by replacing the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 with a phase difference of 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A ′ in FIG. 20, B ”), a fifth combination (No. 12“ B ′, C ”in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20“ C ′, B ”in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In addition, in FIG. 21-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, it may be considered by replacing the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 with 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A ′ in FIG. 20, C ”), the eighth combination (No. 22“ B ′, A ”in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30“ C ′, C ”in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b has a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). Is formed as a gear train including five gears), and the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Accordingly, the rotation cycle of the first rotary body 340a and the rotation cycle of the second rotary body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired). Combinations can appear arbitrarily).

  Further, since the transmission mechanism is formed as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced, the durability and the reliability can be improved, but the gears are always meshed with each other. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse.

  Therefore, for example, a section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) that advances in the normal direction (downward in FIG. 20) in the table of FIG. After that, immediately after or immediately before the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) is exposed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. A series of operations of returning to the direction (upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, and thereby, it is possible to perform an effect of making the player expect the appearance of the third combination.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. If necessary, the table of FIG. 20 is moved forward (downward in FIG. 20) to reveal the ninth combination, and the table of FIG. 20 is reversed (upward in FIG. 20). It is also possible to proceed to and reveal the ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, one 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is required. Since it suffices to perform it, a desired combination of figures can be promptly revealed.

  Here, when the second rotary body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotary body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotary body 340b is changed to the rotation of the first rotary body 340a). On the other hand, when "1 / integer" times is set), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. You can However, in this case, the maximum number of figures that can be combined is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B” and No. 11 in FIG. 21 “A ′, C”) except for the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body. A difference (shift) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by the single drive motor 350, the number of combinations of figures is set to 9 so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be changed. It is not possible to achieve by simply forming the transmission mechanism that transmits to each of the first and second rotating bodies 340b as a gear train, and as in this embodiment, the transmission positions of the first and second rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be changed. This is possible only by allowing the difference (deviation) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the required number of drive motors 350 and reduce the product cost while improving the effect of production by increasing the number of combinations of figures.

  In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) that causes a difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle between the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In the combination), the stop position for stopping the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth, and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C”, and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotary body 340b is delayed, the first rotary body 340a is stopped at the rotational position advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, it is not necessary to stop the first rotating body 340a at the rotation position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference surface to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b, and make them inconspicuous.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth, and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B”, and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22 (e), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is advanced, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotational position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d). For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference surface to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b, and make them inconspicuous.

  As described above, in the rotating body elevating / lowering unit 300, each container 300 is formed so as to be able to move up and down, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the game board 13. It can be made invisible to the player by locating it on the back side of. Therefore, a desired combination among the combinations of the graphic of the first rotating body 340a and the graphic of the second rotating body 340b can be promptly revealed at a necessary timing.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since 9 combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). Therefore, in order to bring out a desired combination, It is necessary to rotate the 1st rotating body 340a and the 2nd rotating body 340b comparatively many times, and time becomes long by that much.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player by arranging each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7). You can As a result, the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotating position without the player being aware of the rotation, and as a result, it is necessary. When the timing comes, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly achieved. Can be made to appear.

  The placement of each container 300 in the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b to the display of results (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not placed in the lowered position and The rotation of the rotating bodies 340a, 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, while the time from the start of rotation of each rotating body 340a, 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the pre-rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. This can prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  That is, when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, a comparatively loud sound is generated, and therefore, even if the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the lowered position and become invisible to the player, they are still rotated. The generated sound may cause the player to recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance.

  On the other hand, the rotation of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is performed during the operation of the predetermined operating means, so that the operation can be mixed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the pre-rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Note that, as the operating means, for example, the payout device 133, the audio output device 226, or the ball launching unit 112a (both see FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is illustrated. In the state in which these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated when the ball is dispensed, the sound is output, or the ball is launched. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the pre-rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The rotation may be performed in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the previous rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. FIG. 23 is a front view of the central floating unit 400. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the central floating unit 400 is provided on the base body 410 provided on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and on the front surface of the base body 410. A pair of cover bodies 420, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose proximal ends are rotatably supported between facing surfaces of the cover bodies 420 and the base body 410, and which are arranged in a posture in which the distal ends face each other. It mainly includes a first member 440 to which the distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 are connected so as to be capable of relative displacement, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm bodies 420, respectively.

  The base body 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the cover bodies 420 are partially disposed (covered) on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 410. On the mutually opposing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotation shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are recessed at coaxial positions. Is set up.

  Further, a shaft 412 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 453 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is provided on the front surface of the base body 410 in a protruding manner. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the shaft 412, and the retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove restricts the crank gear 453 from coming off the shaft 412. ..

  A cutout portion 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 to secure a space for allowing the arm body 430 to rotate. On the other hand, when the rotation of the arm body 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the inner edge of the opening of the cutout portion 422 is brought into contact with the outer surface of the arm body 430, whereby the rotation of the arm member 420 over the predetermined angle can be restricted. Formed in. That is, the cover body 420 is formed so as to be able to function as a stopper that restricts rotation of the arm member 420 beyond a predetermined angle.

  A rotating body 413 is arranged at the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotator 413 is a member that is rotatably formed by the driving force of a drive motor (not shown), and when the first member 440 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 31A), the first member 440 becomes When the first member 440 is shielded and invisible to the player while the first member 440 is placed in the lowered position (FIG. 31C), the game is performed in a state where the first member 440 is vertically juxtaposed above the first member 440. It is visible to the person.

  The arm body 430 is a long rod-shaped body that is bent and formed in a substantially V shape in a front view, and mainly includes a rotation shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotary shaft 431 is a shaft that is axially supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and is coaxially projected from the front surface and the rear surface of the arm body 430 at the base end side. To be done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in such a manner that the tip end side is vertically moved up and down about the rotation shaft 431 as a rotation center.

  The driven groove 432 is a portion through which an eccentric pin 454 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending from the bent portion of the arm body 430 toward the rotary shaft 431 (a long hole in front view). Shaped) opening. As will be described later, as the crank gear 453 rotates, the eccentric pin 454 slides along the driven groove 432, so that the arm body 430 rotates about the rotation shaft 431.

  The connecting pin 433 is a rod-shaped body that projects from the front surface on the tip side of the arm body 430, and is slidably inserted along a sliding groove 441a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. The arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via the connecting pin 433 so as to be relatively movable.

  A collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 433 inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 in the assembly process of the first member 430, as described later. To prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off the sliding groove 441a. In addition, a rotating body 434 is disposed on the front surface of the arm body 430 opposite to the driven groove 432 across the bent portion. The rotating body 434 is rotatably formed by the driving force of a drive motor 435 arranged on the back side of the arm body 430.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the attachment plate 451 to which the drive motor 450 is attached and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450. A pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 that is meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 that is eccentrically located from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453 are mainly provided.

  The mounting plate 451 is disposed on the front surface of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is housed between the facing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 is provided so as to project from the front surface of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is provided at the tip of the eccentric pin 454, and the eccentric pin 454 is moved from the driven groove 432 by the retaining ring fitted in the fitting groove. Regulate getting out.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in the present embodiment), The eccentric pin 454, which is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453, is displaced in the vertical direction in a front view while drawing an arcuate locus. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed upward or downward by the eccentric pin 454 that slides in the driven groove 432, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is relatively displaceably coupled to the arm body 430 via the coupling pin 433 that is inserted into the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independent of each other. By being rotated, as will be described later, it is allowed to float in a mode in which a linear motion and a rotary motion are combined (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, the detailed configuration of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

  26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 is rotatably attached to the base body 441, the front body 442 and the back body 443 disposed on the front and back surfaces of the base body 441, and the back surface of the base body 441, respectively. An arm member 444 provided, a drive motor 445 that generates a drive force for rotating the arm member 444, and a crank member 446 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444 are mainly used. Prepare

  The base 441 is a member that forms the skeleton of the first member 440 and is formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front. A pair of sliding grooves 441a are formed in the base 441 so as to have openings. Each of the sliding grooves 441a is formed as an opening having a long hole shape in a front view extending linearly, and a pair of the sliding grooves 441a are arranged non-parallel to each other. Specifically, the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a reverse inverted V shape when viewed from the front and are inclined upward from the center toward both ends in the front view of the base 441.

  On the back surface of the base body 441, a cylindrical tube portion 441b formed corresponding to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 is protruded. To be done.

  The connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the cylindrical portion 441b. That is, since the connecting pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 441b, the supporting area of the connecting pin 433 can be expanded correspondingly, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. ..

  The front body 442 is a member that forms the front surface of the first member 440, and is formed into a disc shape having a substantially same diameter as the base body 441 in a front view circular shape and a predetermined thickness dimension. The front body 442 is formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs in this embodiment) are arranged inside the front body 442. Therefore, by causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light (light or blink), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be emitted from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface to the outside. This allows the player to visually recognize that the entire front body 442 (front surface and outer peripheral surface) is emitting light.

  The front body 442 is arranged (fastened and fixed) on the base body 441 after the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is connected to the base body 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the base body 441 from the back side, and at least the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441 is attached to the tip of the connecting pin 433 protruding to the front side of the base body 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is attached (fastened and fixed), and the collar serves as a retainer for the connecting pin 433 from the base 441.

  The arm member 444 is a long member that is longer than the diameter dimension of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444a is a hole that is axially supported by the shaft 441a of the front body 441, and is provided at a position at the center of the arm member 444 in the longitudinal direction. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending perpendicularly to the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444 below the shaft-supported hole 444a ( It is formed as an opening having a long hole shape when viewed from the front.

  The arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the shaft 441 a between the facing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443 in a posture in which both end portions thereof project outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23), and will be described later. As described above, as the crank member 446 rotates, the eccentric pin 446b slides along the driven groove 444b, thereby rotating about the shaft support hole 444b.

  The crank member 446 is a member disposed between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443, and includes a rotating body 446 a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445 and a rotation center of the rotating body 446 a (the drive motor 445 a). Eccentric pin 446b that is positioned eccentrically from the drive shaft). The eccentric pin 446b is provided so as to project from the front surface of the rotary body 446a and is inserted into the driven groove 444b of the arm member 444.

  When the rotary body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b that is eccentric from the rotation center of the rotary body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus with a predetermined radius. As a result, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled by the eccentric pin 446b to the left and right, and the rotation of the predetermined rotation angle (approximately 30 degrees in this embodiment) is alternately repeated in the forward and reverse directions. The arm member 444 is rotated about the (axis 441c) as a rotation center (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

  Thereby, as will be described later, the player can visually recognize the operation of the arm member 444 in such a manner that the both end portions of the arm member 444 projecting from the both sides of the front body 442 to the left and right are alternately reciprocally moved up and down. .. In addition, by performing the reciprocating motion of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, as described later, a reaction (inertial force) of the reciprocating motion is exerted on the base body 441 and the front body 442 to cause the arm body 430 to move. Thus, the player can visually recognize the relative displacement of the front body 442.

  Next, the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 29. The pair of left and right rotation units 500 are arranged left and right with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 6), but the pair of left and right rotation units 500 are formed in a symmetrical shape. Except for the above, since they are formed with substantially the same configuration, only one (the one arranged on the left side in front view) will be described and the other description will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the left / right rotation unit 500. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left-right rotation unit 500 includes a rear base 511 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a front base 512 that is superposed on the front side of the rear base 511, and a front base 513. A cover body 513 provided, a drive motor 520 disposed on the back side of the back base 511, a displacement member 530 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 520 with respect to the back base 511 and the front base 512, A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530 is mainly provided.

  On the mutually opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, shaft supporting holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotating shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed at positions coaxial with each other. Is set up. The front base 512 is formed with an opening 512a through which the rotary shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted and an opening 512b through which an eccentric pin 542 of a crank gear 540 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is inserted.

  The displacement member 530 is a member having a blade-shaped decoration on its front surface, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotary shaft 531 is a shaft pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 511a and 513a of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, and the front and back surfaces of the displacement member 530 on the base end side (lower side in FIG. 29). Are projected coaxially. The displacement member 530 is rotatable about the rotation axis 531 as a rotation center between a retracted position overlapping the front base 512 in a front view and an extended position protruding to the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) side of the rear case 210. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

  The driven hole 432 is a hole in which a connecting pin 552 of a link member 550 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is rotatably supported and is recessed at a position separated from the rotating shaft 531 by a predetermined distance toward the tip end side. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, so that the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520 and the pinion gear 521. A crank gear 540 and a link member 550 that connects the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530 are mainly provided.

  The crank gear 540 is a gear that is rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the front base 512, and an eccentric pin 541 is provided so as to project toward the front at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. The link member 550 is a rod-shaped body disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530. The link member 550 has a connection hole 551 formed in the back surface on the one end side in the longitudinal direction and the other end side in the longitudinal direction. A connecting pin 552 is projected from the front surface of the.

  The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably supported in the coupling hole 551 of the link member 550 through the opening 512b of the front base 512, and the coupling pin 552 of the link member 550 is driven by the driven hole of the displacement member 530. It is rotatably supported by 532. As a result, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550 to form a crank mechanism.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), The eccentric pin 541 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the base end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. As a result, the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 as the center of rotation between the retracted position and the extended position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the operation of the central floating unit 400 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 41. In the following, for convenience of description, the ones located on the left side (the left side in FIG. 31) and the right side (the right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front, with respect to the pair of arm bodies 430, respectively. These are referred to as the “left” arm body 430 and the “right” arm body 430.

  31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400. FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the central floating unit 400 is arranged in a raised position, and FIG. 31 (c) corresponds to the state in which it is arranged between them, and FIG. 31 (c) corresponds to the state in which it is arranged in the lowered position.

  32 (a) to 32 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400. FIG. 32 (a) is shown in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 32 (b) is shown in FIG. 31 (b). 32 (c) corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 in FIG. 31 (c).

  32A to 32C correspond to cross-sectional views in which the back surface of the first member 440 is viewed by cutting along the plane orthogonal to the connecting pin 433. Further, the outer shapes of the left and right arm bodies 430 are schematically illustrated by using a chain double-dashed line, while the back body 443, the drive motor 450, and the crank member 446 are omitted. The same applies to FIG. 35, FIG. 36, FIG. 38, and FIG. 40, which will be described later, so the description thereof will be omitted below.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), in the state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing up the tip side (connecting pin 433 side) upward. The first member 440 is located at the uppermost position. Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is positioned close to the end (hereinafter referred to as “outer end”) of each sliding groove 441a on the side closer to the radial outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are rotationally driven and the respective crank gears 453 are rotated from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 causes the driven groove 432 to move. While sliding, the left and right arm bodies 430 are pushed down respectively.

  As a result, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 32 (b). Is displaced. From this state, when the crank gears 453 are further rotated by the rotation drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed downward, and are shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c). Thus, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), when the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing down the tip side (connecting pin 433 side) downward. The first member 440 is located at the lowermost position and is extended to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Further, the rotating body 413 is exposed above the first member 440 so that the player can visually recognize it.

  Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is positioned close to the end (hereinafter referred to as “inner end”) of each sliding groove 441a on the side closer to the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end of the sliding groove 441. In this embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end at the lowered position is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end at the raised position.

  Accordingly, as will be described later, when the first member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member 430 by utilizing the action of inertia or the operation of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the lowered position The relative displacement amount at can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the case described above from the state (lowered position) shown in FIGS. 31C and 32C, as the crank gears 453 rotate, As the eccentric pin 454 slides in the driven groove 432 and pushes up the left and right arm bodies 430, respectively, finally, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (c), the central floating unit is finally moved. 400 is located in the raised position.

  Thus, according to the central floating unit 400, the first member 440 can be moved up and down between the raised position and the lowered position. However, in the above-described operation described as an example of lifting and lowering of the first member 440, the first member 440 linearly moves while maintaining the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. The change in movement is poor.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be displaceable (rotatable) independently of each other, and the tip ends (the connection pins 433) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are the first Since it is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), it can be moved up and down while changing the movement of the first member 440 according to the rotation mode of the left and right arm bodies 430. it can. An example of such an operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

  33 (a) to 33 (c) and FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 33 (a) shows a state in which the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position. 33 (b), 33 (c), 10 (a) and 10 (b) are arranged in a state between the ascending position and the descending position, and FIG. 10 (c) is arranged in the descending position. Corresponds to each state.

  35 (a) to 35 (c) and 36 (a) to 36 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c) are 33 (a) to 33 (c) respectively correspond to the cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) show the center in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c). Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven from the state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position, and the tip side The right arm body 430 is rotated in the rotational direction in which the (connecting pin 433) is directed downward (downward in FIG. 33A) (hereinafter, this rotation is referred to as “downward rotation”).

  This downward rotation of the right arm body 430 causes the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35 (a)) arm body 430 to push down the sliding groove 441a. As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (inclined) to a posture in which the right shoulder is lowered.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the left (right side in FIG. 35 (a)) arm body 430 in the stopped state is located between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441a in the raised position. A predetermined gap is formed in the. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (inclined) to the right shoulder downward (left shoulder downward in FIG. 35B) posture, the sliding groove 441a to which the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected is connected. Is steeper and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged in a direction that allows the movement (fall) of the first member 440 due to the action of gravity. ..

  Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the raised position shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), the first member 440 of the right arm body 430 is moved to the predetermined rotation position. While it can be displaced by being driven by rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotation position, the first member 440 is brought into a state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b) by free fall due to the action of gravity. Can be placed.

  That is, until the right arm body 430 reaches the predetermined rotation position, the first member 440, which was driven by the downward rotation of the right arm body 430, reaches the right rotation position after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Instead of being driven by the downward rotation of the arm body 430, the arm body 430 can be abruptly displaced downward by free fall to precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  When the right arm body 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b), the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35 (b)) arm body 430 slides. By further pushing down the moving groove 441a, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c), the downward-sloping posture of the first member 40 can be changed (inclined) to a steeper angle. ..

  In this case, the left (right side in FIG. 35B) arm body 430 is in a stopped state, and the connecting pin 433 reaches the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. The first member 440 can be rotated with the right side in (b) as the center of rotation, and the first member 440 is rotated toward the left arm body 430 side (in front view) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. It is possible to form a state of being pushed in (left side in FIG. 33).

  That is, in the process from the raised position of FIG. 33A to the state shown in FIG. 33C, the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 33) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. ), A rotational movement in the direction in which the shoulder falls downward (clockwise in FIG. 33), and a linear movement to the left (in the left direction in FIG. 33) can be displaced. You can change the movement.

  When the state shown in FIG. 33 (c) and FIG. 35 (c) is reached, in addition to the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 is also located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the left arm body 430 (the left side in FIG. 33C) is then rotated downward.

  This downward rotation of the left arm body 430 causes the connecting pin 433 of the left (right side in FIG. 35 (c)) arm pin 433 to push down the sliding groove 441a, and thus the state shown in FIG. As shown in 36 (a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from the downward-sloping posture to the horizontal posture.

  In an example of the operation described here, the left arm body 430 is further moved downward from the state shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 36 (a) to a position regulated by the cutout portion 422 of the cover body 420. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the left (right side in FIG. 36 (a)) arm body 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a further downward, so that in contrast to the case described above (see FIG. 33), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36B and 36B, the first member 40 can be changed (inclined) to a posture in which the left shoulder is lowered.

  When the state shown in FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. 36 (b) is reached, the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowest position, and further downward rotation is restricted, so from this state, Next, the right (left side in FIG. 34B) arm body 430 is rotated downward to a position regulated by the cutout portion 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c), the first member 40 is changed (returned) from the downward-sloping left shoulder posture to the horizontal posture and is arranged at the lowermost position. You can That is, it is arranged in the lowered position.

  As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be displaceable (rotatable) independently of each other, and the distal end sides (connections) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are connected. Since the pin 433) is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently of each other, so that the first member 440 moves linearly. It is possible to give a movement that is a combination of a rotation movement and a rotation movement, and to give a change to the movement.

  In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotatably supported by the base body 410 and the cover body 420 at their base end sides (rotating shafts 431) and are rotated about the base end sides, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated. Each of the distal ends (connecting pins 433) of 430 can be moved along arcuate loci whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, as compared with the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are linearly slid and displaced, it is possible to give the first member 440 a movement that is a more complicated combination of linear movement and rotational movement, and to make a greater change. You can give to that movement.

  Here, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 arranged in the raised position or the lowered position is allowed to coast to the left and right arm bodies 430 without rotating the left and right arm bodies 430. It is possible to make relative displacement by (action of inertia). The displacement of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38 by taking the displacement at the lowered position as an example.

  37 (a) to 37 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged in the lowered position. In FIG. 37 (a), the state in which the first member 440 is located at the center is shown in FIG. FIGS. 37B and 37C show a state in which the first member 440 is laterally swayed from the state shown in FIG. 37A.

  38 (a) to 38 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) correspond to FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c). Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a), in the state of being arranged at the lowered position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is connected to each sliding groove of the first member 440. It is arranged at a position having a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end of 441a. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the above-described gap.

  For example, by displacing (rotating) one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 at a predetermined speed and then stopping the arm bodies 430, an inertial force generated due to the stop is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 causes A displacement that reciprocates toward the outer end or the inner end of the sliding groove 441a can be formed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is reciprocally moved (sways) left and right by inertia (action of inertia). You can change the movement.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are formed linearly and arranged non-parallel, the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and When the first member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (action of inertia), a rotation component can be added to the movement of the first member 440. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right (sideways) not only by the linear motion but also by the motion in which the linear motion is combined with the rotary motion, and as a result, the motion of the first member 440 is changed. Can be given.

  Further, since each sliding groove 441a is formed in a linear shape, when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a with the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430, resistance is increased. It can be suppressed and slid smoothly. Accordingly, the displacement of the first member 440 due to the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 can be stabilized, and the load on each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially V shape, after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right converges and stops, the first state is brought to the stopped state. The member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, in a state where an effect is performed by another unit or a display device and the central floating unit 400 is retracted to the raised position and is on standby, the first member 440 can be prevented from rattling with respect to the arm body 430 due to a disturbance. .. As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, reciprocating the first member 440 left and right by inertia (action of inertia) after the arm body 430 is stopped means that the first member maintains the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. This is not possible with a structure in which only the linear movement is performed (that is, a conventional product in which the left and right arm bodies cannot be independently displaced), and the left and right arm bodies 430 are independently displaced as in the present embodiment. It was made possible by making it possible. Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  That is, in the structure (conventional product) in which the first member only moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position, even if the arm body is stopped, the first member acts on the first member with the stop. The inertial force exerted cannot act as a trigger for reciprocating (hooking) the first member left and right.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state in which the first member 440 is in the inclined posture, one arm body 430 remains stopped and only the other arm body 430 is displaced (rotated). Since the first member 440 can be arranged at the reference position (for example, the lowered position) (see FIG. 34 and FIG. 35), the inertial force due to the stop of the other arm body 430 causes the first member 440 to reciprocate laterally (rolling). ) It can be used as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to reliably generate the left and right reciprocating motion of the first member 440 and increase the amplitude of the left and right reciprocating motion.

  In addition, here, the lower position is described as an example of the position where the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) to the left and right by inertia (action of inertia) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, but it is understood from the above configuration. As possible, other positions are possible. That is, as long as the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440. May be in the position. Therefore, the reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the ascending position and the descending position, not limited to the ascending position or the descending position. Further, the rotation positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped do not have to be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Next, an operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 to the left and right by utilizing the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. That is, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 is moved to the left and right arm bodies 430 even after the left and right reciprocating motions of the first member 440 due to the inertia (action of inertia) described above have converged. It can be reciprocated left and right without rotating.

  39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged in the lowered position. In FIG. 39 (a), the state in which the first member 440 is located at the center is shown in FIG. 39B and FIG. 39C, a state in which the first member 440 is horizontally swung from the state shown in FIG. 39A is shown.

  40 (a) to 40 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) correspond to FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c). Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), in the state of being arranged in the lowered position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 has the first member 440 as described above. Of the sliding groove 441a is arranged at a position having a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the above-described gap.

  That is, in the first member 440, since the arm member 444 is disposed on the back surface of the base body 441, by displacing (rotating) the arm member 444 by the driving force of the drive motor 445, the reaction force is applied to the base body 441. The connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or the inner end of each sliding groove 441a by the action of the reaction force. As a result, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are in a stopped state, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, and the arm members are As shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b), the arm member 444 is rotated clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the front) from the state in which the 444 is in the neutral position, so that the reaction force acts. This makes it possible to rotate the base body 441 and the front body 442 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in front view, and, as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (c), move the arm member 444 counterclockwise in front view. Rotate around (clockwise).

  Accordingly, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) in a front view by the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right, and the movement can be changed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the arm member 444 of the first member 440 is rotatably supported by the base body 441 and is rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445, so that the arm member 444 is not displaced. The accompanying reaction force can be easily applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 in the rotation direction. As a result, a rotational component can be easily generated in the movements of the base body 441 and the front body 442.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the center of rotation of the arm member 444 (the shaft 441c of the base body 441) is located at the center of the pair of connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 in the left-right direction, the rotation of the arm member 444 may be reversed. The force can be easily linked to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (base 441 and front body 442).

  In addition, here, as the position where the first member 440 is reciprocally moved (swayed) to the left and right by the reaction force when the arm member 444 is rotated, the lowered position is described as an example. It is also possible in position. That is, as long as the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440. May be in the position. Therefore, the reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the ascending position and the descending position, not limited to the ascending position or the descending position. Further, the rotation positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped do not have to be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Here, the first member 440 may be provided with a sense device for detecting its posture, and control for changing the rotation state of the arm member 444 may be performed based on the detection result of the sensor device. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged, or the first member 440 can be reciprocally moved (rolled) to the left and right.

  For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) left and right with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). 37 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocating motion of the base body 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444). To act in a direction to cancel the movements of the base body 441 and the front body 442). Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

  Alternatively, from the state in which the movement of the first member 440 is converged and stopped, or the state in which the first member 440 is reciprocally moved (rolled) to the left and right due to inertia (action of inertia), the first member 440 is moved. The base member 441 and the front body 442 are reciprocally moved, or the arm member 444 is rotated so as to strengthen the reciprocating motion (the direction in which the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is amplified by the movement of the base member 441 and the front body 442). To act). Accordingly, the first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right, and the reciprocation of the first member 440 to the left and right can be changed according to the rotation state of the arm member 444.

  As a sensor, an acceleration sensor (for example, an acceleration sensor (for example, a base member 441, a front body 442, a rear body 443, or the like) disposed in the other portion of the first member 440 excluding the arm member 444 to detect acceleration in the three directions (for example, , A capacitance type, a piezo type, etc.), a distance sensor (for example, a triangulation type or a time of flight type) that detects the distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440, and the like. The distance sensor is provided at at least two places and is configured to detect the relative posture of the first member 440 (base 441 or front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

  Next, cooperation between the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41 (a) is a front view of the center floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the center floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 41B is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 taken along line XLIc-XLIc in FIG.

  41 (a) to 41 (c), the state in which the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position and the left / right rotation unit 500 is arranged in the extended position is shown. 41 (a) to 41 (c), in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are not shown. Only the main components required for explanation are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the left / right rotation unit 500 is arranged in the extended position with the central floating unit 400 arranged in the lowered position, the first member 440 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be able to contact with a pair of cylindrical portions 441b that are erected on the back surface of the base body 441). Thereby, the movement of the first member 430 can be restricted.

  For example, when the central floating unit 400 that has been placed in the raised position is placed in the lowered position by the downward rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430, the left and right rotating unit 500 is placed in the extended position at the same time, and By bringing the displacement member 530 into contact with the member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), as in the case described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the first member 440 reciprocates left and right by inertia (action of inertia) ( It is possible to regulate the rolling.

  Alternatively, when displacing (rotating) the arm member 444 of the first member 440, the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), so that the displacement reaction of the arm member 444 causes a first reaction. It is possible to restrict the members (the base body 441 and the front body 442) from reciprocating (rolling) to the left and right, whereby the front body 442 is maintained in a stopped state and only the arm member 444 is displaced. Can be made visible to the player.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arm is moved according to the disposition position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, by switching whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the tubular portion 441b). A mode in which the first member 540 (the base body 441 and the front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by the reaction force associated with the displacement of the member 444, and the first member 540 (the base body 441 and the front body 442) is maintained in a stopped state. The mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

  Next, the left / right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. First, the relationship between the left and right sensor devices 600 and the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

  42 (a) and 43 (a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (b) are lines XLIIb-XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus 600 in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line of a). In FIG. 42, the first member 440 is shown in the raised position, and in FIG. 43, the first member 440 is shown in the lowered position.

  42 and 43, only the rear case 210, the first member 440, and the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are illustrated, and other configurations are omitted for the sake of simplicity and easy understanding. To be done. Further, in FIGS. 42 and 43, the paths of the light emitted from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light emitted to the plate glass 16a are schematically shown by two-dot chain lines. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45 described later, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left and right sensor device 600 detects a player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquires the presence / absence (presence) or position of the player's finger, or the operation direction or operation speed. And a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. Is set up.

  The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the irradiation regions S1 and S2 of the light with which the plate glass 16a is irradiated are in the width direction of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 42 (a)). The light emitting portions are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portions facing inward so as to have an overlap in the center. Therefore, as described above, the sensor devices 610 and 620 are located at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (positions on the outer side in the width direction) with the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) interposed therebetween. It can be arranged, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  In this case, the front side of the plate glass 16a (the front side in FIG. 42 (a), the lower side in FIG. 42 (b)), and the oblique front side of the irradiation regions S1 and S2 (the front side in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting unit). ) Has a player's finger, the light emitted from the light emitting unit and transmitted through the plate glass 16a is reflected by the player's finger, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving unit. The presence of a person's finger is detected.

  The left and right sensor device 600 has the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 disposed on the left and right, and can perform detection at two locations in front of the plate glass 16a (areas corresponding to the irradiation areas S1 and S2). Therefore, based on the detection results of both the sensors 610 and 620, the position of the player's finger (whether the irradiation area S1 or the irradiation area S2 is located in front), the operation direction (the irradiation area S1 to the irradiation area S2). It is possible to detect the direction toward or the opposite direction) or the operation speed (the speed at which the irradiation areas S1 and S2 are traversed).

  Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the light paths of the left and right sensor devices 600 (the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) are set so as to overlap the moving region of the first member 440. To be done. That is, the first member 440 is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the plate glass 16a) of the left and right sensor device.

  In this case, the first member 440 is, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), in front of the plate glass 16a (front side of FIG. 43 (a), lower side of FIG. 43 (b)). The area in the oblique front of the irradiation area S1 (the front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610) (hereinafter referred to as the “detection area of the first sensor 610”) and the front of the plate glass 16a. And is displaced to a position partitioning an area (hereinafter, referred to as a “detection area of the second sensor 620”) diagonally forward of the irradiation area S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620). It is possible.

  As a result, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated in front of the plate glass 16a. Therefore, the second sensor 620 surely avoids the player's finger in the detection area of the first sensor 610, and the first sensor 610 surely avoids the player's hand in the detection area of the second sensor 620. it can.

  Therefore, for example, an effect that allows the player to make an alternative selection (for example, two left and right positions in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (a position corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620). The selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed at two positions corresponding to the detection region, and the player brings his or her finger closer to one of the two regions (detection positions) corresponding to the selection target. Then, when performing an effect of selecting one of them, the detection accuracy of the player's selection operation can be increased.

  Further, in the central floating unit 400, as described above, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed to be independently displaceable (rotatable), and the arm member 444 is relatively displaceable to the first member 440 (base body 441). Since the first member 440 is vertically arranged, the first member 440 can be linearly moved up and down along the vertical direction, and the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) horizontally (see FIG. 39). Further, the stop position of the first member 440 can be biased to either the left or right direction (see FIGS. 33 and 34).

  Accordingly, the size of at least one or both of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be changed according to the movement (position) of the first member 440. Therefore, for example, in accordance with a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player moves his or her finger to search for a position (detection area) where the finger is detected. It can be performed.

  Further, for example, the first member 440 can block one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 or the detection area of the second sensor 620 to make it undetectable, so that the third symbol display device 81 Despite the fact that the player is instructed to select the selection target with his / her fingers, the first member 440 shields one side of the detection area to obstruct the player's selection operation. It can be carried out. Alternatively, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas, so that the third symbol display device 81 can be directed to display an instruction prompting the player to select the other one.

  44 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a).

  As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed of a light-transmissive material, a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) are arranged inside, and the plurality of light emitting means emit light (turn on or off). By blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be emitted to the outside from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface. This allows the player to visually recognize that the entire front body 442 (front surface and outer peripheral surface) is emitting light.

  In this case, when the light emitted from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (in particular, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the light is incident. The interference between the emitted light and the light emitted from the light emitting unit occurs and the light receiving unit directly receives the incident light, resulting in erroneous detection.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the light emitted from the front body 442 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface) to the outside is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. Displacement member 530 can be displaced to a position where it can shield (a position that crosses a virtual line (broken line arrow in FIG. 44B) connecting front body 442 and each sensor 610, 620, hereinafter referred to as “shielding position”). Formed in. Therefore, when the light emitting means of the front body 442 is caused to emit light, by displacing the displacement member 530 to the shielding position, the respective sensors 610, 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 from the light emitted from the light emitting means. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensors 610 and 620 can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the displacement member 530 also serves as a unit for blocking the light emitted from the light emitting unit from being incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, so that a permanent shielding member is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide it, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, so that a space can be secured by that amount as compared with the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retracting the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for displacement of another displacement member.

  Further, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed so as to be able to move up and down between a raised position and a lowered position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and depending on the displacement position of the first member 440, The displacing member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed in the shielding position. That is, the displacement member 530 can follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 regardless of the arrangement (elevation position) of the first member 440.

  That is, when a permanent shielding member is provided so as to cover the entire movable range of the first member 440, a large space is required for disposing the shielding member. Since the first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position according to the displacement (elevation position) of the first member 440, the displacement member 530 can be downsized. Therefore, the permanent shielding member can be eliminated, so that not only the cost of parts can be reduced and the space can be secured, but also the load of the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the relationship between the left / right sensor device 600 and the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described.

  45 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 45, the left-right rotation unit 500 is formed such that the left and right displacement members 530 are displaceable (rotatable) between a retracted position (see FIG. 7) and an extended position (see FIG. 8). Where a sensor (not shown) that detects that the left and right displacement members 530 are arranged at the retracted position and the extended position is provided, the left and right displacement members 530 are provided between the retracted position and the extended position. At the intermediate position (predetermined position), it is formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620.

  The left and right sensor device 600 is formed such that the sensors 610 and 620 can independently detect that the displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are arranged at intermediate positions (predetermined positions). Thus, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided with means for detecting the presence or absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the plate glass 16a and means for detecting the disposition of the displacement member 530 at the intermediate position. It can be combined. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is arranged at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The position at which the displacement members 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 are detected by the respective sensors 610 and 620 of the left / right sensor device 600 may be the extended position instead of the intermediate position. It is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacing member 530 is arranged at the projecting position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method for detecting the stain D on the plate glass 16a by the left and right sensor device 600 will be described.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16, and correspond to FIG. 42 (b). Note that, in FIG. 46, the path of the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated using a chain double-dashed line. In addition, in FIG. 42A, the object F existing in the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the dirt D attached to the irradiation area S1 (see FIG. 42A) in FIG. It is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, for example, when the object F (a player's finger) is present in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), the light is emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610. The light passes through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, is then reflected by the object F, and follows the same path as the outward path, and is thus received by the light receiving section of the first sensor 610. As a result, the presence of the player's fingers is detected by the first sensor 610.

  In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are directed inward (see FIG. 42), and as described above, the game board 13 is provided. It is possible to dispose them at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening (see FIG. 6), and the respective sensors 610 and 620 are visually recognized by the player. It can be hard to be done.

  However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 with respect to the plate glass 16a becomes large (the incident direction and the plate glass 16a are close to parallel to each other. Therefore, if dirt D (for example, oil of the player's hand) is attached to the plate glass 16a, the dirt D causes light to be reflected in a direction different from the outward path, and the reflected light is reflected by the first sensor 610. The light receiving part of cannot receive light. Therefore, it is impossible for the first sensor 610 to detect whether or not the dirt D is attached to the plate glass 16a.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with their light emitting portion and light receiving portion facing inward, the irradiation area S1 of the plate glass 16a is soiled. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, whereby the stain D on the irradiation area S1 on the plate glass 16a is detected. The presence or absence of adherence can be detected. The presence or absence of the stain D on the irradiation area S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light receiving section of the first sensor 610 detects the light emitted from the light emitting section of the second sensor 620.

  That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, the dirt D is attached to the irradiation area S1, and the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620 receives the light. If not, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610, the dirt D is attached to the irradiation area S2, and the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610 causes the light emission. When no light is received, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S2.

  Here, it is preferable that the detection of the stain D on the plate glass 16a by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is performed in a process when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since the player has not entered the store, there is no object F (a player's finger) in front of the plate glass 16a (the detection area of each sensor 610, 620). Therefore, the object F and the dirt D are distinguished (for example, based on the difference between the path length when reflected by the object and the path length when reflected by the dirt D, a threshold is set for the time required from light emission to light reception. This is because it is not necessary to perform (providing), and the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of the stain D on the plate glass 16a can be improved accordingly.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 (a) is a side view of the container 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLVIIb in FIG. 47 (a). Note that FIG. 47 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). Further, FIGS. 47A and 47B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  In the first embodiment, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, the rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b by the transmission mechanism, but the transmission in the second embodiment is described. The mechanism is formed so that the transmission of the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the second rotating body 340b can be intermittent. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 47A and 47D, the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment has a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and the drive gear 351 is meshed with the drive gear 351 in order. The gear train includes a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355.

  The first gear 2353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the number of teeth, and the other configurations are the same. The number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 is different from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and the two gears (the first side intermediate gear 2354a and the second side intermediate gear 2354b) are axially arranged (see FIG. 47). (B) It is formed as an integrated member that is concentrically overlapped in the left-right direction.

  The first side intermediate gear 2354a is formed with teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 2353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (first rotating body 340a) is being rotated, the intermediate gear 2354 (first side intermediate gear 2354a and second side intermediate gear 2354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation thereof. It The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is set to 21.

  The second side intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 2354a except for the fact that some of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a are omitted. Specifically, the second side intermediate gear 2354b has a non-meshing region in which seven teeth are omitted (removed) and a remaining region of the non-meshing region (that is, 14 teeth And a meshing region which is a region continuous in the direction) is formed.

  In the non-meshing region of the second-side intermediate gear 2354b, teeth are omitted (removed) and cannot mesh with the teeth of the second gear 2355, so that rotation transmission from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355 is prevented. To be cut off. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth of the second gear 2355 can be meshed with each other, and the rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

  In this case, the non-meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is a region formed by omitting seven teeth from the first side intermediate gear 2354a whose number of teeth is set to 21, The central angle is 120 degrees, and the meshing area is an area corresponding to the remaining 14 teeth, so the central angle is 240 degrees.

  Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in the section corresponding to the non-meshing region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are non-meshed, and the second side intermediate gear 2354b is The second gear 2355 is rotated in a section corresponding to the start-up area in which the second gear 2355 is meshed. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 240 degrees.

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b. 49 and 50 are schematic side views of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b showing transition states when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated. 49 (e) to FIG. 50A to 50D in the states shown as Nos. 1 to 5 are shown in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 9, respectively.

  48 to 50, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by the reference symbols "A to C" in the second rotation, as in the case of the first embodiment. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by reference numerals "A 'to C'", respectively.

  Here, the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition position (the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (a)). ) Is hereinafter referred to as "initial state". In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set to the boundary position on one side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the start of the non-meshing region). (See FIG. 47 (a)).

  48. 1 and FIG. 49 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotary body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotary body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 1 "A ', A", first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 2354 (the first gear). Due to the action of the non-meshing region in the second side intermediate gear 2354b), the rotation is not transmitted and the rotation state is maintained.

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  48. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated by 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)), and accordingly, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated by 120 degrees. Since the intermediate gear 2354 is rotated with respect to the second gear 2355, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 is arranged at the boundary position on the other side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the start end of the meshing region, the end of the non-meshing region). To be done.

  48. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the meshing area (the first half 120 degrees area of the central angle 240 degrees).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49C, the second rotating body 340b positions the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. As a result, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  48. 3 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 ° due to the action of the meshing region (the latter half of the central angle of 240 °, which is 120 °).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49D, the second rotating body 340b positions the third display plate 343C at the visual recognition position. As a result, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  48. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)), and along with this, the intermediate gear 2354 also becomes 360. Since the intermediate gear 2354 is rotated with respect to the second gear 2355, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 is arranged at the boundary position on one side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the start of the non-meshing region). To be done.

  The subsequent steps are substantially the same as the above-described aspect (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (a) to the state shown in No. 3 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (c)). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table makes one round from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, No. 1 in FIG. 4 to No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 6, it may be considered by replacing the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No in FIG. 48). .5 “C ′, B”) and a sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In addition, in FIG. 7-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 9, it can be considered by replacing the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No in FIG. 48). .7 "B ', A"), an eighth combination (No.8 "B', B" in FIG. 48) and a ninth combination (No.9 "C ', C" in FIG.48) are formed. be able to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is formed as a gear train composed of a plurality of gears, The first gear (intermediate gear 2354) has a meshing region that meshes with the mating gear (second gear 2355) to transmit the rotation, and a meshing region that does not mesh with the mating gear and blocks the rotation transmission. A non-occlusal region is formed.

  As a result, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so that the combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form 9 combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective effect by rotating the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  Particularly, according to the present embodiment, there are two states: a state in which the second rotating body 340b is stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a and a state in which both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. A state can be formed. That is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and the stop of the second rotating body 340b can be released to restart the rotation, so that the first rotating body 340a and The interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of figures of the second rotating body 340b can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directivity in the rotation direction, it is possible to switch the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 48 by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 48) is formed. 48, the table of FIG. 48 is moved forward (downward in FIG. 48) to reveal the eighth combination, and the table of FIG. 48 is moved backward (upward in FIG. 48). Then, the ninth combination can be revealed.

  As a result, as in the former case, No. 1 in FIG. 7 to No. In the transition to 8, the second combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) of the first rotation body 340a is rotated while the second rotation body 340b is stopped to reveal the eighth combination. (1) "B '" is already displayed on one side, the other is switched from "A" to "B" to display "B', B", and the latter As in the case of FIG. 9 to No. In the shift to 8, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are both rotated to expose the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) (that is, one side). And both the other figures are switched and "B ', B" is revealed) and an effect can be arbitrarily selected and executed according to the game state.

  Further, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees seven times, whereas in the latter case, the rotation of the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees twice. Since it suffices to perform it, a desired combination of figures can be promptly revealed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a non-meshing region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (second side intermediate gear 2354b), and rotation and stop of the second rotating body 340b are performed while the first rotating body 340a is rotating. Are switched, and the combination of figures is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-meshing region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are provided with the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, respectively, and the graphics drawn on each outer peripheral surface are arranged at intervals of 120 degrees, it is possible to perform non-coupling. The formation range (center angle) of the area is set to 120 degrees.

  As a result, the phases of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b do not shift, so that the combination of the graphic of the first rotary body 340a and the graphic of the second rotary body 340b is used as an element in the table shown in FIG. The length can be shortened (the number of stages of the table can be reduced). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b required to bring out a desired combination of figures. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required to bring out a desired combination of figures.

  However, the formation range of the non-meshing region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set so as not to correspond to the intervals between the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, when the formation range of the non-meshing region is set to the range of the central angle of 108 degrees, a phase shift of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is generated as in the case of the first embodiment. be able to. Therefore, while it is possible to form a plurality of combinations of graphics (for example, 9 combinations), it is possible to form a state in which the graphics are not combined, so that the player can visually recognize the deviation of the graphics (the combination is not established).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. 51 (a) is a side view of the container 330 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 51 (b) is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a). Note that FIG. 51 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). Further, FIGS. 51A and 51B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the non-interlocking region and the interlocking region are formed in the intermediate gear 2354 at each one position has been described. Two mating regions are formed each. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51D, the transmission mechanism according to the third embodiment has a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and the drive gear 351 is meshed with the drive gear 351 in order. The gear train includes a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355.

  The first gear 3353 is different from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 is different from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment in the number of teeth and the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. The number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355, and the two gears (the first side intermediate gear 3354a and the second side intermediate gear 3354b) are axially arranged (see FIG. 51). (B) It is formed as an integrated member that is concentrically overlapped in the left-right direction.

  On the first side intermediate gear 3354a, teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 3353 are formed over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 3353 (first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 3354 (first side intermediate gear 3354a and second side intermediate gear 3354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation thereof. It The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is set to 35.

  The second side intermediate gear 3354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 3354a except for the fact that some of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a are omitted. Specifically, in the second side intermediate gear 3354b, the first non-meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2, which are regions in which seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth From the first meshing region Y1 and the first meshing region Y1 that is located in one of the meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2 and is a region in which seven teeth are circumferentially continuous. A second interlocking region Y2, which is a region where the 14 teeth are circumferentially continuous and is located on the other side between the first interlocking region X1 and the second non-interlocking region X2 with the phases being different by 180 degrees. And are formed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is rotated 120 degrees in the first meshing region Y1. At the same time, in the second meshing region Y2, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) can be rotated 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2, while the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is stopped, the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353). ) Can each be rotated 120 degrees.

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the third embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 53 and 54 are schematic side views of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b showing transition states when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated, respectively. 53A to 53D are shown in FIG. 54 (a) and 54 (b) in the state shown as Nos. 1 to 4 in FIG. The states shown as 5 and 6 respectively correspond.

  52 to 54, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are referred to by the reference symbols "A to C" to perform the second rotation. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by reference numerals "A 'to C'", respectively.

  Here, in the initial state in the third embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively set to the visible position. It is in a placed state. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first meshing region Y1). (The start end of the non-interlocking region X1) (see FIG. 51 (a)).

  No. 2 in FIG. 1 and FIG. 53 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 1 "A ', A", first combination), the first rotary body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotary body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (the first gear). Due to the action of the first non-meshing region X1 in the second side intermediate gear 3354b), the rotation is not transmitted and the rotation state is maintained.

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53B, the second rotary body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and accordingly, the second gear 3355 is rotated. The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is at the boundary position between the first non-meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region Y2 (the start end of the second meshing region Y2, the end of the first non-meshing region X1). Will be placed.

  No. 2 in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth in the first half of 14 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 53C, the second rotating body 340b positions the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. As a result, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  No. 2 in FIG. 3 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth in the latter half of 14 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53D, the second rotating body 340b positions the third display plate 343C at the visual recognition position. As a result, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and with this, the second gear 3355 is rotated. The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is arranged at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-meshing region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the start of the second non-meshing region). To be done.

  No. 2 in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). Due to the action of the second non-meshing region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b), the rotation is not transmitted and the rotation state is maintained.

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), the second rotary body 340b is maintained in a state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position. As a result, the fifth combination (No. 5 “C ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52. 5 and the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated by 480 degrees (120 degrees × 4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). , The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the second non-meshing region X2 and the first meshing region Y1 (the end of the second non-meshing region X, the first meshing region). It is arranged at the start point) of the region Y1.

  No. 2 in FIG. 5 and the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 54 (b), the second rotating body 340b positions the first display plate 343A at the visual recognition position. As a result, the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52. 6 and the state shown in FIG. 54 (b), the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase with respect to the second gear 3355 is such that the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the first meshing region Y1 It is set to the terminal end, the starting end of the first non-meshing region X1 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Therefore, hereinafter, substantially the same as the above-described aspect (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 (a) to the state shown in No. 6 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 54 (b)). The same aspect is repeated. As a result, nine combinations can be formed in one cycle (one round from the start point to the end point of the table). In this embodiment, the number of stages in the table for one cycle is 15.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is formed as a gear train composed of a plurality of gears, The first gear (intermediate gear 3354) has a meshing region (first and second meshing regions Y1 and Y2) that meshes with the gear (second gear 3355) of the other party and transmits rotation, and Non-meshing regions (first and second non-meshing regions Y1 and Y2) that are non-meshing with respect to the gear and block transmission of rotation are formed.

  As a result, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so that the combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form 9 combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective effect by rotating the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  Particularly, according to the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-meshing regions (first and second non-meshing regions X1 and X2) that block the transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. The teeth are arranged in a distributed manner, and the meshing regions and the non-mating regions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, in No. 2 of FIG. 4 to No. As in the state shown by 7, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be stopped continuously by two types of figures. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation and interest in visually recognizing the combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Further, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directivity in the rotation direction, it is possible to switch the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 52 by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 4 to No. By switching the traveling direction between forward and reverse between 7 and 7, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the rotational speeds of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b differently.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 (a) is a top view of the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVb in FIG. 55 (a). 55C is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55A. Note that, in FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of the base body 410, the cover body 420, and the like is omitted, and only main components necessary for description are illustrated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430 has been described, but the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment are described. 4449 are formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. In addition, the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), in the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, sliding grooves 4439 are formed in the distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 4430, and A pair of connecting pins 4449 inserted into the respective sliding grooves 4439 are provided so as to project from the back surface of the first member 4440.

  The sliding groove 4439 is formed as a linearly extending opening in the shape of a long hole in a front view, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connecting pin 4449 is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section that is slidable along the sliding groove 441a. The arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are relatively movably coupled to each other via the sliding groove 4439 and the coupling pin 4449. A collar having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 as a retaining member.

  As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the pair of arm bodies 4430 and the first member 4440 are formed by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. In the structure for connecting, the connecting pin 4449 is projected from the first member 4440, and the sliding groove 4439 is formed in the pair of arm bodies 4430. Therefore, by adjusting the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm bodies 4430, The direction (inclination angle) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

  That is, when the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped and the first member 4440 is reciprocated (rolls) to the left and right by inertia (action of inertia) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated). When the first member 4440 is reciprocated to the left and right (laterally swayed) by the action of the reaction force generated by (), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted to adjust the rotation angle of the pair of members. By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocation of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially V-shape, as described above, since the rotational component can be imparted, the first member 440 is Not only linear motion, but also a combination of linear motion and rotary motion makes it possible to reciprocate left and right (roll).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (opposite angle of the V-shape) is adjusted. As a result, the mode of the reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed.

  For example, by decreasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (decreasing the facing angle of the C-shape), the rotational component is increased, and the reciprocating motion (rolling) of the first member 4440 to the left and right (lateral vibration) is increased. The rate of rotary movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (increasing the facing angle of the C-shape), the rotational component is reduced, and the first member 4440 is reciprocated to the left and right (sway). The rate of linear movement can be increased.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), since the pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged in a straight line, the rotation component is not generated and the first member 4440 is moved to the left and right. The reciprocating motion (rolling) of can be performed only by a linear motion. That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the first member 4440 horizontally moves in the left-right direction.

  As described above, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is changed to change the mode of reciprocal movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right (the mode including the rotational component and the mode including the rotational component). However, it is not possible in the first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (base body 441), and it is possible to achieve both the aspect of the linear component only). This is possible only when the sliding groove 4439 is formed at the tip. Thereby, the movement of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  Next, the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 (a) and 57 (a) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotating unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are the central floating unit 400. 9 is a cross-sectional rear view of the left / right rotation unit 5500. FIG.

  56 (b) and 57 (b) correspond to FIG. 41 (c). Further, in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. is omitted, and the main components necessary for the description are shown. Only the configuration is shown.

  The left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment is arranged such that the overhang position is lower than the left / right rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the left / right rotating unit 5500 is placed in the projecting position while the central floating unit 400 is in the lowered position, the displacement member 530 of the left / right rotating unit 5500 causes the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 ( It is possible to push down the pair of cylindrical portions 441b that are erected on the back surface of the base body 441).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are alternately arranged at the projecting position in the state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the descending position (one of them is stretched). It is possible to reciprocate (roll) the first member 440 left and right by arranging the first member 440 in the extended position and slightly retracting the other from the extended position.

  In this case, the operation of alternately arranging the left and right displacement members 530 at the extended position, the operation of retracting from the extended position, and the reciprocating motion (lateral vibration) of the first member 440 to the left and right. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) so that and are linked (synchronized). The whole of the first member 440 and the left and right displacement members 530 can be interlocked to form a motion that shakes up and down and left and right, and the player can recognize a large motion with a sense of unity.

  Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 collides with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), and the reaction (inertia) generated by the collision causes the first member 440 to reciprocate laterally (sway) and at the same time. After the lapse of time, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then be caused to collide with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b) so that the first member 440 continues to reciprocate leftward and rightward (sway). The player can be recognized by emphasizing the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right.

  Thus, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is moved relative to the arm body 430 by inertia (action of inertial force) when the upward rotation or the downward rotation of the arm body 430 of the central floating unit 400 is stopped. Not only the form of reciprocating left and right, but the form of reciprocating the first member 440 left and right by utilizing the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 without utilizing the inertial force resulting from the displacement of the arm body 430. Can also be formed.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the rotating body elevating / lowering unit 300, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each include three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the three surfaces Although the case where the player visually recognizes the combination is described, the invention is not limited to this, and the number n of the display surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the number m of the display surfaces of the second rotating body 340b are not limited to this. It may be set to a different value.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the rotating body lifting unit 300, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is the drive gear 351, the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353. , 2353, 3353, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and the second gear 355. , 2355, 3355 may be formed at least.

  For example, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354 are disposed on the first rotating body 340a, and the second gears 355, 2355, and 3355 are engaged with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354 in the second rotating body 340b. And the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or the second gears 355, 2355, 3355. According to this structure, the number of gears can be reduced and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the rotating body elevating / lowering unit 300, the base portion 331 is provided with the reflecting portion RF on the front surface (inner surface) of the portion forming the back surface (the inner side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B) of the housing body 330. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reflection part RF may be provided in another part. Examples of the other portion include the inner surface of the portion of the base body 331 that forms the upper surface or the lower surface of the container 330. Since each of these surfaces is a surface facing the outer peripheral surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, the light emitted from the LED 344 is directed to the player. It can be reflected so as to be visible.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section, when the rotary bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the above-mentioned reflection is accompanied by the rotation. It is possible to increase or decrease the gap between each inner surface of the base body 441 on which the plate RF is disposed and the outer peripheral surface of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (the vertical gap in FIG. 18B), and at the same time, the reflector plate RF is provided. It is possible to change the facing angle between the display plates 343A to 343C of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b with respect to the inner surfaces of the base body 441 arranged. Thereby, the mode of the reflected light can be changed for the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmissive portion PN as the reflected light from the reflective portion RF.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the rotating shafts of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged parallel to each other in the rotating body lifting unit 300, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the orthogonal It may be one that does. This allows the player to displace (move) the figures respectively drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second outer peripheral surface 340b in directions orthogonal to each other. In this case, each of the display plates 344A to 344C is preferably formed in a square shape when viewed from the front. This is because when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged side by side, a sense of unity of the figures drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces can be formed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the number of the rotating bodies (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b) arranged in one housing 330 in the rotating body lifting unit 300 is two has been described. However, the number is not limited to this, and may be three or more.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the base end sides of the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotatably supported by the base body 410 in the central floating unit 400 has been described. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be slidably displaced with respect to the base body 410. Since the left and right arm bodies 430 can be independently displaced also by the slide displacement, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed as in the case of each of the above embodiments.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) and inertial force is applied. The case where the first member 440 is displaceable relative to the arm member 430 when the arm member 430 is acted on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm body 430 and the first member 440 may be moved relative to each other. The displaceably connected structure may be another structure.

  As another structure, for example, the distal end of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, a rubber-like elastic body, urethane, a metal coil spring / torsion spring, a leaf spring, etc.). Then, a structure that allows relative displacement by elastic deformation of the elastic member, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are rotatably connected by a shaft and a shaft hole, and relative displacement is caused by rotation of the shaft relative to the shaft hole. And a structure in which the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by a spherical ball and a stud that makes spherical contact with the ball, and relative displacement is possible by rotation of the ball with respect to the stud. A structure in which the distal end of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or a plurality of link mechanisms, and relative displacement is enabled by deformation of the link mechanisms, and a part or all of these are assembled. Align were structures, and the like are exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation method when disposing the central floating unit 400 in the ascending position or the descending position has been described, but each of these operation methods is an example, and it is naturally possible to adopt other operation methods. .. Therefore, for example, in the operation method shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, a part thereof may be replaced with another operation method.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, when the first member 440 is reciprocally moved (sways) left and right by inertia (action of inertia), the left and right arm bodies 430 are maintained in a stopped state. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) with a predetermined amplitude before the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right converges. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the first member 440 is reciprocated to the left and right without causing the player to recognize the movement of the arm body 430, and the reciprocation due to inertia occurs. It is possible for the player to recognize that it is continued.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the case where the arm member 444 has a symmetrical shape and the center of gravity of the arm member 444 is located at the center in the left-right direction has been described. The center of gravity may be eccentric to either side in the left-right direction. According to this, the reaction force applied to the base body 441 in accordance with the rotation of the arm member 444 can be increased, and the reciprocal movement (lateral rolling) of the first member 440 to the left and right can be increased and a change can be given.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the central floating unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500 and 5500, the displacement member 530 is brought into direct contact with the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) to move the first member 440. Although the case of restricting or causing movement of the first member 440 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other, The same operation may be formed to be executable.

  Specifically, the magnet is arranged on one of the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) or the displacement member 530, and the magnet is disposed on one of the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or an iron member is provided and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member, so that the first member 440 moves. A structure for restricting the movement or for causing the first member 440 to move is exemplified.

  According to this, the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 can be made non-contact with each other to avoid contact with each other, and thus damage due to collision can be suppressed. When an iron member is disposed on the other of the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440. , And the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440 are balanced so that the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530. Put in contact.

<Regarding control configuration>
Next, with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. 111, a first control example of the control configuration in the first embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the first control example>
Next, a first control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 111. FIG. 58A is a diagram showing the frame button 22 and the touch switch 290. The frame button 22 has a push-down section that the player pushes down, and when the push-down section is pushed down a predetermined amount, the limit type switch is turned on. The pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the frame button 22 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and also at the next monitoring timing (2 ms later) when it is determined to be "ON" from the "OFF" state. If it is determined to be "ON", it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is erroneously determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed when it is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like. In addition, when the frame button 22 is not continuously pressed, that is, the state is switched from the “ON” state to the “OFF” state, and the “OFF” state is determined at the next monitoring timing, the frame button 22 is pressed. Is determined to have been canceled.

  The touch switch 290 is arranged close to the frame button 22 on the front side. The touch switch 290 has a sensor portion arranged substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the upper plate 17, and infrared rays are radiated from the sensor portion. The touch switch 290 is configured to turn on when the infrared rays hit an object and are reflected. There is. Therefore, the player can turn on the sensor by bringing the hand or the like close to the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 to a predetermined distance. In order to turn on the touch switch 290, bringing the hand or the like closer to the sensor unit is called operating the touch switch 290.

  Similarly to the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 also monitors the state of the touch switch 290 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and the state is determined to be “OFF” and then changed to the “ON” state. Then, when it is further determined to be "ON", it is determined that the touch switch 290 has been operated by the player, and processing such as changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The word "touch" is shown on the upper surface of the sensor portion of the touch switch 290 so that the player can easily recognize that the touch switch 290 is arranged.

  FIG. 58B is a diagram showing the configuration of the selection switch 291. The selection switch 291 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22 and is composed of a push switch similar to the frame button 22. The selection switch 291 includes an upper selection switch 291a formed of an upward triangle and a lower selection switch 291b formed of a downward triangle. The selection switch 291 is used by being pressed by the player when mainly adjusting the volume. By pressing the upper selection switch 291a, the volume is set to be high. Also, by pressing the lower selection switch 291b, the volume is set to be low. When each switch is pressed and turned on, a signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 so that it can be determined that the switch has been pressed.

  On the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 59, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the vertical direction. Each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 is composed of a main symbol composed of characters and numbers, and a sub symbol (blank symbol) provided between the main symbols. These symbol columns are scrolled in the direction of arrow X (from right to left) with periodicity to perform variable display. Especially in the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, and in the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in the descending order.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right for each symbol column Z1 to Z3. The left column part of this display area is set as an effective line L1, and at each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the upper symbol column Z1, the lower symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. To be done. If the combination of the big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the middle row of the display area is the effective line L2, the right row is the effective line L3, and the diagonal line from the lower left to the upper right is the effective line L4. , A diagonal line from the upper left to the lower right is composed of the activated line L5 and a total of five activated lines, and even if the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

  Although omitted in FIG. 59, in the display area of the third symbol display device, a sub display area is provided in addition to the above-described display area (main display area) in which the third symbol is displayed. The sub display area is provided horizontally below the main display area, and is further equally divided into three small areas in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area on the left side is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, and other small areas. The area is an area for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area of the sub display area. In the small area, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count patterns are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is four. Indicates a sphere. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  Further, in the present control example, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the symbol only attached to the symbol in the case of super-reach, etc. There is a case where the display area is enlarged and the display area of the small display area disappears. With this configuration, it is possible to display a display mode with freshness to the player.

  In addition, in the present control example, the ball to the first winning opening 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of holding balls in the small area, the number of holding balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of holding balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a display mode of the left / right selection effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 60A is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guiding unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect is executed. When the left-right selection effect is executed, first, the central floating unit 400 covers the common area where the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area (detection area) S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap. To descend.

  When the central floating unit 400 descends, the central floating unit 400 that descends blocks the light emitted from the left and right sensor devices 600, and the light does not reach the glass plate 16a. As a result, the surface of the glass plate 16a corresponding to the position where the central floating unit 400 descends is excluded from the detection areas of the left and right sensor devices, and the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are removed. The irradiation area (detection area) is separated.

  The contents to be selected by the player are displayed in the display areas corresponding to the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 divided in this way (in FIG. 60, the display area corresponding to the irradiation area S1 shows the sunset background, the irradiation area). A starry sky background is displayed in the display area corresponding to S2). With this configuration, the player can make an arbitrary selection by looking at the display content displayed in the display area and touching the glass plate 16a corresponding to the display screen. Further, the area where the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap and the area in the vicinity of the overlapping area are excluded from the irradiation areas of the left and right sensor devices 600 by the central floating unit 400. Since the irradiation area S1 and the irradiation area S2 are completely separated, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the side not selected by the player detects the finger of the player.

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the left and right sensor device 600 and the descent control of the central floating unit 400 in this control example, when an effect that only detects whether the player is touching the glass plate 16a is executed, Since the left and right sensor devices 600 are provided so that the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 partially overlap, it is possible to detect the player's fingers in a wide area. When the player performs an effect of selecting either left or right, the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 can be completely separated, and the player can It is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the non-selected side detects the player's finger. Thus, for a plurality of effects for detecting the fingers of the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early by constructing a detection situation suitable for each effect.

  In the present control example, the central floating unit 400 is configured to realize the left / right selection effect by dividing the irradiation regions (detection regions) S1 and S2 of the left / right sensor device 600, but the left and right are configured using other configurations. It may be configured such that the selection effect can be realized. Another example in which the left / right selection effect can be realized will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state of the third symbol display device 81, the central guiding unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect in another example is executed. In this another example, when the left / right selection process is executed, the central floating unit 400 is first lowered so as to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the position information of the central floating unit 400 is calculated by acquiring information from the acceleration sensor provided in the central floating unit 400.

  Then, based on the calculated position information, a predetermined display area, which is not covered by the central floating unit 400, is set as the left / right selection display area in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the left / right selection display area is left / right. Display the selection screen. Next, the left / right selection device 600 is changed so that the irradiation positions (detection positions) S1 and S2 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 that form the left / right sensor device 600 overlap the left / right selection screen.

  According to the configuration of the another example described above, the left / right selection displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the movement of the variable member (central floating unit 400) that covers the display region of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to change the display position of the screen and the irradiation position (detection position) of the left and right sensor device 600, there is an effect that the selection operation by the player in the left and right selection effect can be reliably detected.

  In this example, the position of the variable member is calculated by using the acceleration sensor. However, the position of the variable member is not limited to this, and the position of the variable member may be calculated from the execution status of the program for controlling the driving of the variable member. Good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect period (mode C) will be described. 55 minutes after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a presentation called a pet time called a pet time and a touch switch 290 is displayed as a time production period (mode C) of 5 minutes. The display mode is displayed. In this period, the display mode (see FIG. 59) displayed in the normal production period (mode A) is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 61. The main display area in which the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed in the lower right, and the dog character is displayed in the other areas. Then, in the lower left display area, an effect is displayed that prompts the player to operate the touch center 290 to display an effect of calling the dog nearby (an effect of enlarging and displaying the dog). The character "call" is displayed to inform the player that the effect of calling the dog is displayed when the touch switch 290 is operated.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing an example of a "stroking effect" mode as a contact effect. In the “stroking effect”, the hand is brought close to a distance where the touch switch 290 can be turned on, and the periphery of the frame button 22 is urged to turn on (operate) the touch switch 290. When the touch switch 290 is turned on, the design imitating the hand displayed on the dog's head is also rotated and displayed so that the dog's head is stroked, and the dog is variably displayed with a happy expression.

  By doing so, the player's hand moves as if he were stroking the dog, so that the player can feel as if he was stroking the dog. In addition, an indicator is displayed on the upper part of the display mode for notifying the operation, a predetermined lottery is performed based on the player's stroking action, and the right side of the display screen is displayed according to the result of the lottery. The displayed indicator rises.

  The indicator displayed on the right side of the display screen displays the fish school reliability until the arrival of the next time effect period (effect period based on the time information acquired from RTC 292). That is, the contact effect executed during the time effect period is an effect for setting the fish school reliability, and by operating a large number of touch switches 290 during the contact effect, the reliability of the fish group until the next time effect period. It is configured to be set to a higher degree.

  With such a configuration, the player can change the reliability of the effect by his / her own operation, so that the player can actively participate in the game and suppress the tiredness of the game. Becomes

  In this control example, “stroking effect” is described as the contact effect, but a plurality of contact effect contents may be provided. In the case where a plurality of effect contents are provided, it is preferable to provide an effect in which the indicator has a high rate of rise, but the indicator is lowered if the indicator is operated by mistake so that the player can select the game property. As such an effect, for example, "brushing effect" can be considered. In the "brushing effect", the indicator can be greatly raised by successfully brushing the displayed torso of the dog, and the indicator can be lowered if the dog's face is mistakenly brushed.

  In addition, an effect may be provided in which the indicator descends when the player performs a contact effect. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to arbitrarily set settings such as intentionally lowering the fish school reliability and increasing the appearance frequency.

  In addition, a plurality of types of dogs may be prepared, and the degree of raising the indicator and the type of performance that can be set may be changed depending on the type of dog. When preparing a plurality of types of dogs, for example, the types of dogs that appear may be changed based on a plurality of missions and game contents in the normal period. With such a configuration, in order to obtain a desired privilege during the contact effect, the game in the normal period is concentrated and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  In addition, when the touch switch 290 is operated by rotating the periphery of the frame button 22, it is generally assumed that when the touch switch 290 is operated quickly, the touch switch 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms to 300 ms. Therefore, when the interval at which the touch switch 290 is turned on is 151 ms to 500 ms including 200 ms to 300 ms, the indicator is set to be most easily raised. Therefore, more privilege can be given to the player who operates the touch switch 290 quickly by the correct operation. Further, in this "stroking effect", the player does not increase the level of the indicator for the player who keeps the touch switch 290 turned on all the time, that is, the player who just holds his hand over the touch switch 290. did. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in the correct operation.

  FIG. 62B is a diagram showing an example of the end screen of the “contact effect”. By operating the touch switch 290 in the “contact time” (see FIG. 62 (a)) which is the “contact effect”, it is notified that the reliability of the school of fish has reached 70%. In addition, when the determination result is a pending storage of a big hit in the hold determination memory stored at the end of the “contact time”, the game result of the “contact time” is ignored and “the reliability of the school of fish is 100”. % ”May be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the player interested until the end of the effect, and it is possible to suppress tiredness of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a display mode of volume setting during variable display will be described. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the volume setting screen is displayed during the third symbol variable display. In this control example, even when the variable display of the third symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the volume can be set based on the operation of the player as long as the reach is established. It is configured as follows.

  If the frame button 22 is operated while the variable display of the third symbol is being executed, the volume setting screen is displayed in a layer above the variable screen of the third symbol. The volume is adjusted by operating the selection switch 291 (the upper selection switch 291a and the lower selection switch 291b) while the volume setting screen is displayed. The volume setting screen displays the current volume level, the characters "volume setting" indicating that the volume can be set, and a mark prompting the user to operate the operation switch 291.

  In this volume setting screen, the selection switch 291 is not operated for a predetermined period of time after the changing third symbol is in the reach state or after the volume setting is enabled (after the volume setting screen is displayed). In case, or when the operation to complete the volume setting is performed, it is erased.

  As described above, in the present control example, since the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, the volume can be adjusted while listening to the voice during the game (while listening to the game volume). it can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the problem that the volume is adjusted when the third symbol does not change and the game volume becomes unexpected when the variable display of the third symbol is started.

  In this control example, the current volume level is displayed on the volume setting screen, but in addition to this, the game volume currently output with respect to the maximum value of the game volume output by the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. The volume value may be displayed so that the player can relatively understand how much. With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the volume based on the currently output game volume and volume value, and further reduce the problem that unexpected game volume is output during the game. Is possible.

  Further, when such a configuration is used, it is advisable to display it so that the player can grasp the maximum value of the game sound volume in the fluctuation display currently being executed. With this configuration, the player can detect in advance that a loud sound will be generated in the variable display this time, and the volume can be adjusted in advance. In addition, by displaying the maximum value of the game sound volume in the currently displayed change display, the player can predict the result of the hit / miss judgment, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, if the result of the hit / miss determination is a predetermined result such as a big hit, the volume setting screen may not be displayed even if the player operates the frame button 22, and the volume may not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to add a change based on the game result to the normally performed volume adjustment operation, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in FIG. 63, the volume setting screen in the case where the third symbol is changed is shown, but the title of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed by continuing the state in which the third symbol is not changed for a predetermined time. The volume setting screen is displayed even when the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed. In this case, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the demo screen was displayed, or when a predetermined operation was performed during the demo screen, the volume setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81, etc. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the change type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 84). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the holding balls of the special symbol, and the special symbol holding ball execution of the special symbol. Area is provided. In each area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64.

  Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a sphere passes through each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the gate 66 or 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1. However, when it coincides with the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and a high probability that the jackpot of a special symbol is higher than that at a low probability (special). It is divided into two types, ie, a period for which the symbol has a high probability state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed at a low probability of a special symbol and at a high probability of a special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability of special symbols (see FIG. 66 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability of special symbols (see FIG. 66 (a)) are mainly It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In this control example, two types of “big hit A” and “big hit B” are set, and one of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. It is stored. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value "0-9" is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/30”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, which is set in the big hit type selection table (not shown), the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 59" is "big hit A". When the value is “60 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value), the random number value for determining the big hit type of the special symbol is set by the big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)), This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 84) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Next, a mechanism in which main controller 110 selects a fluctuation pattern and voice lamp controller 113 determines a detailed fluctuation pattern based on a fluctuation pattern command from main controller 110 will be described. In the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, variation pattern selection tables for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol are set respectively as shown in FIGS. 69 to 70.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the sound lamp control device 113 measures the time from when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on based on the time measurement data measured by the RTC 292, and the normal time of 54 minutes is measured. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set. It Although the details of each period will be described later, even if the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected by the period may be different depending on the set period. Is set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effect is composed of the change time indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the change time of each effect, the judgment result, and the rough change of the effect. The contents (reach, super-reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With this configuration, main controller 110 does not need to determine individual fluctuation patterns, and can reduce control addition. Further, it is possible to suppress the data amount of the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The variation pattern selection table is configured to select each variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol in which the variation is started and the current effect mode. Here, the fluctuation pattern to be determined is to roughly determine the type of fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time. "Normal reach" and "super reach" are stipulated as variation patterns that are selected when the hit / miss determination result common to "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a big hit. A value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and if the result of the judgment is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. If the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of holdings. Here, when the hit / no hit determination result is a hit, the variation pattern of “super reach” is set to be more easily selected than “normal reach”. Therefore, if the result of the winning / disapproval determination is a win, the variation pattern of the “super reach” is executed and the frequency of the jackpot increases, and the player wins the jackpot when the variation pattern of the “super reach” is selected. Easy to have expectations.

  The normal reach jackpot variation pattern, which is the variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot, goes through the reach display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2 fluctuates for a predetermined time. After the display, it is a variable display mode in which the same symbol as the main symbol in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed. The variation pattern of the "normal reach" jackpot is composed of a relatively short variation time compared to the variation pattern of "super reach" which will be described later.

  Similar to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, the super reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are the variation patterns of the “super reach” jackpot, are displayed in the reach display mode, and subsequently, the characters and the like are displayed to display the reach display mode. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the same symbol as the symbol displayed in is executed. The variation pattern of "super reach" is composed of a variation time that is relatively longer than the variation pattern of "normal reach".

  Next, as a variation pattern to be selected when the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is out, as a variation pattern for detachment, "short time out (for short time)", "long time out (for short time)" ”,“ Normal reach off ”,“ Super reach off ”are defined. The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (7000 ms) shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, and is the main symbol for a predetermined time. After the variable is displayed, the display mode in which the main symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2 is executed. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation”, has a longer fluctuation time (10000 ms) than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach out variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "normal reach out", has a different display mode in which the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach display pattern with respect to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern. This is a display mode showing that the configured lottery result is out of order. This normal-reach-out variation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than a super-reach-out variation pattern, which will be described later, when the hit / miss determination result is out. In addition, the super-reach-out variation pattern, which is “super-reach-out”, is a different display mode in that it is finally displayed in the display mode indicating the out-of-range for various super-reach jackpot variation patterns.

  In addition, if the result of the determination whether or not the special symbol is out, the variation pattern to be selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4. The fluctuation type counter CS1 may be allocated to each fluctuation pattern so that the ratios of the above are different.

  For example, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of “short-time deviation”, and the fluctuation pattern may not be selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the variation time of the variation pattern selected becomes relatively long, and during that time, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first winning opening 64 and the variation of the special symbol. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the period in which the game is stopped (the period in which the game lottery is not executed).

  In addition, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, it is preferable to set a high rate of selecting the variation pattern of “short time deviation”. Accordingly, when the number of held balls is close to the upper limit number of 3 to 4, a short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected. It is possible to suppress the problem that becomes.

  The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, and is normally stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. In the case where the value of the random number to be a hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a probability of being a normal symbol from that low probability. It is divided into two types, one for high high probability time (the period when the symbol is in a time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. Furthermore, the type of the normal symbol hit is set to normal hit and long time hit, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, the normal hit of the normal symbol is a normal game state (low-probability game state), in the big hit game state, the operation in which the first electric auditors product 640a is operated in the open state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is 1 It is about to be executed once. In addition, during the time saving, during the probability variation period, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state for the opening time of 2 seconds is about to be repeated twice.

  When the ball is passing through the through gate 66 or 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device (not shown). In, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) Is displayed as a light. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the first electric auditors'sip 640a is normally opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first electric accessory 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”. Further, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "21 to 204", the first electric auditors product 640a is opened for "1 second × 2 times" per long time.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 66 (c)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, it is attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the first electric auditors product 640a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first electric accessory 640a is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 84) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 83). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 82) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d. It has a time saving medium counter 203e, a probability variation flag 203f, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first hit. The respective values of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

  Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). The vacant areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the variable display (third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64. This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed in (4) up to 4 times. This special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S404 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 77).

  The value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 77, see S405 of FIG. 79). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and holds the variable display hold ball in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is a variable display holding sphere number (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) which is performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 66 or 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times up to four times. This normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is set to an initial value of zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the number of holding spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 80).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (of FIG. 81). S703: No).

  The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. This time saving medium counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, the lottery of the special symbol is performed in the main controller 110, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is set. To be done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many times the time saving medium counter 203e is.

  The probability variation flag 203f is a flag that is set to ON when the gaming state is probability variation.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device (not shown), a second symbol holding lamp (not shown), a specific winning opening. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of 65a as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 connects via the input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the touch switch 290, the selection switch 291 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents of, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a SW announcement selection table 222b, a school of fish selection table 222c, and a swinging motion table 222d. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223c, the variation start flag 223d, the stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, time effect execution flag 223g, throwing time storage area 223h, start period flag 223i2, SW effective time storage area 223j, level storage area 223k, expectation degree storage area 223n, effect mode storage area 223n, At least the standby flag 223o, the touch effect effective time storage area 223q, the interval counter 223r, the volume setting storage area 223s, the volume setting flag 223t, the separation flag 223u, the operating flag 223v, and the other memory area 223z are provided. .

  The prize information storage area 223a is an area in which prize information is stored corresponding to the reserved balls, based on the prize command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various kinds of information such as the result of win / fail judgment, variation pattern, and stop type are set.

  The special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is a storage area in which the holding number of special symbols is stored based on the holding sphere command.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223c is a storage area in which the holding sphere number of the normal symbol is stored based on the holding sphere command.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is a flag indicating that it is time to start fluctuation of the third symbol.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is a flag indicating the stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type command output from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for determining various effects and details of the variation pattern, various lottery, and the like. The effect counter 223f is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

  The time effect execution flag 223g is a flag indicating that the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is normal. It is set to ON when it is determined that the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is within 3 years from the manufacturing, and is set to OFF when it is determined that 3 years have passed.

  The turn-on time storage area 223h is an area for storing the time when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the set period of the time effect period based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292. In the throw-in time storage area 223, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time setting process (FIG. 86, S1212) in the startup process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. In S1224, 24 hours of information on the time effect period is set.

  The preparation period flag 223i1 is a flag indicating that the preparation period is started. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is the preparation period, and is set to OFF when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is the time production period. To be done.

  The start period flag 223i2 is a flag indicating that the time effect period is started. The start period flag 223i2 is set to ON when the time information (time data) obtained from the RTC 292 is the time production period, and is turned OFF when the time information (time data) obtained from the RTC 292 has passed the time production period. Is set.

  The SW effective time storage area 223j is an area for storing the effective time of the SW operation. In the SW effect time storage area 223j, the effective time stored in the SW effect control process (FIG. 97, S2202) is subtracted or reset.

  The level storage area 223k is an area for storing the upper and lower levels to be changed based on the operation of the touch switch (touch sensor) 290 within the touch effect effective time in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

  The expectation storage area 223m is an area for storing the expectation based on the level stored in the level storage area 223k when the touch effect effective time becomes 0 in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). ..

  The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area in which information regarding effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C is stored (set), respectively. As for the effect mode, if the current effect mode is the normal game period (outside the time effect period), effect mode A is stored, if it is the time effect period, effect mode B is stored, and if it is the extended time effect period, effect. Mode C is stored.

  The standby flag 223o is a flag that indicates that the dog is in a display state of waiting during the time effect period (during the effect mode C) in the time effect period. The standby flag 223o is set to ON when the contact effect (time effect) is selected in the time effect period, and then set to OFF by turning on the touch switch 290.

  The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is an area for storing the effective time of the touch effect. The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is subtracted from the effective time stored in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

  The interval counter 223r is a counter used for the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). The interval counter 223r is counted when the touch sensor is not operated and is reset when the touch sensor is operated.

  The volume setting storage area 223s is an area for storing the volume set by the volume setting processing (FIG. 93, S1314).

  The volume setting flag 223t is a flag used in the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), and is set to ON when the volume setting becomes possible (FIG. 93, S1905) and set to OFF when the volume setting is completed. ..

  The separation flag 223u is a flag used in the left / right selection processing (FIG. 94, S1315), and is set to ON when the lowering of the central floating unit 400 is set (FIG. 94, S2004). When selected, it is set to off (FIG. 94, S2007).

  The operating flag 223v is a flag used in the swing control process (FIG. 95, S1316), and is set to ON when it is determined to be the accessory drive start timing (FIG. 95, S2103), and the swing operation of the accessory. Is set to OFF when the process ends (FIG. 95, S2111).

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 88) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, various tables provided in the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school notice selection table 222c in the first control example. Here, the fish school notice selection table 222c is referred to when executing S2332 of the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316) described later based on the result of the contact time (time effect) described in FIG. It's a table.

  By using this table, the notice effect is controlled so that the fish school notice appears with the expectation corresponding to the reliability (expectation) displayed as a result of the contact time (see FIG. 62 (b)). Note that, in the present control example, the fish school notice selection table 222c is used, but when a plurality of effects in which the degree of expectation is set by the contact time (time effect) is provided, a table is provided to correspond to each effect.

  Further, in the fish school notice selection table 222c shown in FIG. 71 (a), the fish notice is set not to appear when the degree of expectation is 0%. However, for example, the fish notice appears only when the result of judgment is wrong. It may be set to do. With this configuration, a player who wants to give a notice of a fish school regardless of the result of winning / decision participation intentionally lowers the degree of expectation during the contact time (time performance). It is possible to suppress that.

  FIG. 71B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shaking motion table 222d in the first control example. The shaking motion table 222d is a table referred to when executing S2108 of the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316) described later.

  Here, the movement control of the arm member 444 forming a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rotation status of the arm member 444 is configured to be comprehensible by the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444.

  In the present control example, when the control for rocking the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is referred to based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided in the arm member 444 with reference to the rocking motion table 222d. Has been decided. Specifically, when increasing the swing width (rotation range) of the arm member 444, if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, the rotation data is set such that the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation. If the information of the acceleration sensor is the right rotation data, the rotation data is set such that the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is the right rotation.

  That is, since the drive motor 445 is drive-controlled based on the actual rotation status by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation status) of the arm member 444 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the rotation of the drive motor 445. The force can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  Particularly, in the case of a variable member such as the arm member 444 that is configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state of the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end side of the variable member and drive-control the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

  Further, in the swing motion table 222d shown in FIG. 71 (b), only the motion table for increasing the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 is described, but the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 is reduced. An operation table for doing so may be provided. In this case, for example, if the information of the acceleration sensor is not the left rotation data, the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 becomes the right rotation is set, and the operation table for rotationally driving the drive motor 445 may be set. With this configuration, the rotational force of the arm member 444 and the driving force of the drive motor 445 cancel each other out, so that the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 can be efficiently reduced.

  Furthermore, the swing control of the arm member 444 (variable member) may be performed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed in synchronization with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm). It may be configured to control the rotation of the member 444). Specifically, the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member 444, and the worst. When pressed at the timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 is stationary).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the rotation state of the variable member based on the operation of the player, and increase the effects in which the player participates, so that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game. Become.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display controller 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in series on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs well-known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads / writes data from / to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. A known data address conversion is executed.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data in one bank while the other bank is used. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed after the boot process (see S2901 in FIG. 100) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced by the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result in the main control device 110 by the variation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Display on the symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", an image showing it is stopped of the variable effect. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first winning port 64, a power-on variable image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and images indicating "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on is performed. When a ball is detected at the first winning opening 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball into the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed in accordance with various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 controls the voice lamp. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data pre-resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and therefore the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image of one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame of the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately and designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, since the first winning hole 64 is a winning hole in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter, the first electric auditors object 640a is opened and the balls are first The number of prize balls increases when the player can easily enter the second winning opening 640. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in possession, or a state in which the number of balls in possession does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of a period when you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the one variation effect was stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

  Details of the display data table will be described below with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table of the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in that image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as images and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image.

  When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time effect) by the rear surface type, the player selects one of the backgrounds. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

  In this control example, the case where only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table will be described. However, instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd design is given a unique number, the variation design in the previous variation effect and the stop design according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are the 3rd design. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 73) is the data table The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 74). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address "0002H" in FIG. 74).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address Is included.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 74, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. At the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 74, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed (see S2905 in FIG. 100). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4105 in FIG. 109 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3201 in FIG. 102B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3208 of FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 102B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 102 (b) S3209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4001 in FIG. 109A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Performs resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 109 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 ((b) in FIG. )), The pointer update processing (FIG. 106) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 75), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 75, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), number of retained balls symbol 1, number of retained balls symbol 2, ..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all the sprites used for drawing the image for one frame based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. ) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3707 of FIG. 106). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4209 in FIG. 110). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4210 in FIG. 110). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 102B) is executed (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 to 84. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in this control example, When each reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and thereafter. The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown), is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67. Through-gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended. If the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and the special symbol changed by the calculation. A reserve ball number command indicating the value of the reserve ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S207 is executed, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 78. When this special symbol fluctuation start processing is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a special symbol big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present control example, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1, and the type of big hit (big hit A, big hit B) is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. However, it may be possible to determine whether or not to be a jackpot based on the value of one random number counter and to determine the type of a jackpot. In this case, for example, the total number of random number values is set to 3000, and the random number counter performs loop counting. By providing six random numbers corresponding to the big hit A and four random numbers corresponding to the big hit B among the total of 3000 random number values, it becomes possible to realize the distribution equivalent to this control example. By doing so, there is an effect that one counter can be reduced.

  In this control example, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

  After the processing of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (the jackpot A and the jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. Is a big hit B, 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). Then, the process of S215 is executed. If the jackpot type is a jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability which is a probability variation period (S213). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), then the stop command is set (S300), and this processing is ended.

  In this control example, if the jackpot type is a jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is the probability variation period, so that the next jackpot game is started. In the meantime, when the time saving game is played and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, 100 is set to the hour saving medium counter 203e, but a jackpot type different from that may be provided. For example, the gaming state is set to a high probability, a jackpot type that does not provide a time saving game, a jackpot type that sets the gaming state to a high probability and sets 100 to the hour saving medium counter 203e, and a probability variation counter are newly provided, 100 is set to each of the probability variation counter and the hour / hour reduction counter, and a jackpot type that provides a high-probability and short-time game for a predetermined number of times (100 times) and whether or not the high-probability game state continues is changed by a random lottery. The type of jackpot to be decided can be considered. As described above, by using various jackpot types or by combining them, it becomes possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of playability.

  In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / hour medium counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S300. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S300.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. 78 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 77) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a fluctuating effect that is to be seen.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, each value of the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the probability variation period (high-probability game state) (S302). The determination as to whether it is the probability variation period is performed by determining whether the probability variation flag 203f (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that is the hit are the same, the special symbol is Determined to be a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (jackpot A, Of the jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16R big hit, a big variation period after the big hit game to the next big hit), and “60- If it is in the range of "99", it is determined to be a big hit B (100 big hits for 16R, 100 times for a normal symbol in a short time period).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A, 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the hit / miss determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the judgment. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-reach display mode, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the out-reach display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as it has the same variable time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", various "disconnection normal reach", and "disassembly super reach" are defined. As a variation pattern for both the big hit A and the big hit B, various kinds of "normal reach" and various kinds of "super reach" are defined.

  In the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The variation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is checked based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 84). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  In addition, in the present control example, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, but in addition to this, the variation type is set for each of the number of holdings stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A counter may be provided and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the number of holdings and the fluctuation type counter.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is performed. When there is, there is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters, and a prefetch of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. In other words, the winning is detected when the ball is detected three times continuously (6 ms) in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 ms. In the switch reading process S101, if the switch is configured to be able to determine the state that the switch continues to detect for a predetermined period, it is possible to eliminate the need to execute the timer interrupt process three times in this process. .

  Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number counter The value (N1) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the special symbol holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) (S407). Here, the entry into the second winning opening 640 is detected over the three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning in the second winning opening 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number counter The value (N2) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S410). Then, the special symbol holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S411, the RAM 203 is set to the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S412). In the process of S412, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, in the processing of S413, pre-reading is executed to set a winning command, and this processing ends. Here, the prefetching executed in S413 will be described. Prefetching is based on the game information (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, This is a pre-reading process that determines in advance the determination (validity determination) executed at the start of fluctuation.

  In the prefetching process, a determination is made in advance based on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the determination result is set as a winning command. Like other commands, this winning command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84). To be done.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the determination result based on the game information stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a before the start of fluctuation to give a predetermined notice to the player. Is possible.

  In this control example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching process and outputs the processing result (judgment result) to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command, but in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The stored game information (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) or the information corresponding to the game information is stored in the voice lamp controller 113. Alternatively, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may output and execute the above-described prefetching process. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), the variable display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device (not shown), and the second winning opening 640. Is a process for controlling the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the above. As described above, the control of the opening time of the second electric auditors product 82a associated with the third winning port 82 is also performed at the same time, but the control content is the same as that of the first electric auditors product 640a, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. To do.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). Incidentally, the time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), the process proceeds to S609. In the process of S608, although not shown in FIG. 80, it is also determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON. This is because in the present control example, when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 0 and the probability variation flag 203f is not set to ON, the process proceeds to S611, and the time saving medium timer 203e is processed. When the value is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the process proceeds to S609.

  In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit. As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off.

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 21 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off.

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 determines whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S612), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as when it becomes the deviation of the ordinary symbol. , The opening frequency and opening time of the first electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 640. The opening period of the first electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640. Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device. The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the processing in S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric auditors product 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the first electric operation is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 84) is executed next. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640a is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through-gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), judges whether or not the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, and if there is a ball passage, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the through gate 66 or 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (the number M of fluctuation display holdings in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (use areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (S913), sets initial values (S914), and starts payout control of game balls. It becomes possible. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 76) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111 Send the prize ball command. Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 77) and the starting prize winning process (see FIG. 79) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserve ball number command. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric auditors product 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the opening / closing control of the first electric auditors product 640a is started. .. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S620 of FIG. 80 or the processing of S621 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. The second electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 2) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example also performs the same opening / closing control as the first electric accessory, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), variation display is started on the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). To do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 82 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the usage area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see FIG. 83, S901) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 99. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 85, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1320 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 87). It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 87), the power-off process of S1320 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1320 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1320 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  The confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1320, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1320 is executed (see S1319 of FIG. 87). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is executed, the process of S1208 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case where after the power failure occurs, the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process of S1320 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interruption is performed. Permission is set (S1211). After that, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore, the process of S1204 to S1206 is performed. This is the case where the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interrupt permission is set. Yes (S1211). After that, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that skipping the clear processing of S1209 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204 when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 and S1206. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  In the process of S1212, a time setting process is executed (S1212). Details of the time setting process (S1212) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1212). In the time setting process (S1212), the process of acquiring the time information from the RTC 292 and setting the preparation period and the time production period in the input time storage area 223h based on the time information is executed.

  In the time setting process (S1212), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, the value of “hour, minute” is acquired. The RTC 292 is a time measuring means having a battery inside, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the RTC 292 is configured to initialize the same current time to the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about 3 and a half hours of operation. Further, the RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to discriminate "date". Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to change the background image to a Christmas-only background image and display a special character such as Santa.

  It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the time limit data (S1222). Here, in this control example, the deadline data is set to three years within the three and a half years which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC292. A date three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture is set as the deadline data, and when it is determined that the date is after that date, the setting of the time effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the start timings of the time effects cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10 due to a delay in time due to insufficient battery capacity or the like.

  In addition, in the present control example, it is configured to determine whether the date is three years after the preset date at the time of manufacture and set the time effect execution flag 223g to be described later to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC 292 is determined and the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON. Good. Here, it is desirable that the RTC 292 is set to a voltage value higher than or equal to the normal operation.

  In the processing of S1222, when it is determined that the acquired time information is outside the time limit data, that is, three years or more have passed (S1222: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the time limit data, that is, within three years (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time effect period are calculated and set in the throwing time storage area 223h (S1224). Here, in this control example, 54 minutes from the preset time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is the normal game period (production mode A), and the subsequent 1 minute is the preparation period (production mode B). ), 5 minutes after the preparation period has elapsed is set as a time production period (production mode C). After 5 minutes of the time presentation period, the normal game period of 54 minutes is set again, and thereafter, each period is similarly set.

  In addition, although each period is set as described above in the present control example, based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292, when the first predetermined time is reached, it corresponds to the normal game period (production mode A). The effect corresponding to the preparation period (effect mode B) is executed when the second predetermined time is reached, and the effect corresponding to the time effect period (effect mode C) is executed when the third predetermined time is reached. As described above, the setting may be performed in time series based on the time information. By doing so, even if there is an error in the time when the power is turned on for the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to cause the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to execute the same effect at a predetermined time. .. Further, since the RTC 292 is used, even if the power-on time is deviated, no error occurs in the time information (time information) to be timed.

  Each of the above-mentioned periods will be described in detail later, but in the normal game period and the time effect period, the types of the background image on which the displayed notice content and the special symbol are displayed are switched and displayed. Also, in the preparation period, it is a period for preparing for switching from the normal game period to the time production period, and before the change to the time production period, the fluctuation of the special symbol selected in the normal game period in the preparation period ends. Is set to.

  In addition, in this control example, the preparation period and the time production period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the input time storage area 223h. It may be configured such that 54 minutes for executing the game is set, the period is counted down or counted up, and the preparation period is set based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition to this, it is also possible to set a time after 54 minutes and set the time of the next period when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Further, the player may start execution of the normal period, the preparation period, and the time effect period based on performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291. By doing so, when the friends play the game on the adjacent stand, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform a desired effect regardless of the current time by simultaneously performing the above-described predetermined operation. ..

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or after the process of S1301 this time is performed (S1301), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process of S1302 to S1310 related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variable display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1316 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1305 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1308), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / outputting process in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. After the processing of this command determination processing (FIG. 88, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

  When the process of S1312 ends, the synchronous effect management process (S1313) is executed. This synchronization effect management process (S1313) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the synchronization effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313) is executed, the volume setting process is executed (S1314). Details of this volume setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

  When the process of S1314 ends, the left / right selection process (S1315) is executed. This left / right selection processing (S1315) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the left / right selection processing (FIG. 94, S1315) is executed, the shake control processing is executed (S1316). Details of this swing control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1316 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information about the occurrence of power failure is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1318: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, and thus can call the clerk of the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 87) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

  In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), and the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1403). This fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1403) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 89. After that, a notice selection process described later is executed (S1404). This advance notice selection processing (S1404) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When the process of S1404 ends, the process according to the other command is executed (S1412), and the process ends.

  Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection processing (S1403).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). The effect counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 87) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, and is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Next, it is determined whether the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is effect mode A (S1502).

  Here, in this control example, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C are set respectively. Each effect mode is configured to be set each time a predetermined time elapses after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and a game is started. 54 minutes after the power is turned on, the production mode A as the normal game period, when 54 minutes have passed, the following 1 minute, the production mode B is set as the preparation period, and when 1 minute of the preparation period has passed, then For 5 minutes, the effect mode C is set as the time effect period. After 5 minutes of the time effect period, effect mode A which is the normal game period is set again, and effect mode B and effect mode C are repeatedly set.

  In this way, after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the production mode is switched every time a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are powered on at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to match the timing when the effect modes are switched in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Therefore, the same effect can be executed at the same timing by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (that is, the normal game period) (S1502: Yes), the variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 69) or the variation pattern selection table B of the corresponding special symbol. (See FIG. 69), the fluctuation pattern is selected and set based on the result of the judgment, the number of holdings, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S1503), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1502: No), the variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 70) of the corresponding special symbol ( (S1504), this processing ends. In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set and the characters "Soon contact time starts !!" are displayed in the background to indicate that it is the preparation period. The contact time indicates a time production period. Further, during the preparation period, the time display is performed by counting down one minute on the background image. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long after the time effect period is started.

  Further, although details will be described in a notice selection process (see FIG. 90) described later, the notice effect is not set in the preparation period. With this configuration, when the time production period is started, the notice display set in the preparation period is displayed, and the notice production different from the dedicated notice production set in the time production period is displayed. It is possible to suppress defects.

  Details of the notice selection process (S1404) will be described below with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection processing (S1404).

  In the notice selection process (S1404), first, it is determined whether or not the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601). When the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601: Yes), this process ends. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON so that the notice effect is not set when it is determined in the synchronization effect management process (see FIG. 92) described later that it is the preparation period.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if the preparation period flag 223i1 is not set to ON (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not it is a variation pattern of super reach (S1602). If it is not the variation pattern of super reach (S1602: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is super reach (S1602: Yes), then the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1603). After that, the advance notice lottery is executed based on the set degree of expectation and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1604). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fish school notice is selected (S1605). When the fish school notice is not selected (S1605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the fish school notice is selected (S1605: Yes), the display command indicating the fish notice is set (S1606), and the process ends. The expected degree used in S1604 is set in S2332 of FIG. 99 described later, and details will be described later.

  Here, returning to FIG. 88, the description is continued. In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S1401: No), it is determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and S1412. Process shifts to. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved sphere number command is received (S1408: Yes), the reserved sphere number of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved sphere number command and set in the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 223b (S1409). After the processing of S1409 ends, the processing moves to S1412. In the process of S1408, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1410). When the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). After that, the processing shifts to S1412.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired by the main control device 110, and The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. In addition, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C2, CS1 is acquired in the main controller 110, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, from each value of each acquired counter C1 to C2, the original Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various kinds of information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S1410, when the winning command of the special symbol is not received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1412), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 91, S1312), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is determined from the RAM 223. It is acquired (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started. Further, the notice contents selected here are also notified.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is read from the RAM 223. The display for notifying the display control device 114 is obtained by setting the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708). A use stop type command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled. After the processing of S1709 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a synchronization effect management process (S1313) which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1313). In this synchronous effect management process (S1313), the time information is acquired from the RTC 292, based on the time information, it is determined whether it is the preparation period or the time effect period, and the effect mode indicating that is set. Run.

  In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313), first, it is determined whether the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1801). When it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S1801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S1801: Yes), after the time information of "hour, minute" is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1802), whether the start period flag 223i2 is on. It is determined (S1803). When it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is off (S1803: No), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804). .. If it is determined that it is not the preparation period (S1804: No), then it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time effect period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805).

  If it is determined by the process of S1805 that it is not the time effect period, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time effect period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to OFF ( After that, the start period flag 223i2 is set to ON (S1807). Then, the effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1808). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is the effect mode C (time effect period) is set (S1809), and this processing ends. It should be noted that the display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a display mode corresponding to the time effect period based on the reception of this command.

  The description will be continued by returning to S1804. In the process of S1804, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON. (S1810), the effect mode B is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1811). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is the effect mode B (preparation period) is set (S1812), and this processing is ended. It should be noted that the display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the preparation period based on the reception of this command.

  Further, in the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "Soon contact time starts !!" indicating the preparation period are displayed in the background. The contact time indicates a time production period. Further, during the preparation period, the time display is performed by counting down one minute on the background image. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long after the time effect period is started.

  Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. In the process of S1803, when it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is ON (S1803: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is outside the time effect period (S1813). When it is determined that it is not outside the time production period (S1813: No), this process ends. When it is determined that it is outside the time effect period (S1813: Yes), the start period flag 223i2 is set to OFF (S1814), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1815). ). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode A is set (S1816). Then, this process is completed. It should be noted that the display control device 113 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the display mode of the normal effect period based on the reception of this command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a sound volume setting process (S1314) which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this volume setting processing (S1314). In this volume setting process, a process of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is executed based on the operation of the selection switch 291 by the player.

  In the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is mode A (between normal gaming machines) (S1901). When the effect mode is not the mode A (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the effect mode is the mode A (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the reach is established (S1902). Here, the reach establishment period will be described. The reach establishment period means that the combination of the third symbols which is a big hit is stopped in a state where two symbol rows are stopped and displayed among the three symbol rows that are variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a period during which the state (reach state) in which the possibility of being displayed remains.

  If the result of the determination in S1902 is the reach establishment period (S1902: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is not the reach establishment period (S1902: No), it is then determined whether or not the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903). When the volume setting flag is off (S1903: No), it is then determined whether or not the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) is operated (S1904). If the selection switch 291 has not been operated (S1904: No), this process ends. If the selection switch 291 has been operated (S1904: Yes), then the volume setting flag 223t is set to ON (S1905), and a display command indicating the display of the volume setting screen is set (S1906). To finish.

  In the process of S1903, when the volume setting flag 223t is turned on (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907). When the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907: Yes), the volume level is increased and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1908), and the display command indicating the volume level is set (S1909). This process ends.

  In the process of S1907, when the upper selection switch 291a is not operated (S1907: No), it is then determined whether the lower selection switch 291 is operated (S1910). When the lower selection switch 291b has not been operated (S1910: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the down selection switch is operated (S1910: Yes), the volume level is lowered and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1911), and the display command indicating the volume level is set (S1912). The process ends.

  As described above, in the sound volume setting process (S1314), even in the state where the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the specific period (the effect mode A is set). In a state in which the reach is not established), the operation of the operation means (selection switch 291) operable by the player is enabled, and the volume can be set by operating the operation means. It is composed.

  With such a configuration, conventionally, the pachinko machine 10 can be set only in a state where the third symbol is not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (so-called demo screen display state or standby screen state). The volume can be set even while the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the player can enjoy the game at a desired volume.

  Further, in the present control example, when the effect mode is set to a mode other than A, the volume cannot be set. In this case, in a mode in which the effect is executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 such as the effect mode B or the effect mode C, control may be performed to synchronize the effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10. If the volume of the gaming machine is changed while such an effect is being performed, a synchronized effect with the surrounding pachinko machines 10 (for example, when a car approaches from a distance, the volume of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is changed). This is because the performance balance is lost in the controlled performance).

  Although not shown, when the production mode is set to B or C, the output of the volume relating to the synchronization production ignores the set volume level so that an appropriate volume is output in the synchronization production. And a predetermined volume level is output. With this configuration, even if different volume levels are set for the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronous effect, which is of interest to the player in terms of effect. It becomes possible to have.

  Furthermore, the predetermined volume level output during the above-described synchronization effect is set to be lower than the volume level that is the reference value in the normal state (so that the volume becomes smaller). This is because the same sound is often output simultaneously from a plurality of pachinko machines 10 during the synchronous effect.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the volume setting is controlled only by the digital signal (the pattern in which the output volume is output to the speaker by the digital signal), the volume control related to the synchronization effect can be performed by the above-described control. In the case of control (a pattern that adjusts the volume of the digital signal input to the speaker by controlling the output part of the speaker), the volume related to the synchronization effect is set to an appropriate volume based on the set volume level. Then, the digital signal may be controlled. By doing so, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronization effect.

  In this way, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of outputting the volume output corresponding to the synchronous production at an appropriate volume regardless of the set volume level, the production mode is The volume may be set even in a state other than the state set to A. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game at a desired volume.

  Further, in this control example, the volume cannot be set during the reach establishment period. This is because, after the reach is established, the movable accessory provided on the game board 13 is driven, and the effect of inspiring the expectation of a big hit is also performed on the third symbol display device. This is to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and to allow the entire pachinko machine 10 to execute the game and enjoy the effect.

  In this control example, since the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, it is possible to use the volume setting for playability. For example, if the lottery result is the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol that is a big hit, and the volume setting is performed when a large-volume effect for notifying the big hit is set at the end of the variable display of the third symbol, the volume setting is performed. It is conceivable that a notification such as "Be careful because a loud noise is generated in this change!". By giving such a notification, it is possible to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display, and it can also be used as a reference in setting the volume, and while the player enjoys the game, it can be more than desired. It is possible to prevent in advance that a large volume is generated. Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from unexpectedly making a loud noise, even a person with a weak heart can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, since the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, the player can set the volume while listening to the BGM during the variable display. Therefore, as a result of setting the volume level during the display of the demo screen as in the related art, it is possible to solve the problem that the volume of the BGM during the variable display becomes louder than expected and causes discomfort.

  Further, in this control example, only the volume setting process based on the operation of the player is described, but the volume setting may be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. For example, by operating the frame button 22 and the selection switch 291, the business hours (opening time and closing time) are input to the pachinko machine 10. When the time information obtained from the RTC 292 reaches the closing time, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level, and when the time information obtained from the RTC 292 reaches the opening time, the volume level is set to a predetermined reference level or the previous business day. It is better to automatically return to the set volume level. With such a configuration, it is possible to automatically reduce the volume output by the pachinko machine 10 during maintenance work performed outside business hours, and it is possible to prevent the maintenance worker from feeling uncomfortable. It will be possible.

  Further, during the time effect period executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level, and the result of the mini game performed during the time effect period or the time effect period is executed. You may control so that a volume level may rise based on the lottery result of the special symbol which has been. With such a configuration, the player around the pachinko machine 10 having a high volume also pays attention during the time production period, and the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 having a high volume becomes superior. You can soak.

  Further, when adopting such a configuration, it is preferable to control so that the volume level is increased based on the result of the prefetching process based on the winning command. By doing so, by grasping the change in the volume level before the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol whose lottery result is a big hit is started, the game with a high expectation for the big hit is played. It is possible to draw attention to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a left / right selection process (S1315) which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the left / right selection process (S1315). The left / right selection process is a process executed when the player is allowed to select an alternative (left / right) using the left / right sensor device 600 (first sensor 610, second sensor 620) (FIG. 60).

  Here, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 or FIG. The left and right sensor device 600 is a sensor for detecting the player's fingers in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquiring the presence / absence (presence) or position of the player's finger, the operation direction or the operation speed, and the rear case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 211a.

  The irradiation areas (detection areas) of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are set so as to partially overlap each other, as shown by the irradiation areas S1 and S2 in FIG. By doing so, the presence of the player's fingers can be detected in a wide continuous area.

  In the present control example, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 in which the irradiation area (detection area) is set in this way is divided into left and right by lowering the central floating unit 400, and the player is instructed to do so. An effect of making an alternative choice is performed (see FIG. 60). The process for allowing the player to make a binary selection is the left / right selection process.

  In the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), first, it is determined whether it is the right / left selection timing (S2001). The left / right selection timing is a case where the left / right selection effect is included in the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. It shows the timing at which the left / right selection effect is executed.

  In the processing of S2001, when it is not the right / left selection timing (S2001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is the right / left selection timing (S2001: Yes), it is then determined whether the separation flag 223u is on (S2002). If the separation flag 223u is off (S2002: No), then the lowering of the central floating unit 400 is set (S2003), the separation flag 223u is set to on (S2004), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S2002, if the separation flag 223u is on (S2002: Yes), then it is determined whether the left sensor is on (S2005). If the left sensor is on (S2005: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of left selection is set (S2006), then the separation flag 223u is set to off (S2007), and this processing ends. ..

  In the process of S2005, if the left sensor is off (S2005: No), then it is determined whether the right sensor is on (S2008). If the right sensor is off (S2008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the right sensor is on (S2008: Yes), then a display command indicating the background for right selection is set (S2009), the separation flag is set to off (S2010), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the shared detection area in which at least a part of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 overlap is formed, By making the detection area formed continuously by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 into one detection area, the operation of the player can be surely detected in a wide range, and an alternative is provided. When performing an effect, at least the above-described shared detection area is excluded from the detection area of the left and right sensor device 600 by inserting a movable accessory (variable member) between the plate glass 16a and the left and right sensor device 600. The detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are divided.

  With this configuration, when the player touches the plate glass 16a (or brings his / her fingers closer) without changing the left / right sensor device 600, a wide range of continuous touch operations by the player is performed. When it is possible to detect with, and when the player performs an effect game in which one of the two choices is selected, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are divided, and the player It is possible to accurately detect the selected side.

  Further, in the present control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 which form the left and right sensor device 600 are fixed and the detection area cannot be moved, but the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be moved. You may do it. By doing so, the detection area can be moved.

  With such a configuration, for example, the position of the movable accessory provided on the pachinko machine 10 is detected, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the region of the third symbol display device 81 that is not covered by the movable accessory. Can be the detection regions of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. As a result, "touch" is displayed in the display area that is not covered by the movable accessory, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the display area is set as the detection area of each sensor, whereby the movable accessory becomes the third area. Even when the display area of the symbol display device is covered, the player can be informed of the detection area in an easy-to-understand manner, and the effect can be sufficiently enjoyed.

  The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are configured to be movable, and the player operates the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 provided on the pachinko machine 10, whereby the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are operated. A function of adjusting the detection area of the sensor 620 may be provided. By doing so, the player can perform an effect only by touching a desired position on the plate glass 16a.

  In addition, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 may be configured to be movable so that the current detection area cannot be known. With this configuration, for example, an effect in which the player hits the detection area of the first sensor 610 can be executed.

  In the case of performing such an effect, it is advisable to touch the area of the second sensor 620 before touching the detection area of the first sensor 610, and the area will be removed. Further, as the winning bonus, it is possible to display a special image or a bonus that allows the player to obtain a large amount of points accumulated and information that can obtain a large amount of the points. By performing such an effect, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player can actually participate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In this control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are optical sensors having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by the fingers of the player and is reflected by the finger. The light receiving section receives light to detect the player's fingers, but other sensors may be used as long as they can detect the movement of the fingers.

  For example, multiple sensing axes are configured in the detection area, and a human sensor that detects that an object (finger) that generates heat (infrared rays) crosses the sensing axes, or a focus sensor that is a kind of dielectric with polarization. An electric current is used, and the infrared rays (5 to 10 μm) emitted from the human body are received by the light receiving surface of the pyroelectric body to generate a current (current generated with a change in charge state). A pyroelectric infrared sensor that detects a finger based on this can be considered.

  When a pyroelectric infrared sensor is used, it is advisable to mount the pyroelectric element on a dome-shaped lens in order to provide directivity in the detection direction. The pyroelectric element may be made of an inorganic ceramic material (lead zirconate titanate (PZT) or the like) or an organic material (polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or the like). In particular, by using an organic ferroelectric thin film made of PVDF, it is possible to configure the infrared sensor as a flexible plastic film, so that it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the mounting position of the infrared sensor. Become.

  Further, by arranging a plurality of such elements, it is possible to detect the high speed movement and the moving direction of the finger, and it is also possible to detect the gesture operation of moving the finger. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new effect in which the player can actually participate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. As other sensors, a non-contact type photoelectric sensor, a capacitance type proximity switch, or a depth sensor may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a shake control process (S1316) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing this swing control processing (S1316). This swing control process is a process executed when the central floating unit 400 is swung using the drive motor 450.

  Here, variable control (operation control) of the variable member (central floating unit 400) using the drive motor in this control example will be described. First, the drive motor is formed by a stepping motor. The stepping motor rotates in steps by a constant angle (for example, 1.8 degrees) in synchronization with an input pulse, and controls the number of input pulses (the number of steps) and the pulse speed (frequency). The rotation amount and rotation speed of the motor are controlled, and the variable member can be movably controlled.

  Then, each variable member is configured to be variable by being driven by the transmission means (gear) that is interlocked with the rotational driving of the stepping motor described above. The voice lamp control device 113 is provided with drive motor control means for outputting a pulse to the stepping motor so as to correspond to a minimum unit (a unit in which a gear serving as a transmission means rotates by one tooth) in which the variable member varies. Has been.

  First, the movement control of the arm body 430 forming a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm body 430 is configured to be movable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank gear 453 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). Then, the variable member attached to the arm body 430 is configured to be variable based on the movement of the arm body 430. The crank gear 453 is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). With the origin detection sensor detecting the origin as a reference, the position of the arm body 430 is managed and controlled based on the rotation speed (step number) of the drive motor 450.

  Next, the movement control of the arm member 444 forming a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). An origin detection sensor (not shown) is provided on the back body 443 to which the drive motor 450 is attached. The position of the arm member 444 is managed and controlled based on the number of rotations (the number of steps) of the drive motor 445 with reference to the state where the limited detection sensor detects the origin.

  That is, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be able to operate in a plurality of patterns by controlling the drive motors 450 (two) and the drive motor 445, respectively (FIG. 31, FIG. 33, FIG. 33). 34, FIG. 37, and FIG. 39).

  Further, in the present control example, an acceleration sensor (not shown) is provided for a member configured to be variable, so that the current position of the variable member can be easily grasped. Therefore, by comparing the position (estimated position) of the variable member calculated from the rotation speed (step number) of the stepping motor with the current position of the variable member detected by the acceleration sensor, the variable member can be controlled to move normally. It is possible to determine whether or not it has been done. In addition, when the assumed position and the current position are different from each other, it is possible that the transmission mechanism (transmission means) is out of step and the movement is defective.

  Returning to FIG. 95, the description will be continued. In the swing control process (FIG. 95, S1316), first, it is determined whether or not it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101). This accessory driving start timing is a case where the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes an effect of shaking the character. It indicates the timing at which the effect of shaking the accessory is executed. If it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101: Yes), the set operation scenario is read (S2102), the in-operation flag 223v is set to ON (S2103), and this processing is ended.

  It should be noted that, although the figure illustrates the case where the accessory drive start timing is set based on the variation pattern, other than that, for example, the accessory drive start timing can be set by operating the frame button 22. It may be configured as follows.

  In the process of S2101, if it is not the timing to start the accessory drive (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the operating flag 223v is ON (S2104). When the operating flag 223v is off (S2104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the in-operation flag 223v is on (S2104: Yes), the operation scenario is updated (S2105), and then it is determined whether or not it is a shaking operation scenario (S2106). In the case of the shaking motion scenario (S2106: Yes), the information of the acceleration sensor is read (S2107), the shaking motion data is set from the shaking motion table 222d (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109. That is, in S2108, when the information of the acceleration sensor is left-rotating data, the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation is set, and when the information of the acceleration sensor is right-rotating data, the arm member 444 is set. Rotation data in which the rotation direction of 444 is right rotation is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, when it is not the scenario of the shaking motion (S2106: No), this process ends. Next, in the process of S2109, it is determined whether the scenario end is reached (S2109). If it is not the scenario end (S2109: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the scenario end (S2109: Yes), the in-operation flag 223v is set to OFF (S2110), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the control for rocking the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is set based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided in the arm member 444. I have decided. That is, by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation status) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the drive motor 445 can be drive-controlled based on the actual rotation status. The rotational force of 445 can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  Particularly, in the case of a variable member such as the arm member 444 that is configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state of the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end side of the variable member and drive-control the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

  The swing control of the variable member may be performed using the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 in synchronization with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm). Control the rotation of member 444). Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when it is pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member and the worst timing is detected. When the button is pressed with, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 is stationary).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the rotation state of the variable member based on the operation of the player, and increase the effects in which the player participates, so that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 87, S1307), first, it is determined whether the effect mode is A or not (S2201). When it is determined that the effect mode is A (S2201: Yes), the SW effect control process described below is executed (S2202), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the effect mode is not A (S2201: No), the special SW effect control process described later is executed (S2203), and then this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the SW effect control process (S2202), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96), will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this SW effect control processing (S2202). In the SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation in the normal period (effect mode A) that is a period other than the period (time effect period) in which the effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed is executed.

  In the SW effect control process (S2202), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is longer than 0 (S2301). If the SW valid time is 0 (S2301: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S2301, if the SW valid time is not 0 (S2301: Yes), the SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223j is subtracted (S2302), and then the SW provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used. It is determined whether or not a certain frame button 22 (the touch switch 290 and the selection switch 291) has been pressed (S2303). If the frame button 22 or the like has not been pressed (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 or the like is pressed (S2303: Yes), the selected advance notice command for display is set (S2304), and the SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223j is reset ( (S2305), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a special SW effect control process (S2203), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96), will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the special SW effect control process (S2203). In this special SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation is executed in a period (time effect period) in which an effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed.

  In the special SW effect control process (S2203), first, it is determined whether the standby flag 223o is on (S2311). As shown in FIG. 61, the standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the contact effect is in a standby state in the time effect period. That is, the standby flag 223o is set to ON when the contact effect is selected in the time effect period. Then, by turning on the touch switch 290, the standby flag 223o is set to off.

  When it is determined that the standby flag 223o is on (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to off (S2313). A display state command indicating that the standby flag 223o is off is set (S2314). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S2312, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2312: No), this processing ends.

  In the process of S2311, when it is determined that the standby flag 223o is off (S2311: No), it is determined whether the touch effect effective time is longer than 0 (S2315). If the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2315: Yes), the touch sensor control process is executed (S2316), and then this process ends.

  Here, the touch sensor control process (S2316), which is one of the special SW effect control processes (see FIG. 98), will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this touch sensor control processing (S2316). In the touch sensor control process (S2316), first, the touch effect effective time is subtracted (S2321). Then, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322). If the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2323). After that, 1 is added to the level storage area 233k (S2324), and the display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2325). Subsequently, the interval counter 223r is reset (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2331.

  When the touch sensor 290 is determined to be off in the process of S2322 (S2322: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223r (S2327), and it is determined whether or not the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328). ). When the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328: Yes), the level storage area 223k is decremented by 1 (S2329). After that, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2330), and the process proceeds to S2331.

  In the process of S2331, it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331). When the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2331: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331: Yes), the expectation based on the level set in the level storage area 223k is set in the expectation storage area 223m (S2332). After that, a display command indicating that the degree of expectation has been set is set (S2333), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, like the present control example, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2901), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided as in the conventional gaming machine but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3002, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3002, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs that are currently being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S3003). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3004), the instruction pointer 231a should be executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (S2901 in FIG. 101). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) (S3005), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  In this way, by executing the boot process (S2901), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed subsequent to the process of S3002. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S3003 to S3005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S3001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3001. Alternatively, the processing of S3003 to S3005 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S3002.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present control example, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3003 to S3005 without performing the processes of S3001 and S3002. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2903). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of this register or a partial area of the internal memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2903, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2904). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2904, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2905). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 109A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 109A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B). The determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Further, also in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) at the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is the main control device. 110, through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple A variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer it. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2905, the interrupt permission is set (S2906), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3101), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 75) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S3202), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 or the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105.

  In the display setting process (S3203), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3202) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S3204). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S3203) or the simple display setting process (S3209). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also given a continuous notice. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S3206). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S3204), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205). The drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3207). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command are compared. Then, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3201: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3208) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S3209) is executed, and the process of S3204. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105, details of the above-described command determination processing (S3202) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (FIG. 103, S3202), as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3301), and if there is no unprocessed new command. (S3301: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3302), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3303).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3304), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3305), the process returns to S3301.

  Details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S3305) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 104A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3401).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command judgment processing is executed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, like the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3403, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S3405). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3406), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3405 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3402. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3404 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol according to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S3304, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3306). If there is a display stop type command (S3306: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3307), and the process returns to S3301.

  Here, details of the stop type command processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / outside reach, or complete out) indicated by the stop-type command for display is determined. (S3501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S3502).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3502 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S3503).

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the process of S3306, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3306: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension command among the unprocessed commands (S3308). When it is determined that the display hold command is received (S3308: Yes), the hold symbol data based on the command is set (S3309). As a result, the reserved symbols are displayed or the colors of the displayed retained symbols are set to be variable. Then, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display suspension command (S3308: No), it is determined whether there is a display advance command (S3310). When it is determined that there is a display advance notice command (S3310: Yes), advance notice display data based on the command is set. As a result, the frame button 22 is pressed and display setting such as a notice display corresponding to the SW notice is set. Then, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display advance notice command (S3310: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (S3312). If it is determined that there is a display state command (S3312: Yes), background display data corresponding to the state based on the command is set (S3313). Thereby, the display corresponding to the time effect and the like is set. Then, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display state command (S3312: No), it is determined whether there is a display touch command (S3314). When it is determined that there is a display touch command (S3314: Yes), corresponding display data is set based on the command (S3315). Thereby, the display corresponding to the touch effect such as the contact effect is set. Then, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display touch command (S3314: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3316), and if there is an error command (S3316). : Yes), the error command process is executed (S3318), and the process returns to S3301.

  Details of the error command process (S3318) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3601). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3602), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3601, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3602, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, then in step S3602, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S3316, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3316: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3317), and the process returns to S3301.

  In the processing of S3301 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes). ), And the processes of S3302 to S3317 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3301 to S3307 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3301 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S3208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, regarding other commands, The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3401. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3402, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108, details of the above-described display setting process (S3203) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 106, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3701: No), When it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3702 to S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3701: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to OFF (S3702), and then S3703 to S3704. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3703). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3703: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3704).

  Details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3801).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3801, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3802), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 106. After the warning image setting process (S3704) or in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3703: No), the process proceeds to S3705.

  In S3705, pointer update processing is executed (S3705). Details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer updating process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3901). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3901, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S3902). As a result, if it is End information (S3902: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3903), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3903: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3904), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3905), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3903, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3903: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3906), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3902, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3902: No), this processing is ended and returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 106, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706). In the task process, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S3906 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3707), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3708). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3708: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3708: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3709).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3709: No), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalization display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S3710), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3711). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3712), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the on state is set to on (S3714), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3715), and returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3715 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S3204), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, the stop design of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop design determination flag set in S3715, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3709, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3709: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S3716). If the demo display flag is off (S3716: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the finalized display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The contents are cleared by setting in the buffer 233d (S3717) and then writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3718). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3719). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3720), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3721), the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3716, if the demo display flag is ON (S3716: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S3209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102B). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The display data table that defines the stop display of the image is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3205) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 109 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001). If the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4001: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S4002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4001, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4003), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4002) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4002).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S4101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4101: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S4102). In the process of S4102, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the processing of S4102 that the transfer processing is not completed (S4102: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed by the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4102: Yes), the process proceeds to S4103. Further, as a result of the processing of S4101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4101: No), the processing proceeds to S4103.

  In the process of S4103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4103: No), it is not A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4104), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206) includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the drawing list. Based on the transferred data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S4103 (S4103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4105), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102B). Since the determination process (see FIG. 103 to FIG. 105) and the display setting process (see FIG. 106 to FIG. 108) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) (see S4001: No in FIG. 109 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process (S3705) of the display setting process (S3203) previously executed from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4202), and if it is transfer data information (S4202: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4203), further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205.

  In the process of S4202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4202: No), the processes of S4203 and S4204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data has been completed (S4205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4206).

  In the process of S4206, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S4206 that the transfer process is not completed (S4206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to S4207. Further, as a result of the processing of S4205, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4205: No), the processing proceeds to S4207.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4207). If the transfer start flag is on (S4207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S4207: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S4212). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S4212: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4213), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4214). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the storage destination (usually The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4215), and the process proceeds to S4209.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore, the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4214, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S4209, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209). The determination in the process of S4209 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S4209, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4209, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4210). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206) includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. The image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S4210, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4211), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  Further, in this control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, and thus the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the above-described drawing process (S3206) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S3204) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S3204). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 102B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed every 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. In the second control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the first control example. In addition to the processing performed in the first control example described above, the reel control processing is added, and the variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 based on the addition of the reel control processing and The difference is that a new process is added to the variable display setting process. Since other configurations are the same, other configurations are omitted.

  First, FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is an example showing a display mode in a state where the container 330 is raised to a position covering the lower side of the third symbol display device 81. In this FIG. 112 (a), the third symbol (hereinafter referred to as the main third symbol) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a of the container 330 and the first symbol A third symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a sub-third symbol) that is combined and displayed by the outer peripheral surface of the two-rotation body 340b is simultaneously displayed. This display mode is executed by raising the container 330 by the reel control process (see FIG. 115) when the setting start flag 223d is set to ON in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 117) described later. It is a display mode.

  In this display mode, the main third symbol and the sub-third symbol are each displayed in the left-right three directions, and the left column, the middle column, and the right column are displayed in association with each other. That is, the main third symbol in the left column (the symbol in which 4 and 7 are displayed) and the sub-third symbol in the left column (the symbol in which A and A'are combined and displayed) correspond to each other. The main third design in the row (blank design) and the sub-third design in the middle row (design in which C and B'are combined and displayed) correspond to each other, and the main third design in the right row (blank design) And the sub-third symbol in the right column (the symbol in which C and A'are combined and displayed) correspond to each other.

  The sub-third symbol has "A and A '", "B and B'", "C and C '" as a specific combination, and all three sub-third symbols are "A and A'". When combined and displayed, the fact that the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol has been won is a big hit. In addition, when all three sub-third symbols are combined and displayed as "B and B '" or "C and C'", it is a notification that makes the player expect a big hit, for example, "B and B '. It is configured such that "Cha n Su" is displayed by arranging three sub-third symbols that are compositely displayed by "".

  FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state where the middle and right third symbols are switched after FIG. 112 (a) is displayed. As shown in this figure, in the case of displaying the main third symbol and the sub-third symbol, it is designed to display the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol is a combination of the respective symbols. If the determination result is a big hit, the main 3rd symbol is a combination of winning / discarding the special symbol (a combination of three shark / turtle symbols arranged side by side), and the sub 3rd symbol is the winning or losing of the special symbol. A combination in which the determination result is a big hit (a combination in which three symbols to be combined and displayed in A and A'line up) is displayed.

  As described above, in this control example, in the normal game state, the third symbol that is variably displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is used to notify the result of the determination of the special symbol, When shifting to the reel mode, which is a game state different from the normal game state, a special combination of the main third symbol displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the above-described sub third symbol It is configured to be able to notify the result of the determination whether or not the symbol is valid.

  In addition, as a transition condition to the reel mode described above, when the winning / discarding determination result of the special symbol is a predetermined determination result (big hit), or the variation pattern command or the winning command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is the reel mode. There is a case where the production information corresponding to is included.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a reel scenario table 222e added to the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the main process 2. Of the main processing 2, each processing of S1301 to S1313, S1315, S1317 to S1321 is the same as each processing of S1301 to S1313, S1315, S1317 to S1321 of the main processing (see FIG. 87) in the first control example. Since the processing is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. This control example is different from the first control example in that the volume setting process of S1314 (see FIG. 93) executed in the main process is not performed and the reel control process of S1330 (see FIG. 115) is performed. The differences are described below.

  The reel control process (S1330) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel control process (S1330) which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401). When the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401: Yes), the set reel scenario is read (S2402), and the start position of each reel is set (S2403). After that, the setting start flag 223w is set to OFF (S2404), the reel mode flag 223x is set to ON (S2405), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if the setting start flag 223w is off (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S2406). If the reel mode flag is off (S2406: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the reel mode flag is on (S2406: Yes), the set scenario is updated (S2407). Then, it is determined whether it is end data (S2408). If it is end data (S2408: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end data (S2408: No), the operation data is set based on the scenario (S2409), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the variation pattern selection process 2.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S1512). When the effect mode is A (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513). When the reel mode flag 223x is off (S1513: No), a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table A or B and set (S1514). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513: Yes), the variation pattern is selected from the reel scenario table (S1515), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table is a table referred to in the effect control process (prefetch control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (fluctuation pattern selection process) executed when a variation pattern command is received. ) Are separately provided.

  In S1515, the reel scenario table corresponding to the variation pattern selection process is referred to. In this reel scenario table, there are a reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, at a position where the player can visually recognize it (exposed position) and a position where the player cannot easily visually recognize it (storage position). There are prepared a plurality of scenarios in which the reel position, which determines which position is determined, and the rotation speed of the reel member, which is predetermined, are prepared. Based on the information included in the variation pattern selection command and the rotation operation amount. It is configured so that it is appropriately selected and set by the user (see FIG. 134A).

  In the process of S1512, if the effect mode is not A (S1512: No), a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table C and set (S1516). Then, this process is completed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 117, the variable display setting process 2 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1340). In the variable display setting process 2, each process of S1711 to S1719 is the same as each process of S1701 to S1709 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) in the first control example. Detailed description is omitted. This control example is different from the first control example in that the processes of S1720 to S1723 are performed, and will be described below.

  In the process of S1720, it is determined whether or not the information included in the stop type selection command is the reel mode entry pattern (S1720). If it is the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: Yes), the setting start flag 223w is set to ON (S1721), and this processing is ended. The reel mode rush pattern is configured so that the stop type selection command in the case where the special symbol hit determination result is a big hit is included more than the stop type selection command in the case where the special symbol hit determination result is not a big hit. ing.

  On the other hand, if it is not the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the reel mode end pattern (S1722). If it is not the reel mode end pattern (S1722: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the reel mode end pattern (S1722: Yes), the reel mode flag is set to OFF (S1723), and this process is ended.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 133. In the third control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the second control example. Specifically, the above-mentioned command determination processing is added with a winning effect change processing, a volume setting processing 2 is added, a special effect processing is added, and a shake control processing 2 is added. , The difference is that other processing is added. Since the other configurations are the same, the description of the other configurations will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 118, a display mode displayed during the special volume setting effect will be described. Here, the special sound volume setting effect will be described. The special sound volume setting effect is an effect that occurs when a ball is thrown in, and during the period in which the effect is generated, the normal volume setting effect (Fig. A special sound volume setting (see FIG. 130) different from that in FIG. When the sound volume is set by this special sound volume setting, the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the special jackpot expectation degree of the changing special symbol and the jackpot expectation degree in the holding symbol are special voices, sound volumes, or display modes. Is configured to be notified.

  According to the special sound volume setting effect configured in this manner, the operation of setting the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 also causes the notification indicating the jackpot expectation degree to be executed. Therefore, based on one operation performed by the player, it is possible to perform two types of settings, that is, a volume setting and an expectation suggestion notification (effect setting), and to the frame button 22 (operating means) performed by the player to enjoy the game. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the number of operations.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special volume setting effect. When the special volume setting effect is executed as shown in the figure, a part of the sub-pattern (blank pattern) is changed to the volume pattern indicating the volume setting and displayed. During the special volume setting effect, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 is controlled so as to correspond to the display area in which the volume symbol is displayed, and the player controls the glass plate 16a corresponding to the volume symbol. Touch it to set the special volume.

  When the special volume can be set, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be set by operating the selection switch 291 provided on the pachinko machine 10. Based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume pattern displayed on the display screen is changed and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the volume level indicating the volume level.

  In addition, based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume pattern is changed to a display mode according to the jackpot expectation degree of the special symbol that is changing the display manner and the jackpot expectation degree in the reserved symbol. Specifically, the color of the volume pattern is changed from white → blue → yellow → red → rainbow. As a method of changing the display mode based on the jackpot expectation, not only changing the color but also changing the type of the pattern displayed on the volume symbol or changing the form of the symbol mark displayed as the volume symbol, for example. You can think of a change method to do or increase the number.

  Furthermore, as the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation, not only changing the display mode of the volume symbol, but also notification using sound (volume) may be performed, for example, even if an operation to increase the volume level is performed. Regardless, a contradictory effect that the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, or a notification sound effect that announces that there is a big hit in the hit / miss judgment result may be performed. When the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in this way, the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation level is performed using sound, so that the different categories of the volume setting and the notification effect can be related. This makes it possible for the player who has set the volume to easily notice the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation.

  In this control example, the control for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 as the special volume setting effect is described, but the same control may be used other than the volume setting. For example, it may be used when setting the brightness and color tone of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display device). In the case of adopting such a configuration, the sub-pattern (blank pattern) is changed and displayed to a light pattern indicating the brightness or a color bar pattern indicating the hue, and the display mode of the pattern described above as the notification effect based on the expectation degree of the jackpot. In addition to the effect to be changed, a plurality of lamps (LEDs) provided on the pachinko machine 10 may be used for notification. With such a configuration, the expectation of the jackpot is executed by a visual notification effect (luminance of the lamp, hue) based on an operation performed by the player to change the visual setting (luminance, hue). It is possible to make the player notice the notification effect.

  Further, the plurality of sub-symbols (blank symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed to volume symbols, light symbols, and color bar symbols, respectively, so that the setting corresponding to the symbol selected by the player is performed. May be.

  In addition, in this control example, the sub-symbol that is stopped and displayed and a part of the sub-symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner are configured to be changed to the volume symbol, but only the sub-symbol that is stopped and displayed can be changed to the volume symbol. Alternatively, only the sub-symbol that is being variably displayed may be changed to the volume symbol. Further, the jackpot expectation degree may be notified based on the volume setting operation in the normal time.

  Further, in the present control example, a configuration is used in which it is determined whether or not the player has touched the volume symbol based on the detection result of the left and right sensor device 600, but the volume symbol is changed by an operation using an operation means other than the left and right sensor device 600. You may make it the structure which determines having selected.

  As described above, in the special sound volume setting effect in this control example, since the player only performs the operation of setting the sound volume, the state suggestion notification effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is also performed. It is possible to prevent the operation of the operation means (frame button 22, selection switch 291) from becoming complicated.

  Further, since the mode using the sound is used as the mode of the state suggestion notification effect based on the volume setting operation, it is possible to make the player easily notice the state suggestion notification effect.

  Next, the time effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the timing for executing the time production period. First, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the current time information is the timekeeping means by the time setting process (see FIG. 86) in the startup process (see FIG. 85) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Obtained from RTC 292. Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period (effect mode B) is set when 54 minutes have elapsed. It should be noted that the normal game period (production mode A) is set until the preparation period is set. Then, when one minute elapses after the preparation period (production mode B) is set, the time production period (production mode C) is set. After that, when 5 minutes have elapsed since the time performance period (production mode C) was set, the normal game period is set again.

  In this control example, the player obtains points during the normal game period (production mode A1), displays the results of the points obtained during the preparation period (production mode B), and produces time according to the obtained points. The effect of changing the content of the time effect performed during the period (effect mode C) and changing the game content of the next normal game period (effect mode A2) based on the result of the time effect is performed.

  Next, detailed contents of the effect in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. Note that description of the same effects as the contents described in the above-described first control example will be omitted.

  FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, for the player to earn points. It is a figure which shows the mini game performed. Three treasure boxes are lined up in the center of the display screen, and a comment prompting the player to select an arbitrary treasure box is displayed above the treasure boxes. When the player selects an arbitrary treasure box, a display mode showing points appears from the selected treasure box, and the points are added to the points acquired by the player.

  Further, on the display screen, the acquired points (10) and the maximum acquirable points (100) acquired by the player are displayed as “10/100” at the lower left of the screen. The contents of the time effect executed in the subsequent time effect period are determined according to the points obtained during the normal game period.

  Furthermore, near the area where the acquired points are displayed, the acquired point indicator with the maximum value set to 100 points is displayed, and it is possible to visually see how much the current acquired points are with respect to the maximum value. You can grasp it. Further, a boundary line is attached to the position indicating the points 40, 70, 90 acquired in the indicator, and the character "GET" is displayed on each boundary line. In this figure, a display corresponding to 10 points is displayed.

  This boundary line indicates a value at which the table (see FIG. 125A) used when determining the content of the time effect (effect performed in the effect mode C) performed later is switched. By displaying the boundary line in such a manner that it can be visually recognized by the player in this way, it is possible to grasp the number of points required up to the stage where the time effect may be changed while the boundary line is set as the target value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the mini game.

  In addition, the display of the number of acquired points on the indicator is configured so that the color changes by crossing the boundary line. In addition, in the present control example, although the above-mentioned two displays of the acquired points are performed, only one of them may be displayed.

  Note that, in this control example, points can be acquired in the normal game effect as shown in FIG. 120 (b) in addition to the mini game shown in FIG. 120 (a). Therefore, FIG. 120 (b) will be described.

  FIG. 120 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, and is a specific effect "fish school reach". FIG. When the “fish school reach” is executed, “fish school GET + 20 points” is displayed on the display screen and 20 points are added. In this way, even in the normal game effect, since points can be acquired when a specific effect is executed, it is possible to accumulate points even if the mini game cannot be operated well. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect that occurs during the normal game period.

  Regarding the points that can be obtained in the normal game effect, it is preferable that the number of points and a specific effect to which the points are given can be set at random. When such a configuration is used, the type of effect and the number of points set as the specific effect during the current normal game period may be displayed on the display screen. Further, when all the effects set as the specific effects are executed during the normal game period, a privilege of maximizing the acquired points may be provided.

  Further, it may be configured such that a part of the number of points is not added on the display without displaying on the display screen all the number of points acquired by executing the mini game or the specific effect during the normal game period. , It is better to acquire and display less points than the points actually acquired in the mini game, or to display a part of the effects set as a specific effect as a normal effect that is not a specific effect on the display. .. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the specific number of points to be acquired, and the production can be enjoyed until the final result announcement (see FIG. 121 (a)).

  FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (production mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen which announces the result of a number. In the upper area of the main display screen, a comment notifying that the “contact time”, which is a time effect, will be started soon is displayed, and in the right area of the main display screen, the remaining time until the time effect is started (35 There is provided a countdown display section for displaying a countdown of seconds. When the numerical value (seconds) displayed on the countdown display unit becomes 0, the time effect period (effect mode C) is entered and the time effect is started.

  Further, in the left side area of the display screen, there is provided an acquired point result display section for displaying a result of the number of points acquired during the normal game period (production mode A1), and the points acquired during the normal game period are displayed. To be done. In addition, if it is configured not to display all the points acquired during the normal game period on the display screen, it is necessary to check the result of the number of points displayed on the result display section of this figure for the first time during the normal game period. It is possible to know the number of points earned.

  121 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (production mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and points obtained during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen in which the dog breed selected based on the dog breed selection table (refer FIG. 125 (a)) is displayed using a number. In the upper area of the display screen, a comment indicating that the dog type used during the next time effect period (effect mode C) is determined is displayed. In the left area of the display screen, a dog breed display section for displaying the dog breed determined this time is provided, and the dog breed C is displayed as the dog breed used during the next time performance period. Further, the countdown display section displays a display indicating 9 seconds remaining.

  Here, the dog breed used during the time production period will be described. In this control example, dog breeds A to D are prepared as dog breeds used during the time production period, and are selected and determined by the dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) described later. Each breed has individuality, and the degree of increase in reliability in the production (see FIGS. 61 and 62) during the contact time (during time production) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in reliability is set to “normal”, and the effect in which the reliability can be custom set is set to “reach of fish”.

  In this control example, the type of performance in which the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability can be custom-set is set for each breed, but the player custom-sets the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability. You may make it possible to select the type of possible effects. In such a case, for example, when the dog type D is selected, the selectable range is reduced, and when the dog type A is selected, the selectable range is increased. With this configuration, the player will play the game so that the dog breed A is set regardless of various custom settings.

  In addition, a game mode other than the game modes (reach type, reliability) described in this control example may be custom-set. For example, the appearance rate of the premier effect in the variable display in which the hit determination result is a big hit, the appearance rate of the effect capable of giving a large amount of points accumulated by the player, and the like can be considered.

  In this control example, the normal game period is divided into a period for obtaining points (production mode A1) and a period for performing production based on the content set in the time production (production mode A2), and the alternate execution is performed. However, for example, at the start of the normal game period (at the end of the time effect period), the player may be allowed to select which period is to be executed during the normal game period. With this configuration, if the desired setting cannot be made during the time production period, it becomes possible to select the period for which points are to be acquired again, so that the player is encouraged to actively participate in the production. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the normal game period is divided into the first half part and the second half part, the first half part may be a period for performing an effect based on the contents set during the time effect period, and the second half part may be a period for acquiring points, or points may be set. The acquisition period and the period for performing the effect based on the content set in the time effect may be overlapped and both may be performed at the same time.

  Further, the points obtained during the normal game period may be accumulated all day long, and the content of the time effect may be set based on the accumulated points. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long time. Also, the acquired points are converted into information (for example, a two-dimensional code) that can be read by an external terminal (mobile device) and output, and information (for example, a password) created based on the information read by the external device. By inputting to the pachinko machine 10, it may be possible to execute a game that succeeds the previously acquired points. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage a player who has no time to play a game for a long time over the days.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, detailed contents of the effect in the swing effect 2 will be described. FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the swing effect 2, in which the player uses the arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) which is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges to operate the frame button 22 in time to shake.

  Here, the swing effect 2 will be described. The swing effect 2 is an effect in which the slightly swinging arm member 444 is moved based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. Specifically, the timing of calculating the movable state (swaying state) data of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444, and notifying the operation timing on the display screen based on the calculated data. Display the notification. Then, the timing for driving the arm member 444 is determined based on the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 and the operation timing based on the movable state (swaying state) data of the arm member, and the effect of driving the arm member 444 is determined. Is.

  In the swing effect 2 described above, the player operates the frame button 22 at a timely timing so that the arm member 444 is controlled to swing greatly, and when the player operates the frame button 22 at a wrong timing, the arm member 444 is controlled. It is controlled so that the shaking becomes small. In this way, by controlling the operation of the variable member based on the operation of the player, the player feels that he / she is participating in the production of the pachinko machine 10, so that he / she can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. be able to.

  Further, in the swing effect 2 in this control example, since the timing display for displaying the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is controlled based on the actual swing state of the variable member, it is displayed on the display screen. The timing display and the actual shaking state of the variable member are synchronized. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated in good timing in accordance with the timing display, the leg member 444 is controlled so as to sway greatly, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. In the center area of the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a), a comment urging the player to operate the frame button 22 and a diagram simulating the frame button 22 are displayed. Is provided with a timing display portion in which an indicator is displayed to move in the left-right direction within a predetermined area M. The indicator displayed on the timing display unit is increased / decreased in the left / right direction based on the information obtained by converting the actual shaking state of the arm member 444 into data using an acceleration sensor. The speed of increasing / decreasing movement in the left / right direction may be controlled so as to increase as the swing width of the arm member 444 increases, or the speed obtained by correcting the information obtained from the acceleration sensor may be controlled to be a constant speed at all times. Good.

  Then, the timing at which the indicator is located at the center position S (range of “a”) within the predetermined area M is the timing for swinging the arm member 444 most efficiently by operating the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is operated. The arm member 444 is controlled such that the arm member 444 does not swing greatly as the timing moves away from the center position S (range b → range c). It should be noted that the timing display is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during one swing effect 2.

  In this control example, the player uses the frame button 22 with good timing as the swing member effect 2, but the effect shown in FIG. 122 (b) may be used as an effect other than that. FIG. 122 (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the swing effect 2, in which the player is an arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) that is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which prompts you to carry out continuous operation of the frame button 22 in order to shake.

  In this another example, a comment urging the player to repeatedly press the frame button 22 and a diagram imitating the frame button 22 are displayed in the center area of the display screen, and the right side area of the display screen is displayed with continuous hits. A continuous hit number display unit is provided for displaying an indicator that moves (raises) upward depending on the number of times. In another example shown in this figure, the indicator of the continuous hit number display portion rises according to the number of times the frame button 22 is hit repeatedly. The arm member 444 may be driven at a timing at which the arm member 444 greatly shakes as the indicator level of the continuous hit count display portion increases (as it rises).

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
The third control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 123A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example has a rotary body operation table 222f and a dog breed selection table 222g added to the second control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, FIG. 123B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example has a volume setting period flag 223α and a special volume setting flag 223β added to the second control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the RAM 223 shown in FIG. 123 (b), the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the fluctuation start flag 223d are not described, but this is in the other memory area 223z. The same processing as that of the second control example is performed, assuming that it is included and only omitting the description.

  Next, a combination of figures displayed on the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. Regarding the configurations of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram showing a rotary body operation table showing a combination of graphics of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b and an error range used when setting the combination of the graphics in this control example. Here, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, its rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b by the transmission mechanism (detailed description is omitted because it is the same as the first embodiment described above). To). The number of teeth of the first gear 353, which is a transmission mechanism that transmits the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a, is set to 14. On the other hand, the number of teeth of the second gear 355, which is a transmission mechanism that transmits the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the second rotary body 340b, is set to 20.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven and the first gear 353 rotates by one tooth, the first rotating body 340a rotates about 25 degrees. The second gear 355 also rotates by one tooth in conjunction with the rotation of the first gear 353 by one tooth. When the second gear 355 rotates by one tooth, the second rotating body 340b rotates about 18 degrees. As described above, since the first rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate at different angles based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350, various combinations can be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. In the rotary body operation table shown in this figure, the vertical axis shows No. Are provided from "1" to "141". No. shown on the vertical axis. Is attached in correspondence with the unit in which the drive motor control means described above performs control, that is, each state in which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 rotate by one tooth based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. No. The state in which the first rotary body 340a has rotated 25 degrees and the second rotary body 340b has rotated 18 degrees from the state shown in No. 1 is No. Shown as 2. In the following, numbers are sequentially assigned based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. No. becomes "141". It returns to the same state as "1". That is, the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 have 140 teeth, that is, the first rotating body 340a rotates 3600 degrees (10 rotations), and the second rotating body 340b rotates 2520 degrees (7 rotations). It is configured to return to the state.

  Further, the rotating body operation table is provided with a first error range and a second error range, and the No. It shows whether the display mode of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b corresponding to is allowed as the display mode of the third symbol. Here, the first error range and the second error range provided in the rotating body operation table will be described. In addition, regarding the mechanism in which an error occurs in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the structure for preventing the display form from causing an uncomfortable feeling due to the error, the structure described in the first embodiment described above. The description is omitted because it is the same as the above.

  The first error range shown in the rotating body operation table is an error range (12 degrees) set as a range in which the display mode can be visually recognized without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and the second error range is It is a range wider than the first error range and is an error range (30 degrees) set as a range visible to the player.

  For example, the No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b in the state of "48" is "B, B '", and this display mode is set as the first error range. In addition, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b in the state of "89" is also "B, B '", and this display mode is set as the second error range.

  This is No. 1 which is the first error range from the current display mode (display information) of the rotating body obtained in the prefetch reel display effect processing (see FIG. 129) described later. When the amount of rotation until moving to “48” is equal to or more than the predetermined amount, the second error range No. This is so that the correction can be performed so as to move to “89”.

  By setting a plurality of error ranges in this way, when the time to stop each rotating body (remaining variation time of the third symbol) is short, for example, in the winning command that occurs during variable display of the third symbol A predetermined stop display mode is displayed even in the variation effect using the rotating body based on the rotating effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 generated while the third symbol is varyingly displayed. It becomes possible.

  In this control example, the drive motor 350 described in the first embodiment is used, and the first rotating member 340a and the second rotating member 340b are rotated in the forward rotation direction (the ascending direction of No.) or the reverse rotation direction ( It can be rotated in the descending direction of No.) and is controlled by the drive motor control means provided in the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, each table used in the special effect process and the swing effect process 2 added in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a dog breed selection table used in a special effect process (see FIG. 132) described later.

  This breed selection table is based on the points (mission achievement result) acquired while the effect mode is set to mode A, and the special effect (contact time) that is executed while the effect mode is set to mode C. ) Is a table for selecting a dog type used in (1), and is configured so that any one of dog types A to D is selected depending on the mission achievement result.

  The breeds A to D are set so that the degree of increase in reliability in the production (see FIGS. 61 and 62) during the contact time (during time production) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121B, the degree of increase in reliability is set to “normal”, and the effect in which the reliability can be custom set is set to “reach of fish”. It should be noted that, the more points the mission achievement result has, the higher the performance effect is set for the player, and the breed A is set to be the breed with the highest performance effect.

  Here, the high effect of the effect means, for example, increasing the appearance frequency of the effect (premier effect) that rarely appears in the normal case or expanding the range of the custom setting of the reliability, and thus the normal game. It means making it possible to experience productions that cannot be experienced in the state.

  Next, FIG. 125B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the shaking motion table 2 used in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) described later. This shaking motion table 2 obtains the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the variable status of the variable member (arm member 444) in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) executed when a shaking effect is being performed. 9 is a table for setting a direction in which the variable member (arm member 444) is rotated based on the acceleration sensor information for performing the operation.

  In the shaking motion table 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b), the button operation timing is divided into three, "81-100", "51-80", and "0-50". This division corresponds to the indicators “a”, “b”, and “c” displayed in FIG. 122 (a), for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed in the circle (center position S In the case of (in), the direction of rotating the variable member (arm member 444) is set by referring to the table of "81 to 100" corresponding to the button operation timing of "a".

  Next, the acceleration sensor information shown in the swing motion table 2 in FIG. 125 (b) is classified based on the information obtained from the acceleration sensor provided in the variable member. When the information acquired from the table indicates that the variable member is rotating to the left, the table of the left rotation period is referred to.

  Then, the rotation direction of the variable member (arm member 444) is set by referring to the table corresponding to the above-mentioned button operation timing and acceleration sensor information. In this control example, when the button operation timing is "81 to 100", data for driving the drive motor in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member increases is set, and when the button operation timing is "51 to 80", , The data for driving the drive motor is not set in order to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. Further, when the button operation timing is “0 to 50”, data for driving the drive motor in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member becomes smaller is set.

  In this control example, the data for driving the drive motor is not set to maintain the rotation width of the variable member, but the data for driving the drive motor to maintain the rotation width of the variable member is set. You may set it.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 133, a control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This control example is different from the above control examples in that a part of the command determination process, the volume setting process, and the shake control process is changed, and that a special effect process is newly added, and other The parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 126, the details of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main process, first, similarly to the second control example, the processes of S1301 to S1310 are executed. Next, a command determination process 2 is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1351). Details of this command determination processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. After the command determination process 2 (S1351) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed as in the second control example described above, and then the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. This volume setting process 2 is a process executed during the special volume setting effect described with reference to FIG. 118, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the special effect process (S1353) is executed. This special effect process is a process executed during the special effect described in FIGS. 119 and 120, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. Next, the swing control process 2 (S1354) performed during the swing effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 121 is performed. Details of the swing control process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the other processing (S1355) described in the above-described first control example or the second control example is executed, and the processing from S1317 to S1321 is executed similarly to the above-described second control example. In S1355, a synchronization effect management process (S1313), a left / right selection process (S1315), and a reel control process (S1330) are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the details of the command determination processing 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 2 (S1351). In this command determination processing 2 (S1351), a point-of-winning effect change processing (S1451) performed when a special symbol winning command is received is added to the command determination processing (S1311) in the second control example described above. However, the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the command determination process 2, first, the processes of S1401 to S1410 are executed similarly to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 88). Next, when it is determined in S1410 that the winning command of the special symbol is not received (S1410: No), the process (S1412) corresponding to the other command is executed similarly to the command determination process described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1410 that the special symbol winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area (S1411), and the winning effect changing process is performed. (S1451) is executed. This winning production effect changing process (S1451) is, when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device 110, executes an effect changing process based on the winning command. See below. Then, the effect changing process at the time of winning (S1451) is executed and then the process proceeds to S1412.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a winning command for a special symbol is received from the main control device 110, an effect (so-called prefetching effect) based on the information included in the winning command can be realized. Are described as follows. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects by changing the effect at a timing other than the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, and thus it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of the player. There is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the prize winning effect change process (S1451) performed in the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the effect changing process (S1451) at the time of winning a prize. In the prize effect changing process (S1451), a process related to an effect (so-called prefetch effect) executed based on the information included in the received prize command is executed.

  In the effect changing process at the time of winning, first, the winning information received this time is extracted from the winning information storage area (S4401). Next, it is determined whether the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the look-ahead effect (S4402). If the extracted winning information does not include the information corresponding to the prefetching effect (S4402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the prefetching effect (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the prefetching effect is the chance eye display effect (S4403).

  This chance eye display effect is an effect executed based on the determination result of the prize command received this time, and the third symbol executed until the third symbol variation based on the prize command received this time is started. In the fluctuation, the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is a predetermined specific combination other than the combination that becomes the big hit, and this is an effect that suggests that there is a big hit in the determination result of the reserved symbols.

  When it is determined in S4403 that the prefetch effect is not the chance display effect (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prefetch effect is the chance display effect (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404).

  Here, when it is determined that the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404: Yes), the stop symbol for display in which the stop symbol is the chance is set (S4413), and the process proceeds to S4408.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the third symbol is not changing at high speed (S4404: No), it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the third symbol is more than 3 seconds (S4405). If the variation remaining time of the third symbol is 3 seconds or less (S4405: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time of fluctuation of the third symbol is more than 3 seconds (S4405: Yes), the reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table based on the remaining time of fluctuation (S4406), and the setting start flag is set. Set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S4408.

  As described above, in the chance eye display effect in the present control example, it is possible to change the mode in which the chance eye is displayed according to the timing at which the winning command including the information for executing the chance target indication effect is received. That is, when the timing of receiving the prize command is changing the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at a high speed, the process of changing the stopped symbol of the variation to the chance is executed. Even if the player does not feel uncomfortable, the stop symbol of the third symbol, which is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, is set as a display stop type command for a chance. On the other hand, when the timing of receiving the prize command is not changing at a high speed, the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, at least one of the plurality of symbol columns is stopped and displayed). At the timing of timing, or at the time of low-speed display at which at least one of the plurality of symbol rows allows the player to visually recognize fluctuations in the symbol), a reel member (first rotor 340a The third symbol is synthesized and displayed by the outer peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b, and a member for variably displaying a plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol displayed on the screen is raised to a position (exposure position) that covers the third symbol, and the opportunity is controlled to be displayed.

  With this configuration, even if the winning command including the information of the chance display effect is received at the timing when the third symbol is stopped or changed at a low speed on the display screen, the player feels strange. It is possible to display the chance eyes without any. Therefore, when the winning command including the information of the chance display effect is received, the stop display of the changing third symbol can be changed to the chance, and the changing third symbol can be changed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. This has the effect of lengthening the period during which the stop display can be changed to a chance.

  In this control example, the remaining variation time of the third symbol is determined in S4405. This is to raise the reel member stored in the storage position, which is difficult for the player to see in the normal game state, to the exposed position that covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by driving the rotating body lifting unit 300. If the time required to raise the reel member to the exposed position is shortened, the remaining fluctuation time determined in S4405 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present control example, the reel member stored in the storage position is reel-controlled so that the display mode synthesized and displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member corresponds to the chance pattern of the third symbol. That is, after the third symbol variation effect using the reel member is finished and the reel member is lowered to the storage position by the rotating body lifting unit 300, the reel control described above is executed. It should be noted that the display mode displayed on the display surface when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are located at the origin position (initial position) may be configured to correspond to the chance eye. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a reel control that makes the display mode of the reel member an opportunity, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 128, the description will be continued. Next, the prefetch reel display effect process is executed (S4408). Here, the prefetch reel display effect, in order to securely display the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the information of the prefetch reel display effect, within the variation time, the prefetch reel It is a process of changing the display mode of the reel member until the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the information of the display effect is started. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the pre-reading reel display effect process (S4408) is executed, it is determined whether the pre-reading effect is the special volume setting effect (S4409). Here, the special volume setting effect is an effect indicating a period during which a special volume setting different from the normal volume setting (see FIG. 93) is possible, and when the volume is set by this special volume setting, While the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, the expected jackpot of the changing special symbol and the expected jackpot of the pending symbol are notified using a special voice, volume, or display mode.

  If it is not determined in S4409 that the prefetch effect is the special volume setting (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4412. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is the special volume setting (S4409: Yes), the display stop type command in which the blank symbol (sub symbol) is changed to the volume symbol is set (S4410). Then, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to ON (S4411).

  Next, other processing related to the prefetch effect is executed (S4412). Here, as other processing, for example, there is processing for changing the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information included in the winning command. After executing the other prefetching processing in S4412, this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the winning command of the special symbol is received from the main control device, the prefetching effect is executed based on the information included in the winning command. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that suggests the result of the determination based on the winning in the period between the winning of the ball in the winning opening and the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the details of the prefetch reel display effect process (S4408) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the prefetch reel display effect processing (S4408). The pre-reading reel display effect process (S4408) is a process related to the pre-reading effect that is performed during the above-described winning-time effect changing process (S1451).

  When the prefetch reel display effect process is started, first, the current display information of the reel member (the sub-third symbol information displayed on the reel member) and the prefetch stop display information (the sub-third symbol based on the winning command) Stop display information) is acquired (S4501). The sub-third symbol displayed on the reel member is formed by combining and displaying the symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is controlled by the rotation drive of the drive motor 350.

  Therefore, the current display information can be acquired by detecting the rotational drive status of the drive motor 350. Specifically, the number of steps (the number of pulses) for driving the drive motor 350, which is a stepping motor, to rotate is detected, and a portion corresponding to the current step number is acquired from the rotary body operation table as current display information.

  Further, with the acquisition of the prefetch stop display information, the stop display symbol of the sub-third symbol based on the prize command is determined from the information included in the prize command, and the stop display symbol is the first from the rotating body operation table. No. displayed within the error range. It is to get information.

  Next, the rotation amount is calculated using the current display information acquired as described above and the prefetch stop display method (S4502). Specifically, in the rotating body operation table, the No. corresponding to the current display information. And the prefetch stop display information corresponds to the No. Calculate the difference between and. In this control example, the drive motor 350 is configured to be capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation. And the case where the drive motor 350 is rotated in the reverse direction (the case where the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. decreases), the smaller rotation amount is calculated.

  Then, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated in S4502 is the rotation amount that rotates the first rotating body more than 1080 degrees (S4503). Here, the rotation amount of the first rotating body will be described. In this control example, it takes about 1 second for the first rotating body to complete one revolution. That is, in S4503, the No. corresponding to the current display information. No. corresponding to the prefetch stop display information. It is determined whether the number of seconds required to move (rotate) to is 3 seconds or more.

  In the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the rotation amount is the rotation amount to rotate more than 1080 degrees (S4503: Yes), the No. corresponding to the stop display information is displayed. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4504. According to the rotation operation table shown in FIG. 124, the No. corresponding to the current information is displayed. However, the No. corresponding to the stop display information in the first error range. No. need to rotate more than 1080 degrees to rotate up to No. If it is No. No. corresponding to the stop display information in the second error range within the rotation range of 1080 degrees or less. Is present, the No. corresponding to the stop display information in the process of S4506. By correcting from the first error range to the second error range, the rotation amount can be corrected within 3 seconds.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the rotation amount is 1080 degrees or less, the corresponding reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table (S4504), and the setting start flag is set to ON (S4505). Then, this process ends.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table is a table referred to in the effect control process (prefetch control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (fluctuation pattern selection process) executed when a variation pattern command is received. ) Are separately provided.

  In S4504, the reel scenario table corresponding to the prefetch control process is referred to. In the reel scenario table, the reel member constituted by the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is located at a position where the player can visually recognize it (exposed position) or at a position where the player cannot visually recognize it (storage position). The reel position that determines whether or not to position the reel member, the rotation speed of the reel member as a rotating operation, the presence or absence of pre-rotation, and the presence or absence of a notification effect that notifies the player that the pre-read reel display effect is being performed. A plurality of predetermined scenarios are prepared, and are configured to be appropriately selected and set based on the information included in the winning command, the amount of rotational movement, and the number of reserved symbols (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  The pre-rotation provided in the reel scenario table is No. corresponding to the current display information. From the No. corresponding to the stop display information. The rotation operation up to, not only during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the prefetch information (information of the prefetch reel display effect), the prize command including the prefetch information (information of the prefetch reel display effect) No. corresponding to the current display information while other variable display (pre-variation display) executed until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to No. From the No. corresponding to the stop display information. It is a control to rotate the reel symbol in advance toward.

  The control of the pre-rotation is based on the number of pre-variation display (or the number of holding symbols) of the pre-rotation amount, and a pattern in which the pre-rotation amount is made uniform for each variation display and the rotation amount. There is a pattern in which the pre-rotation movement amount is set based on the value, which is set based on the value acquired from the effect counter and the variation time of each variation display.

  By using such a configuration, even if the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the prefetch information (information of the prefetch reel display effect) is short, the angle at which the reel is rotated during the variable display ( It is possible to reduce the number of rotations in advance, and it is possible to provide the look-ahead reel display effect to the player without any discomfort.

  In the case of performing the above-described pre-rotation, the effect pattern of raising the reel to the exposed position, performing the pre-rotation, and lowering the reel to the storage position again, and the pre-rotation with the reel in the storage position are performed. It is advisable to provide both an effect pattern for performing.

  With such a configuration, by performing the pre-rotation at the exposure position in the former effect pattern, the player is informed that the pre-read reel display effect is being performed, and the player is expected. In the latter effect pattern, which makes it possible to play the game, by performing the pre-rotation at the storage position, it is possible to carry out the contents of the pre-rotation without notifying the player, as if any pattern It is possible to make (the stop display with the No. corresponding to the stop display information) appear to be displayed quickly.

  Further, as the notification effect for notifying the player that the pre-reading reel display effect is being performed, there is an effect in which the container 300, which is a reel member, is driven to swing at the storage position, and a plurality of values are obtained based on the value acquired from the effect counter. It is set appropriately from the swing pattern.

  As a condition for selecting a scenario from the reel scenario table, a game state or a game result may be added. With this configuration, it is possible to complicate the effect pattern, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Although the rotation speed of the first rotating body 340a has been described as one rotation for about 1 second, in actuality, by controlling the pulse width (frequency) input to the drive motor 350, low speed rotation, medium speed rotation, It is configured so that high-speed rotation and rotation speed can be changed. In the process of S4503, the No. corresponding to the stop display information is based on the rotation speed when the low speed rotation is performed. A correction boundary value (1080 degrees) for correcting the above from the first error range to the second error range is provided.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to stop display the stop display information, regardless of the rotation speed set in the reel scenario set in S4504.

  In this control example, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated based on the current display information and the prefetch stop display information is larger than a predetermined amount. No. displayed the stop display pattern Is configured to be acquired from within the second error range, but the stop display symbol may be set from within the first error range or within the second error range by other methods. For example, the time until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command including the information of the prefetch reel display effect is started as the prefetch effect, or until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command is stopped. You may make it set whether to acquire a stop display symbol from a 1st error range or a 2nd error range based on time. With this configuration, the player can be more surely caused to display the stop display information.

  Further, in the present control example, the present process is configured as a process (so-called prefetching effect process) of the effect based on the reception of the winning command, but, for example, the process of the effect based on the reception of the variation pattern command. This process may be used as With this configuration, it is possible to determine which error range to set the stop display symbol based on the variation time of the variation, and the problem that the stop display cannot be made in time within the variation time. It becomes possible to suppress.

  In addition to this, it may be used for an effect executed based on the player operating the frame button 22. As such an effect, for example, before the player operates the frame button 22, the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22. The production in which the variable display of the third symbol is changed to a mode using the reel member is conceivable.

  Even when performing such an effect, the variable display of the third symbol displayed on the liquid crystal corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, the third symbol using the reel member during the variable display of the special symbol In the case of using the effect of switching to the variable display, as in the present control example, the stop display mode of the third symbol using the reel member is configured to be settable from the first error range and the second error range. If the fluctuation remaining time of the symbol has a margin, it can be set from the first error range, and if there is no margin in the fluctuation time, it can be set from the second error range. Therefore, the stop display will be in time within the fluctuation time. It becomes possible to suppress such a problem as not to occur, and by providing the second error range, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from the liquid crystal display to the reel member even when the remaining time of fluctuation of the special symbol is reduced. For To change to the display was able to allow.

  Further, in this control example, the symbol (liquid crystal symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol (rotary symbol) synthetically displayed by the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are respectively designated as Although it is used as 3 symbols, other than that, for example, only the liquid crystal symbol is used as the 3rd symbol, and the rotary symbol may be used as the effect symbol for effect (the symbol which does not directly correspond to the variable display of the special symbol), or the liquid crystal symbol. May be used as the effect symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as the third symbol. Further, the third symbol may be switched from the liquid crystal symbol to the rotary symbol during one variable display. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide various effects by combining the third symbol and the effect symbol.

  Next, the details of the volume setting process 2 (S1352) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the volume setting processing 2 (S1352). The volume setting process 2 (S1352) is different from the above-described volume setting process (S1314) in that a process when the volume setting period flag 223α is determined to be ON is added, and other parts are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the volume setting process 2, first, it is determined whether the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601). When it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is not turned on (S4601: No), the above-described volume setting process (S1314) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the special volume setting flag 223β is set on (S4602). When the special volume setting flag 223β is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is determined whether the volume symbol is selected by the player (S4603).

  In the processing of S4603, when it is determined that the volume symbol is not selected (S4603: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume pattern is selected (S4603: Yes), the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON (S4604), and the display command indicating the display of the special volume setting screen is set (S4605). . Next, a special volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

  When the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON, the volume level controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 is switched from the volume level in the normal game to the special volume level in the special volume setting effect. With this configuration, when the special volume setting effect is finished and the normal game is returned to, the volume level operated during the special volume setting effect is automatically switched to the volume level in the normal game. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a troublesome operation in which the player sets the volume of the pachinko machine 10 again to the volume level suitable for the normal game.

  Returning to the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the special volume setting flag 223β is ON (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607). If it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a has been pressed (S4607: Yes), the special volume level is increased to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4608), and the display command indicating the special volume level is displayed. Is set (S4609). On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a is not pressed (S4607: No), then it is determined whether the lower selection switch 291b is pressed (S4610).

  In the process of S4610, when it is determined that the lower selection switch 291b is not pressed (S4610: No), the process proceeds to the special volume setting period management process (S4606). On the other hand, if it is determined that the down selection switch 291b has been pressed (S4610: Yes), the special volume level is lowered and set to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4611), and the display indicating the special volume level is displayed. Command is set (S4612). Next, a special volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

  The special volume setting period management process (S4606) is a process of managing the period during which the special volume is set, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. After the processing of S4606 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, details of the special sound volume setting period management processing (S4606) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the volume setting period management processing (S4606).

  In the volume setting period management process, first, it is determined whether the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701). Here, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop command corresponding to the winning information in which the special volume setting effect is set is received (S4702). This determination is made by receiving the stop command set in S300 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 77) executed in main controller 110.

  In the present control example, the winning command and the stop command output from the main control device are provided with identification information that can be linked, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 indicates the winning command based on the identification information. Although the winning information and the stop command are configured to be associated with each other, other configurations may be used. For example, an area in which prize information including special volume setting performance information is stored in the prize information storage area is stored, and an area in which prize information including special volume setting performance information is stored is shifted to the execution area. You may make it the structure which manages that.

  Returning to FIG. 131, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4702 that there is no stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect has been set (not received yet) (S4702: No), this process ends because the volume setting period is still in progress. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set is received (received), the special volume level is cleared (S4703), and the display command for erasing the display of the special volume setting screen is displayed. Is set (S4704). Next, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to OFF (S4705), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the volume set in the special volume setting process executed during the special volume setting effect is set as the special volume level, which can be stored and set separately from the normal volume level. Has been done. Therefore, when the special volume setting effect is finished and the game returns to the normal game, the volume set in the normal game before the special volume setting effect is started (the volume level stored in the volume setting storage area) It is possible to return to the ready.

  Next, details of the special effect process (S1353) performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special effect process (S1353).

  In the special effect process, first, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode A (S4801). When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the mode A (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current effect mode is the mode A (S4801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a mini game is in progress (S4802). Here, the mini game is a game effect shown in FIG. 120A in which the player operates the operation means (frame button 22, touch switch 290, selection switch 291) to obtain points.

  In the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the mini game is not in progress (S4802: No), the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mini game is in progress (S4802: Yes), points corresponding to the result of the mini game are added to the acquired point storage area (S4803), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4804). ). Then, the process proceeds to S4805.

  Next, it is determined whether the current effect is a specific effect (S4805). Here, the specific effect is a predetermined effect that can earn points by appearing among the effects generated in the normal game shown in FIG. 120 (b). In the process of S4805, when it is determined that the effect is not the specific effect (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the specific effect (S4805: Yes), points corresponding to the specific effect are added to the acquired point storage area (S4806), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4807).

  As described above, in the special effect process when the effect mode is the mode A, a process of adding points acquired by the player based on the mini game or the specific effect is performed. Note that another method may be used as a method for allowing the player to obtain points during the production mode A. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that a predetermined password can be input, and the points can be added by the player inputting the predetermined password. The points may be added based on the number of balls.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the process (S4802-S4807) when the effect mode is the mode A is executed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is the mode B (S4808). When it is determined that the effect mode is not the mode B (S4808: No), the process proceeds to S4811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect mode is the mode B (S4808: Yes), then the dog type is selected from the dog type selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) based on the number of points in the acquired point storage area. (S4809). Then, a display command indicating the dog type is set (S4810), and the process proceeds to S4811.

  As described above, in the special effect process when the effect mode is the mode B, a process of selecting a dog breed used in the mode C described later is performed based on the points acquired in the mode A. In this control example, by selecting a specific dog breed from a plurality of types of dogs, the content of the setting performed during mode C (reliability of the rendering and the type of rendering that sets the reliability) is changed. However, even if the player can select the type of setting performed in mode C and the degree of increase in reliability based on the points acquired in mode A in mode B, Good. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to increase the range that the player can select as the number of points acquired in the mode A increases. By doing so, the player can positively gain points, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the process (S4809 to S4810) when the effect mode is the mode B is performed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is the mode C (S48118). When it is determined that the effect mode is not the mode C (S4811: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is mode C (S4811: Yes), the effect corresponding to the dog breed set in S4809 is set (S4812). Then, the above-described special SW effect control process (FIG. 98, S2203) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, the effect (special effect) in which the reliability of the game effect executed when the effect mode is the mode C can be changed (custom setting) can be set. With regard to the above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that it is possible to change the type of the effect to be custom-set and the degree of increase in the reliability of the effect based on the points acquired when the effect mode is the mode A. Even when the player stays in the effect mode, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the game effect at all times, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  Next, referring to FIG. 133, the details of the shake control process 2 (S1354) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the shake control process 2 (S1354).

  In the swing control process 2, first, it is determined whether the operating flag is set to ON (S4901). When it is determined that the operating flag is set to ON (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the in-operation flag is not set to ON (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the variation pattern is a swing effect (S4902).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4902 that the fluctuation pattern is not the shaking effect (S4902: No), other shaking control processing (S4911) is executed, and this processing ends. The other shaking control processing executed in S4911 is the shaking control processing (S1316) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S49028 that the fluctuation pattern is a swing effect (S4902: Yes), initial motion data for driving the arm member 444 (movable accessory) in a predetermined manner is set ( (S4903), the operating flag is set to ON (S4904). Next, the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the movable accessory is read to obtain the swing information of the movable accessory (S4905). Then, a display command for moving the indicator is set based on the information of the acceleration sensor (S4906). The indicator corresponding to the display command set here becomes the indicator displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a).

  When the process of S4906 is executed, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated next (S4907). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907: Yes), the shaking motion data (see FIG. 125 (b)) based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the information of the acceleration sensor is used for the shaking motion data. To set. Then, it is determined whether or not the shaking effect has ended (S4909).

  If it is determined that the shaking effect has not ended (S4909: No), this processing ends, while if it is determined that the shaking effect has ended (S4909: Yes), the operating flag is turned off. The setting is made (S4910), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the swing control process 2 in this control example, the operation status of the movable accessory is acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 (movable accessory), and is operated by the player. Based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 (operating means) and the operating condition of the movable accessory, the movable accessory is moved in a direction in which it largely shakes (moving direction), or a direction in which the movable accessory shakes slightly (moves). The movable member is actually controlled to move based on the player's operation, because the swing motion (movable motion) table 2 is used to set whether to move in the direction). As a result, it is possible to urge the player to positively operate the operation means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the present control example, an indicator (operation timing notification display) for notifying the timing at which the player operates the operating means is provided on the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation status of the movable accessory obtained from the information of the acceleration sensor. Since it can be displayed on the display screen, the player can cause the movable accessory to perform a desired movable operation by operating the operation means while watching the operation timing notification display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114, and when the command is received by the display controller 114, the display controller 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. Then, after that, the display control device 114 may be configured to transmit a command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, is in use). Resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, in use). ) And) may be provided in the image controller 237 and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and from the state of the signal, the resident It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, whether the scan is in the blank period, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237, or a notification from the image controller 237. If the scanning state is in the blank period, the video RAMs 235 and 236 may be determined to be unused. Thereby, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data that is not Null data to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table etc., the drawing of that sprite The image data which is not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by utilizing the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform the important process such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can perform the transfer process of.

  In the above-described embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. With this configuration, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the storage RAM type is not included, and the address set in the common address system is simply used. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be directly connected to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit such as a hard disk. May be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, an image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first provides the area after the system reset is released. It is also possible to store a part of the boot program that is executed by the. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after system reset is released. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) is provided with the first program storage area 234d1, and a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). It is also possible to provide a first program storage area in that memory and store a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. In, a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, a case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and thus the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. As a result, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by being connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connected to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-port type is also possible. Type RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while reading image data from the normal video RAM 236 and drawing an image, the data is read from the character ROM 234. It is possible to perform parallel processing of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drawing process from being delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I / O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferably resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by the drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten during power-on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 is not necessarily limited thereto. Based on a command received from the third symbol display device 81, when the image to be displayed is greatly different, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger. Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated when the other resident images are updated, and is retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You can leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly made resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to (data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may do so.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is displayed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read the image data that should be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is stored is stored in advance. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM judgment value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, and therefore the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to. In this case, the image data may be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the instantaneous blackout and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If so, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for restoration from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a whose reading speed is slow, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank region which is the scanning region other than the display region in which the actual image is displayed, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. Corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are turned on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area. Although the case of transferring to the 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is being displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used for power-on. When the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like, The image data to be made resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Further, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read from the memory, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command and the frame button. The case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the effect mode of super reach is changed based on the operation command has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image and the super reach according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the effect mode of super reach according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the changed super-reach of the effect mode is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the combined data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is defined. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, by transmitting an error command to the display control device 114, The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110, The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may transmit an error command for notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and further transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 Corresponding to an address in which the time (20 msec in this embodiment) for displaying an image for a frame is defined as one unit, at that time, the type of the sprite whose color tone is changed and the sprite after the change in the sprite The color information specifying the color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing content of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with an address represented by 1 unit of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) displayed, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added to each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, ...) For identifying the additionally displayable effect. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used, according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame in which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so that the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. Alternatively, the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and the image information is output to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d and before the finalized display effect is completed, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received, when setting the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect in the display data table buffer 233d Although described, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d as the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect is produced until either the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113. The fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d each time the display ends. As a result, it is possible to continue displaying the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect is described as a case where the rear image is changed and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image which is completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. In the case of transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on after the transfer is completed on the third symbol display device 81, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned on. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, image data to be resident including image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be used in the operation check in the player, the hall personnel, or the factory at the time of manufacturing. You can immediately check that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Thus, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. On the basis of the above, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is preferably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on variation image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) and the contents to be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be defined at every predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, if the third symbol display device 81 is to display an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

  Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn that is defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for identifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is also stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It has been described that the MPU 231 determines whether or not the normal video RAM 236 stores the predetermined sprite type image data in the normal video RAM 236, and executes the transfer process non-execution process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to check whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. May be stored. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if the MPU 231 needs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 236 regardless of the storage state of the image data. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” of the plurality of rear images is made to be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times that the

  In the above-described embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 instructs the transfer instruction at the predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case has been described where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is configured to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234 normally. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to be transferred to the dedicated video RAM 236.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the back surface C that is the back image of the “island stage” changes with time has been described, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. Further, as the back image, not only those that scroll or change in color tone over time, but instead of such a back image, an object that appears over time (for example, a person) It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 uses the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of the winning prize to be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 as the number of reserved balls. Although the case of including in the command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of winning the start prize is voice-lamped by another command. The control device 113 may be notified.

  In the above-described embodiment, when performing the variation effect, the case where the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so that the player cannot visually recognize them is described, but instead of the display of this high-speed variation. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which one first winning opening 64 is provided in the game board 13 to start the special symbol jackpot lottery when a ball is entered, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of one, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started may be provided in the game board 13. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each of the first entrances indicates which of the first entrances has been held. Information may be included. Further, when the fluctuation starts, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 may include information indicating which of the first entrances the fluctuation effect is held. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entered indicated by the reserved ball number command. When the number of holding balls for the mouth is set to the number of holding balls and the variation pattern command is received, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 performs the main control of the reserved ball number command each time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). The case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c in the main controller 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load on the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the first winning hole 64 and the passage of the through gate 66 or 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of balls to be variably displayed based on winning in the first winning opening 64 is a numeral in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of balls to be reserved. A mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and it is not limited to the vertical direction. The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or in a variety of different motion displays or changed displays. It also includes display effects that are displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot several times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In addition, in this control example, the normal gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability as the gaming state and the probability variation gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability can be set, and the ordinary symbol is more likely to hit. Although a pachinko machine that can set a time saving state that is a gaming state and a normal state in which a normal symbol is harder to hit than the time saving state is used, the pachinko machine having other gaming states may be implemented. For example, when the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a probability fluctuation state, if the value of the specific first random number counter C1 is acquired, it is advantageous for the player even if the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is incorrect. The second probability variation game state in which the state (so-called small hit) is set with a higher probability than usual may be settable. In addition, the small hit is a state in which the ball can be won in the variable winning a prize device 65 within a predetermined condition range, although the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is won.

  With such a configuration, the player who has entered the probability variation game state will play the game aiming at the second probability variation game state, which is a more advantageous state for the player, and may get tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the case where the second probability variation game state can be set, a limit (for example, 100 times) is set to the number of times of determination of the special symbols executed during the probability variation game state, and when the number of times of determination is exceeded. May be configured to shift from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state. By configuring in this way, the probability variation game state does not continue until the next big hit if it becomes the probability variation game state as in the past, so even if it is during the probability variation game state, concentrate on the player. A game can be played.

  In this way, when the second probability variation game state is set on a pachinko machine or the like in which the number of times of winning / decision determination is limited to the special symbol in the probability variation game state, the second probability variation game state is set, and the player obtains more balls during the second probability variation game state. You will be aware of big hits and small hits. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on playing the game, and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Further, when using a game machine that can set the second probability variation game state, it is good to provide a plurality of third symbol display devices and switch the device for performing variable display of the third symbol according to the game state. By doing so, it is possible to inform the surrounding players that the player is playing the game in the most favorable game state such as the second probability variation game state, and the player can be satisfied. Can be provided.

  As the plurality of third symbol display devices, the third symbol display device 81 used in this control example, and a reel member (the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body) provided in the rotating body lifting unit 300. It is advisable to use a member for synthesizing and displaying the third symbol by the outer peripheral surface of 340b and variably displaying a plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body. With such a configuration, the variable display of the third symbol can be displayed in different modes such as the display on the liquid crystal and the rotation display by the reel member, and the difference in appearance can be clarified.

  In addition, by raising and lowering control of the rotating body raising and lowering unit 300, the rotating body raising and lowering unit 300 is moved to an exposure position (a position that covers at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device) visible to the player, or the player moves Since it can be moved to a storage position that is difficult to visually recognize (a position that is stored inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)), for example, the variable display of the third symbol in the second probability variation gaming state is reeled. By being configured to be performed by the members, it is possible to let the surroundings know that the rotating body elevating unit 300 is located at the exposed position and play the game in the second probability variation gaming state, and the player is satisfied. It can provide a feeling.

  Further, as the raising / lowering control of the rotating body raising / lowering unit 300, by performing an operation in which the rotating body raising / lowering unit 300 moves back and forth between the stored position and the exposed position, an effect that suggests the current game state to the player is provided. Since it can be performed, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the second probability variation game state, the variable display indicating whether or not the special symbol hit determination result is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol hit determination result in the reel member is a small hit. The variable display indicating whether or not each may be executed. With this configuration, for example, the player pays attention to the reel member in which the variable display indicating whether or not it is a small hit in the first half period of the second probability variation game state is performed, and the latter half of the second probability variation game state. Attention will be paid to the third symbol display device 81 in which a variable display suggesting whether or not it is a big hit is performed when the period comes. As a result, the player can easily confirm the determination result of the desired special symbol.

  In addition, using a different display device, the variable display that indicates whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit and the variable display that indicates whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit When displaying at the same time, either one may be displayed as the third symbol and the other may be displayed as the decorative symbol. Further, instead of the variable display of symbols, a story effect such as whether or not a given mission can be achieved, or an effect using only a sound or a lamp, or the like, may be used to suggest the result of win / fail judgment. Further, the display device that is variably displayed may be switched based on the determination result of the special symbol.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variation display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and finally displayed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls that are dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<About the concept of the invention with the left and right sensor device 600 as an example>
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmissive transparent plate disposed at a front side of the game board with a space through which a game medium can pass, and a rear side of the game board. Displaceable member that is arranged so that it can be seen by the player through the opening of the game board, and a sensor device that detects an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening of the game board. In the gaming machine described above, the displacing member is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of a detection area of the sensor device.

  Here, for example, an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light toward the front of the game board (a plate glass of the front frame) and a light receiving unit that receives the light reflected from the object is provided, and the optical sensor of the player is used. A device that detects the presence or movement of a finger is known (for example, JP 2010-094348 A). In this case, the path of the light of the optical sensor (irradiation light and reflected light) is set so as not to overlap the moving region of the displaceable member (for example, paragraph 0045 of JP 2010-094348 A). And Fig. 5). Therefore, there is a problem that the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and the displacement member cannot be effectively utilized.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area of the sensor device, so that the displacement of the displacement member affects the detection area of the sensor device. You can That is, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, whereby the displacement member can be utilized.

  The sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, and for example, an optical sensor device (irradiating means for irradiating light composed of visible light or invisible light and an object (object) irradiated from the irradiating means). And a light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by (1) to evaluate the received light). As an evaluation method of the received light, a triangulation method for converting the image forming position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence or absence (distance) of the object, or the time required from the irradiation of the light to the reception of the light An example is a time-of-flight formula that converts the value into the presence or absence (distance) of the object.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the displacement member has a detection area of the first sensor and a detection area of the second sensor. A gaming machine A2, which is capable of being displaced to a position that divides.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the displacement member can be displaced to a position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor. The two areas can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the operation of causing the player to select one of the two detection areas.

  On the other hand, by retracting the displacement member from the position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, the division of these two detection areas by the displacement member can be released. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, a detection area detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can be displaced in a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor, and the displacement of the displacement member causes the first sensor to move. The game machine A3 is characterized in that the size of at least one of the detection area of the second sensor and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can displace a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor. With the displacement of the displacement member, the size of at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor can be changed. Thereby, for example, when the player performs an operation of detecting his or her hand or finger, the player can search the detection area.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at the predetermined position. That is, the sensor device can serve as both the means for detecting the object on the front side of the transparent plate and the means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member, and there is no need to separately provide means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. .. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a light emitting unit is provided that is capable of emitting light, and the displacement member is displaceable to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting unit from entering the sensor device. A gaming machine A5 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided, it is possible to perform an effect by the light emission of the light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be suppressed from being received by the sensor device. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4. Further, since the member for blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device can be used also as the displacement member, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be retracted from the shielding position and a space can be secured, so that the space can be used as a space for displacement of another displacement member. it can.

  In the gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged at different positions, and the displacement member causes the light emission from the light emitting means to enter the sensor device according to the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means. The game machine A6, wherein the displacement member is displaceable to a position where it can be shielded.

  According to the gaming machine A6, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means to emit light among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device in accordance with the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means. It is possible to suppress light from being received by the. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5. Further, in the case of providing a fixed member capable of shielding the light emitted from any one of the plurality of light emitting means from entering the sensor device, a large space is required for disposing such a member. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for another displacement member to be displaced.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, a second displacing member is provided which is displaceably arranged on the back side of the game board and is visible through an opening of the game board, and the light emitting means is arranged, The displacing member is configured such that the displacing member can be displaced to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device according to the displacing position of the second displacing member. Playing machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, since the light emitting means is arranged on the second displaceable member which is displaceably formed, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light at a different position according to the displacement of the second displaceable member. .. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device according to the displaced position of the second displacement member. It is possible to suppress light from being received by the. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, when a fixed member capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large space is required for disposing the member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for another displacement member to be displaced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor which are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, and the sensor device emits light from one of the first sensor and the second sensor. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive light reflected by dirt on the transparent plate.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor that are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, and the first sensor or the second sensor. Since the light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive the light, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to see. At the same time, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of stains on the transparent plate (for example, oil on the player's hand).

  For example, in a configuration in which one sensor device is arranged at a position deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the game board and the light emitted from the sensor device is obliquely applied to the transparent plate, the sensor device is seen from the front. Can be made less visible to the player, and an object existing on the front side of the transparent plate (for example, the player's hand or finger) can be detected. However, since the incident angle of the light emitted from the sensor device with respect to the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the dirt of the transparent plate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, for example, by arranging the first sensor and the second sensor at positions deeper in the width direction than the edges of the opening across the opening of the gaming board, It can be made hard to see by the player. In this case, when the light emitted from one of the first sensor and the second sensor is reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor and the second sensor, and the dirt on the transparent plate is received. When there is no light, the light emitted from one of the first sensor and the second sensor passes through the transparent plate and is not received by the other of the first sensor and the second sensor. This makes it possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate.

  It should be noted that the detection of the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate by the first sensor and the second sensor is preferably performed in a process when the power of the game machine is turned on. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, since the player is not in the store, it is not necessary to distinguish between the object (player's hand or finger) on the front side of the transparent plate and the stain on the transparent plate. This is because it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the emitted light on a surface on which the light emitted from the sensor device is emitted. Playing machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the emitted light on the surface on which the light emitted from the sensor device is emitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control load can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a part of the displacement member to which the light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated is formed of a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light. Aircraft A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed of a material through which the emitted light from the sensor device is radiated. It is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control load can be suppressed.

  Further, since the above-mentioned portion of the displacement member is formed of a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device is transmitted, and the transmitted light is transmitted to the object on the front side of the transparent plate. In addition to being able to irradiate, the light reflected by the object can be transmitted, and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. Accordingly, the displacement member can be displaced while ensuring the detection area of the sensor device.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member has a reflecting surface formed on a surface irradiated with light emitted from the sensor device, the reflective surface reflecting the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device. A gaming machine A11 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is a reflection that reflects the emitted light in a direction different from that of the sensor device, on the surface on which the light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated. Since the surface is formed, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control load can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention with the central floating unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displaceable displacement member, a first member displaceably disposed on the displaceable member, and drive means for applying a driving force to the displaceable member, the displaceable member A gaming machine B1 comprising a pair of arm members which are displaceable independently of each other, and the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  Here, it is known that a displaceable displaceable member is provided and an effect is produced by displacement of the displaceable member. Further, there is also one in which a first member is further provided on the front surface of the displacement member and the effect is enhanced by rotating the first member (for example, JP 2012-105873 A). However, in the above-mentioned thing, there was a problem that the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and the first member rotates, and the change of the movement of the first member is poor.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the displacement member is provided with a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and one end of the pair of arm members is connected to the first member, the pair of arm members are separated from each other. By displacing independently, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  Further, since the displacement member is connected to the arm member so as to be relatively displaceable, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member and both are displaced by independent displacement, or when the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the displacement of the first member is continued. This can be done, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  The displacement of the arm member may be, for example, a rotation about the other end side, a slide displacement at the other end side, or a combination of these (one of the arm members rotates and the other slide displacement). , Each adopted form) and the like.

  As a mode in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, a shaft provided in one of the arm member and the first member is provided in a shaft hole provided in the other. A configuration in which the supported shaft is relatively displaceable by rotating the shaft with respect to the shaft hole, and a pin provided on one of the arm member and the first member slides along a slide groove provided on the other. In which the arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member and the elastic member is elastically deformed to be relatively displaceable, and the arm member and the first member are disposed on one of the arm member and the first member. A spherical ball provided on the other side is relatively displaceable by rotating in an arbitrary direction with respect to a stud that is in spherical contact with the ball. The arm member and the first member have one or a plurality of link mechanisms (not deformed). Seki where knots are moving parts Form that allows relative displacement by coupled linkage via a connected system) is deformed, and the form of a combination of each of these embodiments are illustrated by.

  In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is relatively displaceable, and are driven by the driving force given by the driving means. A gaming machine B2, which is rotated about the other end.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at one end opposite to the one end at which the first member is disposed so as to be driven. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate loci whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that is a combination of the linear motion and the rotary motion, and it is possible to change the motion.

  The pair of arm members may have the same distance from one end to the other end, or may have different lengths.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, one of the arm member and the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member and the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is provided, and the sliding groove has at least one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is arranged at the reference position. A game machine B3 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin portion, and at least the arm member is at the reference position in the sliding groove. In the arranged state, a gap is formed between one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove and the pin portion, so that even if the arm member is stopped, the first member is equal to the gap. It is possible to allow relative displacement with respect to the arm member. Thereby, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at the reference position, the inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member, so that the pin portion is directed toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. A reciprocating displacement can be formed. As a result, the first member can be reciprocated (swinged) after the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

  In the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and a pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and the pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the arm member is prevented. After being stopped at the reference position, when the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member by the amount of the gap between the one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion, A rotational component can be added to the relative displacement. Thereby, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a linear shape, the pin portion can be slid smoothly along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. It is possible to suppress the load on the drive means.

  In the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially V-shape, the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C-shape, so after the reciprocating motion of the first member converges and stops, the gaming machine B5 enters the stopped state. The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, the first member retracted to the retracted position can be prevented from rattling due to disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is displaceably arranged, and are driven by the driving force given by the driving means. The sliding groove is rotated about the other end, the sliding groove is linearly formed, and is arranged at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is arranged on the first member. Amusement machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is relatively displaceable and driven. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate loci whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that is a combination of the linear motion and the rotary motion, and it is possible to change the motion.

  In this case, since the sliding groove is formed linearly and is arranged at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is arranged on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove (( The inclination direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially V shape or can be arranged in a straight line. Accordingly, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocally moved by the action of inertial force, when the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially V shape, While allowing a rotational component to be added to the motion, the reciprocating motion can be quickly converged toward the center of the V-shape, and when the sliding groove is arranged in a straight line, The movement can be limited to the linear component.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a linear shape, the pin portion can be slid smoothly along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. It is possible to suppress the load on the drive means.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between the one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion allows the movement of the first member by the action of gravity. A gaming machine B7, which is arranged in the direction of.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between the one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion is the first member due to the action of gravity. Is arranged in a direction in which the movement of the arm member is allowed, the movement of the first member can be a movement that follows the displacement of the arm member, and a movement that does not follow the displacement of the arm member and that falls freely due to the action of gravity. .. Thereby, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is connected, a driven portion displaceably arranged in the main body portion, and a driven portion thereof. A game machine B8, characterized in that the game machine B8 is provided with a second drive means for applying a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member is a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is connected, and a driven portion displaceably disposed in the main body portion. Since the driven unit is provided with the second driving unit that applies the driving force, it is possible to perform an effect of relatively displacing the driven unit with respect to the main body unit by the driving force of the second driving unit. In this case, a reaction force caused by the displacement of the driven portion is applied to the main body portion, so that the reaction force may form a displacement that causes the pin portion to reciprocate toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. it can. As a result, the main body portion (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocating) while the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

  In the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion, and is rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion and is rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means. When the displacement of the member is stopped and the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit is applied to the main body to displace the main body, it is possible to easily generate a rotational component in the movement of the main body.

  Examples of the shape of the driven portion include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, and an elongated shape. In this case, the driven part may have its center of gravity position decentered from the center of rotation (the position pivotally supported by the main body). As a result, the reaction force associated with the rotation of the drive unit can be increased and the variation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle can be increased to change the movement of the main body.

  In the gaming machine B9, the center of rotation of the driven portion is located between the pair of pin portions, the gaming machine B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven portion is located between the pair of pin portions, so that the reaction force due to the rotation of the driving portion causes the rotation of the main body portion. It can be easily connected to movement.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the gaming machine B11 is provided with a second displacing member that is displaceably formed, and the second displacing member is formed so as to be capable of contacting the first member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B10, a second displacing member that is displaceable is provided, and the second displacing member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member. By such contact, both the movement of the first member can be regulated and the movement of the first member can be changed. For example, when the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first member, whereby the first member is displaced (reciprocating) by the inertial force generated with the stop of the arm member. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, while the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member, and the first member is bounced off, whereby the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member. It is possible to form a mode in which the first member is displaced and a mode in which the first member is displaced while being integrated with the second displacement member.

  Further, when the first member includes the main body portion and the driven portion, the second displacement member is brought into contact with the main body portion to displace only the driven portion while maintaining the main body portion in the stopped state. Can be made That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the main body part is displaced together with the driven part by a reaction force associated with the displacement of the driven part and a mode in which only the driven part is displaced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, a second displacing member that is displaceably formed is provided, and a magnet is disposed in one of the first member and the second displacing member, and the first member or the first displacing member is provided. A magnet or an iron member is disposed on the other of the two displacement members, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member. A gaming machine B12 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the gaming machine B12 is provided with a second displacement member that is displaceable, and is disposed on one of the first member and the second displacement member. Since a magnetic force acts between the magnet and the magnet or the iron member arranged on the other of the first member or the second displacement member, the action of the magnetic force regulates the movement of the first member, or The first member can be displaced. For example, after the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the second displacement member is moved closer to or separated from the first member, whereby the first member can be displaced (reciprocating) by the action of the magnetic force. Since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of the magnetic force, it is not necessary to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other, and both can be brought into non-contact with each other, so that damage can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention with the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as an example>
C1. Driving means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and first and second rotating bodies that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. In a gaming machine including at least, and allowing a player to visually recognize the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body, the transmission means includes a rotating state of the first rotating body and a rotating state of the second rotating body. The gaming machine C1 is formed so that the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so as to differ from each other.

  Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to be drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the drawn figure and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). In this case, the first rotary body is driven to rotate independently by the first drive motor (driving means) and the second rotary body is driven to rotate independently of the second drive motor, and the figure of the first rotary body visually recognized by the player. The combination of and the figure of the second rotating body can be changed. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine requires the same number of drive motors as the rotating body, which causes a problem of increased cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means applies the driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the first rotating body and the rotating state of the second rotating body are different from each other. Therefore, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed even with one driving means. That is, the required number of driving means can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The different rotation states of the one rotating body and the other rotating body include, for example, a state in which the rotating speeds of one rotating body and the other rotating body are different, and one rotating body is rotated while the other rotating body is rotated. The state in which the rotating body is stopped is illustrated. The rotation speed does not have to be constant and may be increased or decreased.

  As the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotating body, for example, letters, patterns, colors, patterns, or a combination thereof is exemplified. In this case, the graphic may be a part of a character or a pattern (which is combined with another graphic to form one character or a pattern), or all (only the graphic forms one character or a pattern). Stuff).

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. The rotation cycle and the rotation cycle of the second rotating body can be different. Therefore, even with one driving means, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed.

  Further, since the transmission means has a configuration in which the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the drive means to the first rotary body and the second rotary body is different, the structure of the transmission means can be simplified.

  Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism that transmits rotation by meshing (gear transmission mechanism or chain transmission mechanism) and a mechanism that transmits rotation by friction (friction transmission mechanism or belt transmission mechanism). Gear transmissions include spur gears, worms and worms, bevel gears, or racks and pinions, chain transmissions include chains and sprockets, friction transmissions include friction gears, and belt transmissions. , A pulley and a belt are exemplified.

  In this case, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by the above-described meshing between the rotation shaft of the first rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means and between the rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and the rotation shaft of one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is directly connected to the drive shaft of the driving means, The mechanism for transmitting rotation by the above-mentioned meshing or the mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be arranged between the other rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the drive means. In the latter case, it is possible to reduce the number of parts (gear etc.) for forming the mechanism for transmitting the rotation, and correspondingly reduce the cost.

  In the gaming machine C2, the first rotary body and the second rotary body are in a state in which the phase of the other is deviated from the phase of the other at the visual recognition position at which the player can visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being stopped at.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear, and it is necessary to make a desired combination of figures appear. The number of rotations can be suppressed and it can be made to appear in a short time.

  That is, when stopping the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the visual recognition position for allowing the player to visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface, if the phases of both the rotary bodies are requested to match, the combination is made. As the number of possible graphics decreases, the number of rotations required to bring out the desired combination of graphics increases (the table lengthens). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position, one phase of the two rotating bodies is shifted from the other phase. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear, and to suppress the number of rotations required to make a desired combination of figures be made to appear in a short time. it can.

  In this case, at least a part or all of the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are curved in an arc shape protruding outward in a cross-sectional view orthogonal to the rotation axis. Is preferred. This is because even if there is a phase shift between the first rotary body and the second rotary body stopped at the visual recognition position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission means includes first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and second transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear. A gaming machine C4 comprising: a meshing region for transmitting rotation and a non-meshing region for blocking transmission of rotation by setting the meshing of the other gear as a non-meshing.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and second transmission for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means comprises at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, one gear of which is geared with the other gear to transmit rotation and the other of which Since the non-meshing region that blocks the transmission of rotation by making the meshing with the gear non-mesh, the state in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped and the other is rotated, and the first rotating body A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated can be formed. Therefore, even with one driving means, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed.

  Further, as described above, the transmission means can rotate the other of the first rotary body and the second rotary body while stopping the rotation of one of them and canceling the stop to restart the rotation. It is possible to enhance the expectation of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figure of the rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body.

  Both of the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshing region and a non-meshing region. And may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to form a state in which both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state in which both of them stop, a state in which one stops and the other rotates, and a state in which one rotates and the other stops. ..

  In the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-meshing region, and the formation range of the non-meshing region is the first rotating body or A gaming machine C5, which is set in correspondence with an interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is provided with the gear having the meshing area and the non-meshing area, so that the driving means is driven. In the state in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is switched between rotation and stop, the other is kept rotating. In this case, the formation range of the non-meshing region is set in correspondence with the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. It is possible to shorten the length of a table having a combination with the figure of the second rotating body as an element. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body required to bring out a desired combination of figures. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required to bring out a desired combination of figures.

  It should be noted that that the formation range of the non-meshing region is set corresponding to the intervals of the plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface means that one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is defined by the non-meshing region. It means that the other is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval of n figures (n is an integer including 1) while being stopped. Particularly, it is preferable to set n = 1. This is because the length of the above-mentioned table can be minimized to minimize the number of rotations required to bring out a desired combination of figures.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the transmission means is a forward transmission means for transmitting rotation of the drive means in the forward direction to the first rotary body and the second rotary body, and a forward direction of the drive means. And a reverse transmission means for transmitting a rotation in the opposite direction to the first rotation body and the second rotation body, and the positive rotation of the drive means when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction. The transmission to the direction transmission means is permitted, the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is blocked, and when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation of the drive means is transmitted to the forward direction transmission means. A game machine C6, which is provided with a switching means that cuts off and permits transmission to the reverse transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in the effect that any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5 has, when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the switching means transmits the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means. When the transmission is allowed and the transmission to the reverse transmission means is blocked, and the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the switching means blocks the transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward transmission means. Since the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is permitted, the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation visually recognized by the player depending on whether the driving means is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction. The type of combination with the figure of the body can be different. That is, there are two types of tables having elements of the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body, and by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, it is possible to arbitrarily select the two types of tables. can do.

  As the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means, the first structure described in the gaming machine C2 or C3 (structure in which the rotation ratio between the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different), the gaming machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by the non-meshing region), and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are synchronously rotated at the same speed. It can be arbitrarily selected from the three structures.

  For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse transmission means is illustrated. Also, the same structure may be selected for the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means. For example, a case where the first structure is selected or a case where the second structure is selected as the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means is exemplified. In the former case, the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means have different rotation ratios, and in the latter case, the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means have a meshing region and a non-meshing region. The formation ratios of the are different. Also by this, there are two types of tables having elements of the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body, and the two kinds of tables are arbitrarily selected by changing the rotation direction of the driving means. It can be possible.

  Further, the rotation directions of the first rotary body and the second rotary body when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation directions of the first rotary body and the second rotary body when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction. And may be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, it is preferable that the directions are the same. This is because it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the rotation direction of the drive means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the light emitting means is provided inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the outer periphery of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine C7, wherein at least a part of the surface is formed of a light transmissive material.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light-transmissive material. The player can visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means arranged inside at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  The light emitted by the light emitting means may be constantly emitted or may be emitted under predetermined conditions. The predetermined condition is, for example, when the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body form a specific combination, or when one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped, the stop thereof. When the rotation is restarted before or after is executed, etc. are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C7, the front surface is formed in a box shape, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided through the open portion of the front surface. A gaming machine C8, which is provided with a container for allowing a player to visually recognize the figure drawn in FIG.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine C7, the front surface is formed in a box shape, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated and the first rotation is performed through the open portion of the front surface. Since the container that allows the player to visually recognize the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the body and the second rotating body is provided, the player can visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means by using the container. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means in a different mode from the case of directly visually recognizing the light emission. For example, a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the inner wall surface of the housing to be visually recognized by the player, and the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall of the housing to irradiate a predetermined object Examples include a mode in which the player visually recognizes the object together with a predetermined object, a mode in which light emitted from the light emitting means is made incident on the wall portion of the housing to cause a predetermined portion of the housing (for example, the front end face) to emit light. It

  In each of the above aspects, for example, a specific figure among a plurality of figures drawn on at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is a rear side of the first rotating body or the second rotating body (that is, It is preferably executed when the player is placed in a position invisible to the player). A specific figure arranged at a position invisible to the player is reminded to the player by the light emission of the light emitting means (the first rotating body or the second rotating body is arranged so that the specific figure becomes visible). This is because it can be expected to be rotated). Particularly, the light emission of the light emitting means is preferably executed in a state where at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C8, a housing in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are housed, and a production position and a game in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be visually recognized by the player. A gaming machine C9, comprising: a moving unit that moves between a retracted position and a person who cannot see it.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are used by the player to store the first rotating body and the second rotating body. Since a moving means for moving between a production position visible from the player and a retracted position invisible to the player is provided, a desired combination of the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be selected. It can be made to appear promptly at the necessary timing.

  That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a relatively large amount in order to bring out a desired combination, and when the time is long, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated by the moving means. Since the body can be moved to the retracted position invisible to the player, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated to a predetermined rotating position in advance at the retracted position. When the required timing comes, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be moved to the effect position by the moving means, and the desired combination can be promptly revealed.

  In the gaming machine C9, an operating means for executing a predetermined operation is provided, and the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the operating means is arranged and disposed in the retracted position. Characteristic game machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the retreat position is arranged and the operating means is operated, so the first rotation is performed. When the body and the second rotating body are rotated in advance in the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the rotation from being recognized by the player.

  That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, a comparatively loud sound is generated, so even if the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved to the retreat position and become invisible to the player, A player may recognize the rotation by the sound generated by the rotation of the second rotating body. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, the rotation of the first rotating body and the rotation of the second rotating body can be performed while being reflected in the operation of the operating means, and thus it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation. it can.

  Note that, as the operating means, for example, a payout device, a voice generating device, etc. are exemplified. That is, in the state where the payout device is paying out the game medium, a relatively loud sound is generated along with the payout operation of the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the like. The same applies to the state in which sound is being generated from the sound generating device. Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the predetermined display is performed on the display device, the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be rotated. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the like.

<About the concept of the invention using the LED 344 as an example>
A plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and at least a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is made of a light-transmissive material, a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body, and the rotating body. In a gaming machine comprising a body rotatably housed and allowing a player to visually recognize a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary body through an open portion of the front surface, the rotating body is illuminated by the light emitting means. The game machine D1 is characterized in that the light transmitted from the outer wall is reflected by the container and is visually recognized by the player.

  Here, a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmissive material, and a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body. A gaming machine is known which includes a housing in which a rotating body is rotatably housed and allows a player to visually recognize a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). -220215). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the light of the light emitting means is only visually recognized by the player through the outer wall of the rotating body visually recognized from the open portion of the front surface of the housing. There is a problem that the effect of light is not effectively exerted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the containing body and is visually recognized by the player, so that the light transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is recognized. The player can visually recognize the light in a mode different from the case of directly visually recognizing it, and as a result, the effect effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a transmitting portion that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a light-reflecting material. And a reflecting portion that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inside of the rotating body, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion form an irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body rotates. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being able to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is provided with a transmitting portion for transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and the light emitted from the light emitting means. Since the reflecting portion for reflecting the light inside the rotating body is formed, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion can pass through the irradiation region of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body rotates, the light emitted from the light emitting means is formed. It is possible to form a mode in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmission part to the outside, and a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted to the outside from the transmission part. Can be switched with the rotation of. That is, two light emission forms can be formed by only one light emitting means, and for example, the position of the light visually recognized by the player can be switched to at least two locations without adopting a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure.

  In the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a posture in which light is emitted toward an open portion of the front surface of the container.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in such a posture that the light is emitted toward the open portion of the front surface of the container, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. In the mode in which the light is directly transmitted to the outside from the transmitting portion, the light can be made visible to the player from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open portion of the front surface of the housing, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected. In the mode in which the light is reflected by the part and then transmitted through the transmission part to the outside, the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is made invisible from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located in the open part of the front surface of the container. The player can visually recognize it around the rotating body. As a result, the position where the light is visually recognized can be switched with the rotation of the rotating body, and the position where the light is visually recognized can be significantly different, and as a result, the effect effect of the light can be effectively exhibited. it can.

  The gaming machine D4 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, wherein the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body having a polygonal cross section, so that the appearance of the rotating body is apparent as the rotating body rotates. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the housing is made visible to the player around the rotating body, It is possible to increase or decrease the size of the visually recognized area with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, it is possible to effectively exert the effect effect of light.

  In the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged in parallel with the first rotating body, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively provided. A gaming machine D5, which is formed as a substantially triangular columnar body having a substantially triangular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged in parallel with the first rotating body. Since the rotating body and the second rotating body are each formed as a triangular columnar body having a triangular cross-section, the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body (with the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body ( The facing interval) can be changed. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion, then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the housing is passed through the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When the player visually recognizes the size, the size of the region where the light is visually recognized can be increased or decreased in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided with the reflecting portion on the inner surface of the outer wall that forms one outer surface of the outer surface having the substantially triangular cross section. A game machine D6, wherein the transparent portion is provided on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided on the inner surface of the outer wall forming one outer surface of the outer surface having the substantially triangular cross section. Since the reflection part is provided and the transmission part is provided on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted to the outside from the transmission part. In such a case, light can be transmitted to the outside from two outer surfaces (transmissive portions). Therefore, the light can be reflected at two different locations on the inner wall surface of the container to be visually recognized by the player, or the light transmitted from one of the transmissive portions can be directly perceived by the player and transmitted from the other transmissive portion. The generated light can be reflected on the inner wall surface of the container to be visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D6, the container is formed into a box-shaped body having an open front surface, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is provided with a reflection portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light. A gaming machine D7, which is arranged in a range exceeding the outer shapes of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the container is formed into a box-shaped body with an open front surface, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is made of a material capable of reflecting light. When the reflecting portion to be formed is arranged in a range exceeding the outer shapes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside. In addition, the player is made to visually recognize the light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back surface side of the box-shaped body in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D7, the accommodation body can reflect light on the inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body, the inner wall surface facing in parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that a reflecting portion made of a different material is provided.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the accommodation body is an inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body and faces the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in parallel. Since the inner wall surface is provided with a reflection part made of a material capable of reflecting light, the light reflected on the inner wall surface on the back side of the container is further reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface to be visually recognized by the player. At the same time, the light transmitted from the transmitting portion can be reflected on the inner wall surface of the side surface of the container to be visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

<Feature E group> (AQ mode)
It is possible to dynamically display the identification information on the display means and the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, The identification information is configured to show the determination result of the determination means by displaying a plurality of identification information in combination, and the first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and the first rotating body. A symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the rotating body, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, a first game state and its first The second game that is different from the game state When the first game state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the state and the state setting means, the determination result by the determination means is indicated by the combination of the identification information. When the second game state is set, the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means are switched and set so as to show the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine E1 having a switching setting means.

  Here, in conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, by rotating a rotating body having a plurality of symbols instead of displaying the symbols on a liquid crystal screen, a gaming machine capable of displaying symbols in a combination of a plurality of symbols is provided. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-23040). However, even in this kind of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player is bored because only the game of always rotating the rotating body to display the symbol is performed. The gaming machine E1 is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the determination means for performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information are moved to the display means. Dynamic display means that can be displayed dynamically, and privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, The identification information is configured to indicate the determination result of the determination means by displaying a plurality of identification information in combination, and the first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. And a symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the first rotating body, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a first game state. And its first game state different from the first When the first game state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the game state, the determination result by the determination means is obtained by the combination of the identification information. Shown, when the second gaming state is set, the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means are switched and set so as to show the determination result by the determination means. And a switching setting means for performing the switching. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, there is a variable means for changing the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a visible first position and a second position which is harder to see than the first position. Means, when the first game state is set by the state setting means, the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the second position more than when the second game state is set. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is easy to change and.

  The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1. That is, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be changed to the first position or the second position by the changing means based on the game state.

  As a result, it is possible to assume the game state based on the positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body becomes a specific combination, the display means has a performance executing means for executing a specific performance. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to execute the effect based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the display means. The effects can be associated with the symbol display means and the display means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine includes a drive transmission unit that transmits a driving force that rotates the first rotation and the second rotation body, and the drive transmission unit includes the first rotation body and the second rotation body. A gaming machine E4, characterized in that the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body at different rotation ratios.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to display various display modes on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by transmitting the driving force by the drive transmitting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, an acquisition unit that acquires information determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition unit, and the acquisition unit that acquires the information until at least the determination condition is satisfied. In the case where a storage unit that stores information, a pre-determination unit that performs a determination on the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and the second game state are set , A gaming machine characterized by having a deciding means for deciding a combination of symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body, based on a result of the determination by the preliminary determining means. E5.

  The gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, since the combination of symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is determined based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, the time until the determined combination of symbols is displayed is secured. can do.

  As a result, for example, it is possible to provide the player with an effect by using the time until it is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E5, when the symbol combination determined by the determination means is determined, before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the pre-determination means is started, The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it has a predetermined amount of pre-rotation means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are activated before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the advance determination means is started. Since it is possible to rotate by a predetermined amount, it is possible to reliably display the symbol combination determined by the determining means.

<Characteristic F group> (Volume is displayed during demo)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a determination means for performing the determination, a performance executing means for performing the performance based on the determination result by the determination means, and a sound based on the performance performed by the performance executing means are output. In the gaming machine having the sound output means, the operation means operable by the player, and the volume setting means for setting the volume based on the operation of the operation means, A game machine F1 comprising: a setting unit that effectively sets the operation by the operation unit when a specific period is included in the period in which the effect is executed.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes a sound output device and can set a sound volume of a sound such as a game effect (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-237647). .. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the volume can be set only when the game-based effect is not executed, and an unintended sound volume is output when the game-based effect is executed. There was a problem. The gaming machine F1 is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of playing a game at a volume desired by the player.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the determination means that performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the performance executing means that executes the performance based on the determination result by the determination means, and the performance executing means. A gaming machine having a sound output means for outputting a sound based on the effect, an operation means operable by a player, and a volume setting means for setting a volume based on the operation of the operation means. In the above, there is provided a setting means for effectively setting the operation by the operating means when the effect is being executed by the effect executing means during a specific period. As a result, the volume can be adjusted appropriately. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game at a desired volume.

  In the gaming machine F1, an effect determining unit that determines the content of the effect executed by the effect executing unit, and a specific period setting unit that sets the specific period based on the effect determined by the effect determining unit, A gaming machine F2 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, it is possible to set a specific period based on the contents of the effect, so that the volume can be set within a range that does not interfere with the effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. There is an effect that the damage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the setting means sets an effective period for effectively setting the operation by the operating means when the effect is not executed by the effect executing means for a predetermined period. Machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, it is possible to set the volume even when the production is not executed by the production executing means for a predetermined period, so that the player can set the volume at a desired timing. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the display means displays a display mode in which the effect mode is displayed by the effect executing means, and a setting mode indicating that the specific period is set by the setting means. A setting mode display control means, and a gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the period during which the volume can be set can be displayed on the display means, so that the period during which the player can set the volume can be easily performed. There is an effect that it can be grasped and the player can easily set the volume.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the discrimination information notifying means for notifying the discrimination information indicating the volume set by the volume setting means when the production is not executed by the production executing means for the predetermined period. A gaming machine F5 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed by the effect executing means for a predetermined time, the set volume can be discriminated. It is possible to easily determine whether the volume should be changed.

  Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5 has a prohibition unit that prohibits the operation unit from being effectively set by the setting unit based on the determination result being determined by the determination unit. A gaming machine F6 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the operating means is prohibited from being effectively set when the specific determination result is determined by the determining means. It is possible to grasp the determination result of the determination means by the operation for setting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result, and the identification information is the specific determination. At least a first symbol indicating a result and a second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the setting mode variably displays the second symbol. A gaming machine F7 characterized by being played.

  The gaming machine F7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6. That is, the effect that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result is executed by the effect executing means, and at least the first symbol indicating the specific determination result and the specific determination result are different determination results. Of the identification information composed of the second symbol indicating, the second symbol is variably displayed in the setting mode.

  Thereby, the second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result can be used for setting the volume. Therefore, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means can be effectively used.

  One of the gaming machines F4 to F7 has a brightness varying means for varying the brightness of the display means based on the operation of the operating means when the specific period is set. Gaming machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the luminance of the display means is changed by the luminance changing means based on the operation of the operating means when a specific period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game at the brightness desired by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, an acquisition unit that acquires information used to determine the determination condition based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and an acquisition unit that acquires the information until at least the determination condition is satisfied. A storage unit that stores the information, a pre-determination unit that determines the information stored by the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined condition based on the determination result by the pre-determination unit. And a setting unit that determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination unit, and the setting unit determines the information that has been determined by the preliminary determination unit for at least the specific period. A gaming machine F9, characterized in that the operation of the operating means is effectively set until the effect corresponding to is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effect is achieved. That is, the information used for the determination of the determination unit is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition. The storage means stores the acquired information at least until the determination condition is satisfied. The stored information is judged by the preliminary judgment means before the judgment condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the advance determination means, the determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation of the operation unit is effectively set by the setting unit until the effect corresponding to the information determined by the advance determination unit is executed.

  Accordingly, the period from the determination of the information by the pre-determination means to the execution of the effect corresponding to the information can be set as the period in which the volume can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can set a desired volume corresponding to the effect based on the determination result of the advance determination means.

<Characteristic G group> (Fish group customization setting)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a determination means for performing determination, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. In the gaming machine having the dynamic display means and the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed, by the operation of the player, An operation unit capable of inputting game information, a storage unit capable of storing the game information input by the operation unit, and the determination unit by the determination unit during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Prior display means for displaying the prior information based on the determination result on the display means, and prior information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the prior display means based on the determination result. Setting means for setting the ratio of the specific preliminary information determined by the preliminary information determining means, depending on whether the determination result is a specific determination result or a case other than the specific determination result A gaming machine G1 characterized by further comprising: a proportion determining means for determining the proportion set by the setting means based on the game information stored in the storage means.

  Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine is proposed in which a game lottery is executed and an effect based on the lottery is executed (for example, JP 2010-094348 A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, it is difficult to set the expectation level of the production according to the preference of each player, and it is difficult to provide a game machine that meets the preference of the player. was there. The gaming machine G1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suits the taste of the player.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification displayed on the display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, An operation means capable of inputting game information by a person's operation, a storage means capable of storing the game information input by the operation means, and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, Prior display means for causing the display means to display prior information based on the determination result by the determination means, and prior information determination for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the prior display means based on the determination result And a setting means for setting a probability of determining the specific prior information that can be determined when the determination result is a specific determination result by the prior information determining means. Probability determining means for determining the probability set by the above based on the game information stored in the storing means. As a result, the degree of expectation indicated by the advance information can be changed according to the preference of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that matches the taste of the player.

  In the gaming machine G1, a gaming machine G2 indicating that the specific advance information informs a player of the degree of expectation indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the expectation indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is notified to the player as specific advance information. The effect is that the effect can be set in more detail.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming information input to the player by the operating means is information indicating the degree of expectation, and the gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the game information input to the player by the operating means is the information indicating the degree of expectation, and therefore the game machine G3 is rendered in more detail according to the player's preference. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a counter unit capable of repeatedly updating the counter value within a predetermined range, and an acquisition for acquiring the counter value counted by the counter unit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Means for determining whether the determination result is a determination result that is a specific determination result or a determination result that is other than the specific determination result. If a value is set, and the a priori information determining unit is any of the determination values set in the specific prior information, the counter value acquired by the acquiring unit is the specific prior information. A gaming machine G4 characterized by determining the

  The gaming machine G4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the counter means repeatedly updates the counter value within a predetermined range. The acquisition unit acquires the counter value counted by the counter unit based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The specific prior information is acquired by the acquisition unit when the determination result is a specific determination result and when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. When the counter value is one of the determination values set in the specific prior information, the specific prior information is determined. This has the effect of simplifying the control.

  In the gaming machine G4, the ratio setting means sets a range of the determination value to be set based on the gaming information, the gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, the range of the judgment value is set by the ratio setting means based on the game information, so that the judgment value can be set more easily.

<Characteristic H group> (Control for dividing the area of the touch detection position)
A performance executing means for executing a performance, a detecting means capable of non-contactly detecting an operation operation of a player, and a specific performance by the effect executing means when the operation motion is detected by the detecting means. In a gaming machine having a production varying means for executing the above, the detecting means includes a first detection area capable of detecting the operation motion and a second detection including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. A variable member that has at least a region and is variable between a prohibited position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region and a permitted position that permits the formation of the shared detection region, and Variable control means for variably controlling the variable member between the prohibited position and the permitted position, and a judgment means for judging in which of the first detection area and the second detection area the detection means has detected. However, when the variable member is changed to the prohibited position, the effect changing unit detects the determination result detected by one of the first detection region and the second detection region by the determination unit. Based on the above, the gaming machine H1 is adapted to be changed to the corresponding specific effects.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start opening into which the game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening. The game lottery is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As a means for changing the effect by the player's operation, a touch sensor that allows the player to input with a finger or the like is arranged, and the player performs a touch operation to switch and execute the effect or the like. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-219617). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, a further suitable game using an input means such as a touch sensor has been demanded. An object is to provide a suitable game machine.

  According to the gaming machine H1, an effect executing means for executing an effect, a detecting means capable of detecting a player, and a specific effect by the effect executing means when an operation is detected by the detecting means. And a second detection area including a first detection area capable of detecting the player and a shared detection area which is a part of the first detection area. However, a variable member that can be changed between a prohibited position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region and a permitted position that allows the shared detection region to be formed, and the variable member that prohibits the variable member. The effect variable control means has a variable control means for variably controlling the position and the permission position, and a discrimination means for discriminating which of the first area and the second detection area the detection means has detected. Means are forbidden If it is variable in position on the basis of the discrimination result by the discriminating means, but for varying the specific effect that the corresponding.

  As a result, since the variable member prohibits the shared detection region from being formed, the region detected by the detection unit can be changed by the operation of the variable member, and the detection unit can be used functionally. .. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable game machine can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H1, there is a display means capable of displaying a performance mode as the effect, the variable member is arranged so as to be variable on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the detection means is The gaming machine H2, characterized in that it has the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, since the variable member is variable on the front side of the display means, the player can be informed of the detection area at the position of the variable member, which is easier to understand. A game can be played. Further, there is an effect that the player can select an effect displayed on the display means and various effects can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H2, the effect execution means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area when the variable member is at the permission position, and when the variable member is at the prohibited position. The game machine H3, wherein the second effect is displayed at positions corresponding to the first detection area and the second detection area, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, the first effect is displayed in the shared detection area when in the permitted position, and the first detection area and the second detection area when in the prohibited position. Since the second effect is displayed in each, the player can be informed of the effective detection area in an easy-to-understand manner, and the effect combined with the effect displayed on the display means can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second effect is a selection display mode that allows the player to select one of the display mode displayed in the first detection area and the display mode displayed in the second detection area. A gaming machine H4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, the player can perform a selection operation in the selection display mode, and the player can participate in the game more and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means includes at least first detection means for setting a first detection area and second detection means for setting the second detection area. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detecting means includes a first detecting means for setting a first detecting area and a second detecting means for setting a second detecting area. Since it has at least, it is possible to independently detect the first detection region and the second detection region.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the detection means is an output section capable of outputting infrared rays to the first detection area and the second detection area, and the infrared ray output from the output section is a target. A gaming machine H6, which has at least a detection unit capable of detecting infrared rays reflected by an object.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first detection area and the second detection area are detected by the infrared rays, so that the variable means is erroneously detected. This has the effect of suppressing such problems.

<Characteristic I group> (Increasing the sway width of the swaying character, suppression control)
A swinging member configured to swing, swinging means for moving the swinging member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and swinging the swinging member; State determination means capable of determining which of the first direction and the second direction the member is operating, and a swing for controlling the swing means based on the determination result by the state determination means. A game machine I1 having a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start opening into which the game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening. The game lottery is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In the production showing the lottery result lottery, a game machine has been proposed in which a movable accessory provided on the game board is moved to perform a notice production that informs the player in advance of information regarding the result of winning / decision determination (for example, , JP 2010-094348 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there are restrictions on the size of the game board surface, usable electric power, etc., and the number of movable means such as a motor for moving the movable accessory is limited, and the game machine can be moved. There is a problem in that there are restrictions on movements and the like, and there is a limit to the production, which reduces the interest in the game. The present gaming machine has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an increased interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the swinging member configured to be swingable, and the swinging member that is operated to swing in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction with respect to the effect member. Means, state determining means capable of determining which of the first direction and the second direction the swinging member is operating, and the swinging operation based on the determination result by the state determining means. Swing control means for controlling the means.

  This makes it possible to easily control the swing of the swing member. Therefore, there is an effect that the game control processing can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine I1, state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the swing member is swung and a second state in which swing of the swing member is suppressed, and the state setting means for setting the first state. A means for controlling the rocking means by the rocking control means so as to move the rocking member in the same direction as the direction discriminated by the state discrimination means based on the setting of one state. A gaming machine I2 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, when the first state for swinging the swinging member is set by the state setting means, the direction is the same as the direction determined by the state determining means. Since the rocking member is controlled by the rocking control means to operate the rocking member, there is an effect that the rocking of the rocking member can be continued.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the swinging member includes a displaceable displacement member and a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable to the displacement member, and the displacement member is displaced independently of each other. A gaming machine I3 comprising a pair of possible arm members, and the first member is coupled to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement is relatively displaced by the first member and the displacement member, so that the displacement width of the swinging member can be further increased, and the effect is dynamically produced. The effect is that it can be done.

  In the gaming machine I3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the swinging means. The gaming machine I4, which is rotated about the other end by the.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I3, the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable is rotatably supported and imparted from the swinging means. Since the pair of arm members are rotated around the other end by the driving force, the swinging can be continuously performed, and the effect can be made longer.

  In the gaming machine I3 or I4, one of the arm member and the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member and the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is provided, and the sliding groove has at least one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is arranged at the reference position. A game machine I5 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I3 or I4, a sliding groove is provided in one of the arm member or the first member, and the other of the arm member or the first member slides. A pin portion that is slidably formed along the groove is provided, and the sliding groove is at least one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove when the arm member is arranged at the reference position. Since a gap is formed between the pin portion and the pin portion, it is possible to reduce friction when swinging and suppress damping of swinging.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state determination means has an acceleration sensor arranged on the swing member, and determines the state of the swing member based on information output from the acceleration sensor. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine I6, the state of the swinging member is determined by the state determining means based on the information output from the acceleration sensor arranged on the swinging member, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5. Therefore, there is an effect that the swing control can be executed according to the state of the swing member.

<Characteristic J group> (Pre-rotation control of rotating reel)
Driving means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and first and second rotating bodies that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. And a combination of effect contents determining means for determining effect contents, and rotation control of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the figure is formed in a combination indicating the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so as to be displayed, and the first rotation body and the second rotation body each have a first position and a first position at which the player can easily see the graphic. The rotation control means is configured to be changeable to a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the figure, and the rotation control means displays the combination of the figures indicating the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. 2nd place After rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body by a predetermined amount respectively, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively changed to the first position. A gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start opening into which the game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening. The game lottery is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As a presentation showing a lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols are rotated a plurality of times, and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-2004). -160759). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols, the reel rotation time (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is located in the front is determined by the size of the reel, the number of symbols shown, etc.). However, there is a problem in that the time until the lottery result is displayed becomes longer and the interest in the game is reduced. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with an increased interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the driving means, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the transmission means, and the plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface while being rotated. The rotating body and the second rotating body, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively rotationally controlled, and the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. Rotation control means for controlling the rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination shown in, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively the first and the second rotating bodies where the player can easily see the figure. It is configured to be changeable between one position and a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the graphic than the first position, and the rotation control means is a combination of the graphics showing the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. Show In this case, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively moved to the first position. It is variable.

  This allows any figure to be displayed quickly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the waiting time until the graphic is displayed.

  In the gaming machine J1, the rotation control means is configured to control the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. Which of the first direction and the second direction the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated based on the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by having a rotation direction determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are set in the first direction and the second direction based on the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. Since the rotation direction determining means determines which of the two is to be rotated, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently rotated to the position corresponding to the effect, and the rotation time can be shortened. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the rotation of the driving means is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, so that the first rotation is performed. Since the second rotating body can be rotated with respect to the body in different cycles, there is an effect that various combinations of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently displayed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning the prize (or passing through the operating port), there is a condition that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of displaying a symbol by combining a plurality of symbols by rotating a rotating body having a plurality of symbols instead of displaying the symbol on a liquid crystal screen has been proposed.

JP, 2008-23040, A

Nevertheless, even in the pachinko machine of this kind is always not performed only game that displays a rotating body is rotated symbol, interest for games is a problem to decrease.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a display means for displaying a determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition and identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. And a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification information for indicating a specific determination result by the identification information is displayed, which is advantageous to the player. And a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game, and the identification information is configured to show a determination result of the determination means by displaying a plurality of identification information in combination. The gaming machine has a symbol display means having at least a rotating body having a plurality of symbols on its outer peripheral surface, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the rotating body, a first gaming state and a first gaming state thereof. Is a different second game state When the first game state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the above, the determination result by the determination means is notified by a combination of the plurality of identification information. When the second game state is set, the combination of the plurality of identification information displayed on the display means and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, It has a switching setting means for switching and setting so that information about the determination result by the determination means is notified, and each of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means corresponds to one type of the identification information. are set respectively, the rotation control means, the symbol corresponding to the type of the identification information displayed on the display means is controlled to be stopped at a predetermined position Than it is.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and the display means. A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result by the identification information is displayed. A privilege game executing means to be executed, and the identification information is configured to show a determination result of the determining means by displaying a plurality of identification information in combination, and the gaming machine, A symbol display means having at least a rotating body having a plurality of symbols on its outer peripheral surface, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the rotating body, and a second game different from the first game state and its first game state. At least one with state When the first game state is set by the state setting means that can be set and the state setting means, the determination result by the determination means is notified by a combination of the plurality of identification information. Yes, when the second game state is set, the determination by the determination means by the combination of the plurality of identification information displayed on the display means and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means It has a switching setting means for switching and setting so that information about the result is notified, and each of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means is set corresponding to one type of the identification information. The rotation control means controls the symbol corresponding to the type of the identification information displayed on the display means to be stopped at a predetermined position . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotating body lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotating body lifting unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rotating body lifting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a central unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a container. 18A is a side view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18A. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 1st rotating body. It is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a central floating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central floating unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a central floating unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st member. It is a front view of a horizontal rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right-and-left rotation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a right-and-left rotation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of the central floating unit arrange | positioned at the descent position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of the central floating unit arrange | positioned at the descent position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit. (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, (b) is a top view of a central floating unit and a left-right rotation unit, (c) is XLIc-XLIc of FIG. 41 (b). It is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotation unit along the line. 42A is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and FIG. 42B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device taken along line XLIIb-XLIIb in FIG. 43A is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and FIG. 43B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device taken along the line XLIIIb-XLIIIb in FIG. 44A is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and FIG. 44B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device taken along the line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 45A is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and FIG. 45B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device taken along line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. (A) And (b) is a partially expanded top view of the plate glass of a glass unit. (A) is a side view of a container in a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is a front view of a container in the direction of arrow XLVIIb of Drawing 47 (a). It is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. 51A is a side view of the container according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 51B is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow LIb in FIG. 51A. It is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body which shows a transition state when a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body are rotated. (A) is a top view of the central floating unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a central floating unit in the arrow LVb direction view of FIG. 55 (a), (c), FIG. 56 is a rear view of the central floating unit in a state where the arm body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). (A) is a front view of a central floating unit and a left / right rotating unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left / right rotating unit. (A) is a front view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotating unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit and the left-right rotating unit. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows a frame button typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows a selection switch typically. It is the figure which showed typically the area | region division | segmentation setting of the display screen in a 1st control example, and an effective line setting. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. is there. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control unit in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value, and (b) is a first hit type counter CS2 and a jackpot type. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship between the 2nd random number counter C4 and the judgment value of the hit of a normal symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation types at the time of a big hit. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the fluctuation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probability change). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship between the fluctuation type. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example. It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table A in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table B in a 1st control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table C in a 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the fish school notice selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the shaking action table in a 1st control example typically. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. 7 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 1st control. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a time setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a volume setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a left / right selection process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a swing control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the SW production control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special SW production control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a touch sensor control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the first control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the change pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing according to the present invention. 7 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM content in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the content of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed a part of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. 8 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the third control example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time effect in the third control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in period A1 of FIG. 119. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the effect screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the period B of FIG. 119. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the production screen of the shaking production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 3rd control example. (B) is another example of (a). (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) showed typically the content of RAM of the main control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the rotary body operation table in the 3rd control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of the dog breed selection table in the 3rd control example, and (b) is a figure which showed the swaying motion table 2 in the 3rd control example typically. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the example of the 3rd control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows a prize change production change processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading reel display production processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting period management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows special production processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of the 3rd control. It is a flow chart which shows shaking control processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the reel scenario table in a 3rd control example.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the second through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, The peripheral portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see the various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are provided in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by tapping screws or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. While being attenuated, it is bounced back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync, by the lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device indicates a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is carried out when a prize is awarded to any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with the maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. Also, it refers to a game state in which a ball easily wins the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. The time to be changed is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal time. When the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in an open state (open state), the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are closed (closed state) Compared with the case of, the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of working hours, it becomes easy for the balls to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  It should be noted that the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or opened during the probability change or shortening of time. In addition to changing the time, the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened at one time may be changed to be larger than that during normal times. Further, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric winning accessory 640a and the second electric winning accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per one time. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of working hours, the time period during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, or the first hit per hit is made. The number of times the electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are released may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of any of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82. While synchronizing, the third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays the second symbol with passage as a trigger is provided.

  Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the center floating unit 400, and the left-right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least part of their relative displacement members 450 and driven members 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86 and open. It is visible through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device, each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) This is a variable display in which and are alternately turned on for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the second prize port 640 and the third prize port 82 are attached. The first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, so that the player is given many opportunities to open the first electric auditors product 640a and the second electric auditors product 82a of the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82. be able to. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

  It should be noted that during the probability change or during the shortening of the time, the probability of hitting may be increased during the probability change or by other methods such as increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the first electric auditors product 640a and the second electric auditors product 82a per hit, which increases the winning probability. When it is in a state where the balls can easily win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the time saving, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured to allow a part of the balls that flow down the game board among the balls fired on the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the ball is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the second symbol. The hold lamp (not shown) also lights up. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting positions of the through gates are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. A third winning opening 82 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. Due to this, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first prize hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is prized in the second prize hole 640 and the third prize hole 82. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first prize hole 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the second prize hole 640 and the third prize hole 82. May be configured as five.

  A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is performed by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, The 1st electric auditors product 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  A second electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is performed by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, The second electric accessory 82a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol "○ Is easily displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the shortening of the working time, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened also becomes longer than usual. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a jackpot is high even when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 even if the probability is low. The situation is the same. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the type of jackpot that is selected when the jackpot is the jackpot is more likely to occur when the ball is placed in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 than in the first winning opening 64. It is set higher than when winning. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric winning object 640a and the second electric winning object 82a as in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the ball can always win. It is in a state.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric prizes attached to the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. A ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning port 64 without the electric accessory (so-called “left hitting”), and the winning in the first winning port 64 is achieved. It is more advantageous for the player to win the big hit lottery and aim for the big hit.

  On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning port 82 is likely to be in an open state, and the third winning port 82 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the third winning opening 82 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the second through gate 67 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to open the second electric auditors product 82a and aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the third winning opening 82.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  Not limited to the above-described form, either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, when the ball passes, you may perform a winning lottery of a symbol different from the second symbol. The second electric winning combination 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 or the first electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state by the lottery of the symbol. In this case, since the symbols drawn by the balls passing through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are different, the electric accessory that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 to open. Will be selected one by one.

  Thereby, for example, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when the second symbol is selected as a hit, when the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, the second symbol is selected by lottery. When the winning is selected in the lottery of the two symbols, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is hit to the left and passed through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is selected and the second symbol is selected. When a hit is selected for a symbol different from the symbol, the first electric auditors product 640a can be in a game state in which it is opened.

  Thus, during the probability change, the game state where the lottery of the second symbol is easy to hit, and during the time saving, when the game state where a symbol different from the second symbol is easy to hit, during the probability change, the player right-hands to the second through gate 67. In the gaming state in which the second electric accessory 82a is passed through to easily win the ball, and during the time saving, the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66 to open the first electric auditors and win the ball. It can be in a game state that is easy to play. Therefore, the game states of the normal state, the time saving period, and the probability changing state can be set to different game states, so that the player can enjoy the respective game states.

  In addition, in addition, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when the hit is selected for the second symbol, if the ball is hit right and passed through the second through gate 67, it is different from the second symbol. The symbol is selected by lot, and when the winning is selected in the lottery of the symbol different from the second symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66, and then the second symbol. Is drawn, and when the winning is selected for the second symbol, the second electric auditors product 82a can be opened to the game state.

  In this case, when the ball passes the second through gate 67 by hitting the right, the first electric accessory is released and the ball is easily put into the second winning opening 640 regardless of the probability change and shortening of time. , When the ball hits the left and the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and the ball can be in a game state in which it is easy to win the ball into the third winning port 82. Therefore, the player needs to change the hitting method from right-handed to left-handed or left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit at any time, and the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 64, and the third winning opening 82 is a big hit, a predetermined time (variation time) is set. After the passage of time, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times as a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. It The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (fire control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is a switch (sensor) for detecting the winning of a ball into each winning opening, a switch (sensor) for detecting that the ball has passed through various gates, or a switch (sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity. Are connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. To execute various processes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 has a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a switch (sensor) group used for various effects, and various variable members (movable accessory). Are connected to various switches including a group of switches (sensors) for monitoring the above operation, motors including driving motors 420, 530, and 630 for driving various variable members (movable accessory). The other device 228 includes a drive motor.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the state in which the rotating body elevating unit 300 is in the lowered position, the central floating unit 400 is in the raised position, and the left / right rotating unit 500 is in the retracted position. In FIG. The state is shown in which the unit 300 is arranged in the raised position, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position, and the left-right rotation unit 500 is arranged in the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the inner space of the rear case 210, the rotating body elevating unit 300 and the center floating unit are provided above and below the rear case 210. The units 400 are respectively arranged, and a pair of left and right rotation units 500 and a left and right sensor device 600 are arranged on the left and right sides of the center floating unit 400.

  The rear case 210 is provided with a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 that is provided upright from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by these wall portions 211 and 212. Formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  The rotary body elevating / lowering unit 300 includes a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) box-shaped accommodating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) accommodated in each of the accommodating bodies 330. ) Of the rotating body (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b).

  Each of the plurality of containers 330 is formed so as to be vertically movable (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8) independently. In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can visually recognize through the opening. To be done.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotatably supported by the container 330, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface are sequentially viewed by the player by the rotation. Let The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three outer peripheral surfaces.

  In the present embodiment, the drive source of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is shared by the single drive motor 350, and the component cost can be reduced, while the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are reduced. The combination of figures of 340b can be changed so that the player can visually recognize a total of nine combinations (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

  The central floating unit 400 includes a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the base body 410, and a tip end side of the pair of arm bodies 430 opposite to the base end sides. The first member 440 and the first member 440 are connected so that they can be displaced relative to each other (see FIG. 23).

  The pair of arm bodies 430 are driven by different drive motors 450, respectively, and are formed so that they can be displaced (rotated) independently of each other. Accordingly, the first member 440 can be moved not only in a linear movement in the vertical direction but also in a mode in which linear movement and rotary movement are combined, and the first member 440 can be raised and lowered while incorporating the movement. The movement of the first member 440 can be changed (see FIGS. 31 to 34). The details will be described later.

  The left-right rotation unit 500 includes bases (rear base 511 and front base 512) arranged on the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotary body lifting unit 300 and the front surface of the base body 410 of the central floating unit 400, and the base body 410. The displacement member 530 is rotatably supported on the base end side (see FIG. 29). The displacement member 530 is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 7), and a protruding position (which extends to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) ( (See FIG. 8). In this case, the displacing member 530 is arranged at the projecting position so that the displacing member 530 comes into contact with the first member 440 and its movement is regulated (see FIG. 41). The details will be described later.

  The left and right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 which are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46). The presence or absence of the player's fingers in front of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 can be detected.

  The first sensor 610 is arranged on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. It In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing inward. Therefore, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be arranged at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening, and can be seen by the player. It can be hard to be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 46, detailed configurations of the rotary body lifting unit 300, the center floating unit 400, the left / right rotation unit 500, and the left / right sensor device 600 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotary body lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotary body lifting unit 300. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary body lifting unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotary body elevating / lowering unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for elevating and lowering a central container 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for vertically elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. And 3 units. The left unit 300L is superposed on the front surface side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby the three containers 330 are arranged side by side in the width direction.

  Here, the detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C includes an L-shaped rear base 311 in front view, a front base 312 that is superposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. The drive motor 320 provided, the housing 330 that is moved up and down with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, the first rotating body 340a and the The two-rotation body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 are mainly provided.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack whose side surface is cut with a flat plate-shaped member, and the rack gear 324 is arranged on one side and the housing 330 is arranged on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts are projectingly provided on the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported by these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting members 325 (rack gear 324 ) And the container 330 are vertically guided. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear movement of the rack gear 324. With the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the housing 330 along with the connecting member 325 is vertically displaced (elevated) (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically long portion in which the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically long portion in which the housing 330 is arranged with their lower end sides by the horizontally long portion. Thus, it is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the central container 330 is arranged in the raised position while the left container 330 is arranged in the lowered position, the horizontally long portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  The slide guide 351 is a linear guide including a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back surface base 311 and a slide body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. It is formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R described later. In addition, the slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail fixed to the rear surface base 311 and the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism including an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left housing 330 is arranged side by side on the side of the central housing 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the lateral width of the connecting member 325 (left and right direction in FIG. 12) accordingly. ) The dimension becomes longer. Further, as described above, in order to avoid the visual recognition from the player, the horizontally elongated portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U shape in a front view, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the attitude of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swing in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the retractable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central container 330, the central container 330 is arranged in the raised position. However, the extended slide guide 352 can regulate the swinging in the left-right direction, and the posture of the central housing 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in the state where the central container 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L includes a rear base 313 which is vertically long when viewed from the front and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313. An intermediate base 314 stacked on the front side, a front base 315 stacked on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320. The housing 330 that is moved up and down with respect to the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and the housings between the facing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315. And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. A rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack whose side surface is formed by a flat plate member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft projects from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. A shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole and are rotatably supported.

  A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is vertically guided by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. A guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the guide plate 353 along the up-down direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is provided in the guide groove 353a via the collar C. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is vertically guided along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 becomes a linear movement of the rack gear 324. After being converted, the accommodating body 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 in accordance with the linear movement of the rack gear 324 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L has a rear base 316 formed in a substantially L shape on the front and connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. The front base 317 that is superposed on the front side of the back base 313, the drive motor 320 that is disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 moves up and down with respect to the back base 316 and the front base 317. The accommodating body 330, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b that are accommodated in the accommodating body 330, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 that is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the back base 316 and the front base 317. And a transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a flat plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324, which is formed as a rack whose side faces are toothed, and a connecting member 327 which connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330 are provided.

  A shaft is provided on the front surface of the back base 316, and a pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported on the shaft. A slide guide 351 is arranged on the front surface of the rear base 316 in such a manner that the guide direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is vertically guided by the slide guide 351. .. Further, a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, is extended in the front base 316 along the up-down direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is provided in the guide groove 316a (see FIG. (Not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is vertically guided along the guide groove 316a of the back base 316. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 are regulated in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the linear motion of the rack gear 324. Accordingly, the housing 330 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the horizontal width dimension of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swing in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surface of the left container 330 and the right container 330, the lateral width of the connecting members 326 and 327 (see FIGS. 14 and 16). The rigidity can be increased by shortening the dimension in the left-right direction. Therefore, the postures of the left and right containers 330 can be stabilized (in the left-right direction and difficult to shake).

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to dispose a retractable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right housings 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the back base 316 guide the guide. Can stabilize the posture sufficiently. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18A is a side view of the container 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18A. Is. 18A and 18B, the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 is arranged on the inner surface side of the base body 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 arranged on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition body 334 and the decorative body 335 arranged on the front surface of the base body 331 are provided, and these parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

  The base 331 is a member that forms the back surface (the back side of the paper in FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (the upper and lower sides of FIG. 18B) of the container 330, and is a combination of three plate-shaped members. Are integrally formed. A reflection part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is provided on the front surface of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330.

  The reflection part RF is formed in a rectangular shape as viewed from the front, and has a size that extends over at least the vertical direction of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b when viewed from the front. Are formed (see FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members that form the left and right side surfaces of the housing body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes into which fixed shafts 341 of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, which will be described later, are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 such that they cannot rotate. Each of the holding holes 332a and 333a has an inner peripheral surface having a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis which is formed by removing one of the circles, which is defined by connecting two points on the circumference by a straight line.

  The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between the surfaces facing the side wall body 332. In addition, the partition body 334 has two insertion holes 334a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355.

  The decoration body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in a frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b and the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotary bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  In the container 330 thus formed, the drive motor 350 disposed in the partition wall 334, the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 320, and the drive motor A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotary body 340a are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the container 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 which are sequentially meshed with the drive gear 351. And a gear train consisting of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 include the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b. It is fixed to each of the axial end faces.

  Here, the detailed configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different. Therefore, in the following, the first rotating body 340a is a typical example. And the description of the second rotating body 340b is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 rotatably supported by both axial ends (shaft portion 341b) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair of the end plates 342. It mainly includes three display plates (first display plate 343A, second display plate 343B, and third display plate 343C) that are installed between the end face plates 342.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and shaft portions 341b that are continuously provided at both axial ends of the body portion 341a. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side wall bodies 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing body 330, and connects the pair of shaft portions 341a located at both axial ends to the pair of shaft portions 341a. And a body portion 341b.

  The shaft portion 341b has a shape in which the cross-sectional shape of the shaft is unilaterally divided from a circle by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder is chamfered with a flat surface). The holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) have a slightly smaller similar shape. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341b into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the housing body 330 (side wall bodies 332 and 333).

  A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

  In this case, in the state in which the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and is non-rotatably held, the body portion 341b directs the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the housing body 330 (the decoration body 335). The opening 335a of FIG. 18B is disposed in a posture (rotational position) toward the front surface of FIG. 18B. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate arranged on the front surface (the “visual recognition position” described later) of the housing 330 among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. it can.

  Since the fixed shaft 341 (the shaft portion 341a and the body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends in the axial direction opened, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed and the wiring is routed using the internal space. It can be pulled out to the outside of the container 330 from the opening at the end of the direction. In addition, since the fixed shaft 341 is not rotatable with respect to the housing body 330 as described above, even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force such as twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

  The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape in a front view, and has a shaft support hole 342 having a circular axial section in the center. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end plate 342 is rotatably supported by the fixed shaft 341. As a result, the end plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, since the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft 341a, the end plate 342 is formed between the side wall bodies 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The position in the axial direction can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

  The first gear 353 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and the base gear 361 of the detection mechanism described later is fixed to the other. Although the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 of the second rotary body 340b, the base gear 361 is not attached to the other (FIG. 17 and FIG. 17). 18).

  Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and by connecting the outer edges of both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, respectively, It is installed between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular columnar body together with the end face plates 342.

  Graphics are drawn on the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, respectively. Therefore, when the triangular prism is rotated, the figures respectively drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display plates 343A to 343C are sequentially visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a part of the outer surface of each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape protruding outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as will be described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) in the rotational position between the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, each display plate 343A. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of the to 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the width direction end portions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved and formed in an arc shape that is convex outward, The central portion in the width direction is formed into a substantially flat surface shape. As a result, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the graphic and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the radius of the arc of the arc-shaped portion formed by bending is larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times). The following) is set.

  Here, in the following, as the arrangement positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism is rotated, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B) is set. The position where the outer surface of the decorative body 335 can be visually recognized through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "visual recognition position", and the outer surface is directed toward the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the ornament 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

  Therefore, for example, when the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). .. When the triangular column is rotated 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction from this state, one of the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C is placed at the visual recognition position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display is displayed. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are configured to transmit light. Is formed in part. Further, the inner surface of the first display plate 343A is provided with a reflection part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light.

  As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position where the inner surface of the display plate of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C arranged at the visible position can be illuminated. Therefore, in the state where the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmissive portion PN of each of the display plates 343B and 343C to be directly visually recognized by the player. Can be made

  On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflection part RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. After being transmitted through the transmission part PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflection part RF of the base 331 of the housing 330, the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base 331. As a result, the player can indirectly recognize it.

  For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a and causing the LED 344 to emit light at the rotational position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 of the housing 330 is visually recognized. The player can be made to associate with the graphic of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a is rotated to a position where the graphic of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C can be visually recognized.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflector plate is rotated along with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) of each rotating body 340a, 340b, the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotating body 340a, 340b (upward and downward spacing in FIG. 18B), or The apparent diameter of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (each of the display plates 343A to 343C) faces the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmissive portion PN is visually recognized by the player as reflected light from the reflective portion RF of the base 441. The aspect (for example, the size of the area where the light is visually recognized) can be periodically changed.

  It returns to FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 and demonstrates. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. An end gear 363 having a detected plate 363a protruding outward in the direction and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detected plate 363a of the end gear 363 are provided.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the base body 331 in a state where the detection region is arranged on the movement locus of the plate 363a to be detected. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection body of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both rotary bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. As a result, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. When the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 through the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotary body 340a and the graphic of the second rotary body 340b visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, the combination of figures of both rotary bodies 340a and 340b was limited to three sets in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotationally driven in synchronization by the one drive motor, the combinations that can be formed are, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A. A first combination of arranging the first display plate 343A of the two-rotation body 340a at the display position, the second display plate 343B of the first rotation body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotation body 340a at the display position. There are only three sets of the second combination to be arranged, and the third combination to arrange the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340a at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are independently driven to rotate by different drive motors, a maximum of 9 combinations can be formed and the combinations can be formed. It can be displayed arbitrarily. However, in this case, since two drive motors are required, the cost of parts is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 to only one, and to combine the combinations. It can be displayed arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, by not allowing the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to be completely coincident with each other and allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions, the nine combinations are promptly displayed. Can be issued. A combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b showing transition states when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated. 21A to 21E are shown in FIG. 22 (a) to 22 (e) in the state shown as Nos. 1 to 5 in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

  Note that, in FIG. 20, a state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position as a combination of figures of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is indicated by reference numeral “A” or “A ′”, The state in which the second display plate 343B is arranged is indicated by reference sign “B” or “B ′”, and the state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged in the visual recognition position is indicated by reference sign “C” or “C ′”, respectively. To be done.

  For example, No. 1 in FIG. In the state represented by 10 “A, C ′”, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the respective visual recognition positions, and the first rotating body The figure drawn on the first display plate 343A from 340a and the figure drawn on the third display plate 343C from the second rotating body 340b correspond to the state visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C” and are referred to as the second display plate 343A. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340a are illustrated by reference numerals "A 'to C'", respectively.

  Here, in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the numbers of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to each other are set to different values. In the present embodiment, when the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. Is formed.

  20. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21A, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 1 "A ', A", first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b positions the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotary body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotary body 340a by 120 degrees, a difference (deviation) of 12 degrees occurs between the rotational positions of the second rotary body 340b and the rotary body 340a. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, the respective second display plates of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to recognize that the figures drawn on the outer surface of the 343B are arranged at the respective visual recognition positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed to be curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (I.e., the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b), so for a player who views the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each of the display boards 343A to 343C from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference (deviation) in the rotational positions of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b.

  20. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed at the visual recognition position, the No. 2 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21C, the second rotary body 340b is arranged at a position where its rotational position is displaced from the first rotary body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in the rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. In the rotation of the section up to the state shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22D, the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C at the visual recognition position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while rotating the second rotating body. The rotation position of 340b is displaced from the first rotation body 340a. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the deviation of the figures (the combination is not established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

  20. 9 and the state shown in FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. No. 20. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 22E, the second rotating body 340b positions the third display plate 343C at the visual recognition position. As a result, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  It should be noted that according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is performed even in a section in which a figure shift (combination non-establishment, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figure visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure is to be combined in the third combination.

  The subsequent steps are substantially the same as the above-described aspect (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 (a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 22 (e)). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table makes one round from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, No. 1 in FIG. 11-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, it may be considered by replacing the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 with a phase difference of 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A ′ in FIG. 20, B ”), a fifth combination (No. 12“ B ′, C ”in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20“ C ′, B ”in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In addition, in FIG. 21-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, it may be considered by replacing the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 with 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A ′ in FIG. 20, C ”), the eighth combination (No. 22“ B ′, A ”in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30“ C ′, C ”in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b has a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). Is formed as a gear train including five gears), and the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Accordingly, the rotation cycle of the first rotary body 340a and the rotation cycle of the second rotary body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired). Combinations can appear arbitrarily).

  Further, since the transmission mechanism is formed as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced, the durability and the reliability can be improved, but the gears are always meshed with each other. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse.

  Therefore, for example, a section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) that advances in the normal direction (downward in FIG. 20) in the table of FIG. After that, immediately after or immediately before the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) is exposed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. A series of operations of returning to the direction (upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, and thereby, it is possible to perform an effect of making the player expect the appearance of the third combination.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. If necessary, the table of FIG. 20 is moved forward (downward in FIG. 20) to reveal the ninth combination, and the table of FIG. 20 is reversed (upward in FIG. 20). It is also possible to proceed to and reveal the ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, one 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is required. Since it suffices to perform it, a desired combination of figures can be promptly revealed.

  Here, when the second rotary body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotary body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotary body 340b is changed to the rotation of the first rotary body 340a). On the other hand, when "1 / integer" times is set), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. You can However, in this case, the maximum number of figures that can be combined is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B” and No. 11 in FIG. 21 “A ′, C”) except for the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body. A difference (shift) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by the single drive motor 350, the number of combinations of figures is set to 9 so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be changed. It is not possible to achieve by simply forming the transmission mechanism that transmits to each of the first and second rotating bodies 340b as a gear train, and as in this embodiment, the transmission positions of the first and second rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be changed. This is possible only by allowing the difference (deviation) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the required number of drive motors 350 and reduce the product cost while improving the effect of production by increasing the number of combinations of figures.

  In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) that causes a difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle between the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In the combination), the stop position for stopping the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth, and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C”, and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotary body 340b is delayed, the first rotary body 340a is stopped at the rotational position advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, it is not necessary to stop the first rotating body 340a at the rotation position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference surface to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b, and make them inconspicuous.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth, and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B”, and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22 (e), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is advanced, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotational position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d). For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated by 114 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference surface to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 34b, and make them inconspicuous.

  As described above, in the rotating body elevating / lowering unit 300, each container 300 is formed so as to be able to move up and down, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the game board 13. It can be made invisible to the player by locating it on the back side of. Therefore, a desired combination among the combinations of the graphic of the first rotating body 340a and the graphic of the second rotating body 340b can be promptly revealed at a necessary timing.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since 9 combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). Therefore, in order to bring out a desired combination, It is necessary to rotate the 1st rotating body 340a and the 2nd rotating body 340b comparatively many times, and time becomes long by that much.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player by arranging each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7). You can As a result, the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotating position without the player being aware of the rotation, and as a result, it is necessary. When the timing comes, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly achieved. Can be made to appear.

  The placement of each container 300 in the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b to the display of results (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not placed in the lowered position and The rotation of the rotating bodies 340a, 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, while the time from the start of rotation of each rotating body 340a, 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the pre-rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. This can prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  That is, when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, a comparatively loud sound is generated, and therefore, even if the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are moved to the lowered position and become invisible to the player, they are still rotated. The generated sound may cause the player to recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance.

  On the other hand, the rotation of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is performed during the operation of the predetermined operating means, so that the operation can be mixed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the pre-rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Note that, as the operating means, for example, the payout device 133, the audio output device 226, or the ball launching unit 112a (both see FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is illustrated. In the state in which these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated when the ball is dispensed, the sound is output, or the ball is launched. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the pre-rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The rotation may be performed in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the previous rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. FIG. 23 is a front view of the central floating unit 400. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the central floating unit 400 is provided on the base body 410 provided on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and on the front surface of the base body 410. A pair of cover bodies 420, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose proximal ends are rotatably supported between facing surfaces of the cover bodies 420 and the base body 410, and which are arranged in a posture in which the distal ends face each other. It mainly includes a first member 440 to which the distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 430 are connected so as to be capable of relative displacement, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm bodies 420, respectively.

  The base body 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the cover bodies 420 are partially disposed (covered) on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 410. On the mutually opposing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotation shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are recessed at coaxial positions. Is set up.

  Further, a shaft 412 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 453 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is provided on the front surface of the base body 410 in a protruding manner. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed at the tip of the shaft 412, and the retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove restricts the crank gear 453 from coming off the shaft 412. ..

  A cutout portion 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 to secure a space for allowing the arm body 430 to rotate. On the other hand, when the rotation of the arm body 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the inner edge of the opening of the cutout portion 422 is brought into contact with the outer surface of the arm body 430, whereby the rotation of the arm member 420 over the predetermined angle can be restricted. Formed in. That is, the cover body 420 is formed so as to be able to function as a stopper that restricts rotation of the arm member 420 beyond a predetermined angle.

  A rotating body 413 is arranged at the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotator 413 is a member that is rotatably formed by the driving force of a drive motor (not shown), and when the first member 440 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 31A), the first member 440 becomes When the first member 440 is shielded and invisible to the player while the first member 440 is placed in the lowered position (FIG. 31C), the game is performed in a state where the first member 440 is vertically juxtaposed above the first member 440. It is visible to the person.

  The arm body 430 is a long rod-shaped body that is bent and formed in a substantially V shape in a front view, and mainly includes a rotation shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotary shaft 431 is a shaft that is axially supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and is coaxially projected from the front surface and the rear surface of the arm body 430 at the base end side. To be done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in such a manner that the tip end side is vertically moved up and down about the rotation shaft 431 as a rotation center.

  The driven groove 432 is a portion through which an eccentric pin 454 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending from the bent portion of the arm body 430 toward the rotary shaft 431 (a long hole in front view). Shaped) opening. As will be described later, as the crank gear 453 rotates, the eccentric pin 454 slides along the driven groove 432, so that the arm body 430 rotates about the rotation shaft 431.

  The connecting pin 433 is a rod-shaped body that projects from the front surface on the tip side of the arm body 430, and is slidably inserted along a sliding groove 441a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. The arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via the connecting pin 433 so as to be relatively movable.

  A collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 433 inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 in the assembly process of the first member 430, as described later. To prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming off the sliding groove 441a. In addition, a rotating body 434 is disposed on the front surface of the arm body 430 opposite to the driven groove 432 across the bent portion. The rotating body 434 is rotatably formed by the driving force of a drive motor 435 arranged on the back side of the arm body 430.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the attachment plate 451 to which the drive motor 450 is attached and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450. A pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 that is meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 that is eccentrically located from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453 are mainly provided.

  The mounting plate 451 is disposed on the front surface of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is housed between the facing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 is provided so as to project from the front surface of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. A fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is provided at the tip of the eccentric pin 454, and the eccentric pin 454 is moved from the driven groove 432 by the retaining ring fitted in the fitting groove. Regulate getting out.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in the present embodiment), The eccentric pin 454, which is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453, is displaced in the vertical direction in a front view while drawing an arcuate locus. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed upward or downward by the eccentric pin 454 that slides in the driven groove 432, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is relatively displaceably coupled to the arm body 430 via the coupling pin 433 that is inserted into the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independent of each other. By being rotated, as will be described later, it is allowed to float in a mode in which a linear motion and a rotary motion are combined (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, the detailed configuration of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

  26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 is rotatably attached to the base body 441, the front body 442 and the back body 443 disposed on the front and back surfaces of the base body 441, and the back surface of the base body 441, respectively. An arm member 444 provided, a drive motor 445 that generates a drive force for rotating the arm member 444, and a crank member 446 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444 are mainly used. Prepare

  The base 441 is a member that forms the skeleton of the first member 440 and is formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front. A pair of sliding grooves 441a are formed in the base 441 so as to have openings. Each of the sliding grooves 441a is formed as an opening having a long hole shape in a front view extending linearly, and a pair of the sliding grooves 441a are arranged non-parallel to each other. Specifically, the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a reverse inverted V shape when viewed from the front and are inclined upward from the center toward both ends in the front view of the base 441.

  On the back surface of the base body 441, a cylindrical tube portion 441b formed corresponding to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 is protruded. To be done.

  The connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the cylindrical portion 441b. That is, since the connecting pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 441b, the supporting area of the connecting pin 433 can be expanded correspondingly, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. ..

  The front body 442 is a member that forms the front surface of the first member 440, and is formed into a disc shape having a substantially same diameter as the base body 441 in a front view circular shape and a predetermined thickness dimension. The front body 442 is formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs in this embodiment) are arranged inside the front body 442. Therefore, by causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light (light or blink), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be emitted from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface to the outside. This allows the player to visually recognize that the entire front body 442 (front surface and outer peripheral surface) is emitting light.

  The front body 442 is arranged (fastened and fixed) on the base body 441 after the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is connected to the base body 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the base body 441 from the back side, and at least the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441 is attached to the tip of the connecting pin 433 protruding to the front side of the base body 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is attached (fastened and fixed), and the collar serves as a retainer for the connecting pin 433 from the base 441.

  The arm member 444 is a long member that is longer than the diameter dimension of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444a is a hole that is axially supported by the shaft 441a of the front body 441, and is provided at a position at the center of the arm member 444 in the longitudinal direction. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted, and is a straight line extending perpendicularly to the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444 below the shaft-supported hole 444a ( It is formed as an opening having a long hole shape when viewed from the front.

  The arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the shaft 441 a between the facing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443 in a posture in which both end portions thereof project outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23), and will be described later. As described above, as the crank member 446 rotates, the eccentric pin 446b slides along the driven groove 444b, thereby rotating about the shaft support hole 444b.

  The crank member 446 is a member disposed between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443, and includes a rotating body 446 a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445 and a rotation center of the rotating body 446 a (the drive motor 445 a). Eccentric pin 446b that is positioned eccentrically from the drive shaft). The eccentric pin 446b is provided so as to project from the front surface of the rotary body 446a and is inserted into the driven groove 444b of the arm member 444.

  When the rotary body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b that is eccentric from the rotation center of the rotary body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus with a predetermined radius. As a result, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled by the eccentric pin 446b to the left and right, and the rotation of the predetermined rotation angle (approximately 30 degrees in this embodiment) is alternately repeated in the forward and reverse directions. The arm member 444 is rotated about the (axis 441c) as a rotation center (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

  Thereby, as will be described later, the player can visually recognize the operation of the arm member 444 in such a manner that the both end portions of the arm member 444 projecting from the both sides of the front body 442 to the left and right are alternately reciprocally moved up and down. .. In addition, by performing the reciprocating motion of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, as described later, a reaction (inertial force) of the reciprocating motion is exerted on the base body 441 and the front body 442 to cause the arm body 430 to move. Thus, the player can visually recognize the relative displacement of the front body 442.

  Next, the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 29. The pair of left and right rotation units 500 are arranged left and right with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 6), but the pair of left and right rotation units 500 are formed in a symmetrical shape. Except for the above, since they are formed with substantially the same configuration, only one (the one arranged on the left side in front view) will be described and the other description will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the left / right rotation unit 500. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left / right rotation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left-right rotation unit 500 includes a rear base 511 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a front base 512 that is superposed on the front side of the rear base 511, and a front base 513. A cover body 513 provided, a drive motor 520 disposed on the back side of the back base 511, a displacement member 530 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 520 with respect to the back base 511 and the front base 512, A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530 is mainly provided.

  On the mutually opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, shaft supporting holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotating shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessed at positions coaxial with each other. Is set up. The front base 512 is formed with an opening 512a through which the rotary shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted and an opening 512b through which an eccentric pin 542 of a crank gear 540 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is inserted.

  The displacement member 530 is a member having a blade-shaped decoration on its front surface, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotary shaft 531 is a shaft pivotally supported by the shaft support holes 511a and 513a of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, and the front and back surfaces of the displacement member 530 on the base end side (lower side in FIG. 29). Are projected coaxially. The displacement member 530 is rotatable about the rotation axis 531 as a rotation center between a retracted position overlapping the front base 512 in a front view and an extended position protruding to the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) side of the rear case 210. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

  The driven hole 432 is a hole in which a connecting pin 552 of a link member 550 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is rotatably supported and is recessed at a position separated from the rotating shaft 531 by a predetermined distance toward the tip end side. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, so that the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520 and the pinion gear 521. A crank gear 540 and a link member 550 that connects the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530 are mainly provided.

  The crank gear 540 is a gear that is rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the back base 511 and the front base 512, and an eccentric pin 541 is provided so as to project toward the front at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. The link member 550 is a rod-shaped body disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530. The link member 550 has a connection hole 551 formed in the back surface on the one end side in the longitudinal direction and the other end side in the longitudinal direction. A connecting pin 552 is projected from the front surface of the.

  The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably supported in the coupling hole 551 of the link member 550 through the opening 512b of the front base 512, and the coupling pin 552 of the link member 550 is driven by the driven hole of the displacement member 530. It is rotatably supported by 532. As a result, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550 to form a crank mechanism.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (approximately 180 degrees in this embodiment), The eccentric pin 541 that is eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the base end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. As a result, the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 as the center of rotation between the retracted position and the extended position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the operation of the central floating unit 400 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 41. In the following, for convenience of description, the ones located on the left side (the left side in FIG. 31) and the right side (the right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front, with respect to the pair of arm bodies 430, respectively. These are referred to as the “left” arm body 430 and the “right” arm body 430.

  31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400. FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the central floating unit 400 is arranged in a raised position, and FIG. 31 (c) corresponds to the state in which it is arranged between them, and FIG. 31 (c) corresponds to the state in which it is arranged in the lowered position.

  32 (a) to 32 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400. FIG. 32 (a) is shown in FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 32 (b) is shown in FIG. 31 (b). 32 (c) corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 in FIG. 31 (c).

  32A to 32C correspond to cross-sectional views in which the back surface of the first member 440 is viewed by cutting along the plane orthogonal to the connecting pin 433. Further, the outer shapes of the left and right arm bodies 430 are schematically illustrated by using a chain double-dashed line, while the back body 443, the drive motor 450, and the crank member 446 are omitted. The same applies to FIG. 35, FIG. 36, FIG. 38, and FIG. 40, which will be described later, so the description thereof will be omitted below.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), in the state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing up the tip side (connecting pin 433 side) upward. The first member 440 is located at the uppermost position. Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is positioned close to the end (hereinafter referred to as “outer end”) of each sliding groove 441a on the side closer to the radial outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are rotationally driven and the respective crank gears 453 are rotated from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 causes the driven groove 432 to move. While sliding, the left and right arm bodies 430 are pushed down respectively.

  As a result, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated about the rotation shaft 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 32 (b). Is displaced. From this state, when the crank gears 453 are further rotated by the rotation drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed downward, and are shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c). Thus, the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c), when the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position, both the left and right arm bodies 430 swing down the tip side (connecting pin 433 side) downward. The first member 440 is located at the lowermost position and is extended to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Further, the rotating body 413 is exposed above the first member 440 so that the player can visually recognize it.

  Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is positioned close to the end (hereinafter referred to as “inner end”) of each sliding groove 441a on the side closer to the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end of the sliding groove 441. In this embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the inner end at the lowered position is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end at the raised position.

  Accordingly, as will be described later, when the first member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member 430 by utilizing the action of inertia or the operation of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the lowered position The relative displacement amount at can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the case described above from the state (lowered position) shown in FIGS. 31C and 32C, as the crank gears 453 rotate, As the eccentric pin 454 slides in the driven groove 432 and pushes up the left and right arm bodies 430, respectively, finally, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (c), the central floating unit is finally moved. 400 is located in the raised position.

  Thus, according to the central floating unit 400, the first member 440 can be moved up and down between the raised position and the lowered position. However, in the above-described operation described as an example of lifting and lowering of the first member 440, the first member 440 linearly moves while maintaining the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. The change in movement is poor.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be displaceable (rotatable) independently of each other, and the tip ends (the connection pins 433) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are the first Since it is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), it can be moved up and down while changing the movement of the first member 440 according to the rotation mode of the left and right arm bodies 430. it can. An example of such an operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

  33 (a) to 33 (c) and FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400, and FIG. 33 (a) shows a state in which the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position. 33 (b), 33 (c), 10 (a) and 10 (b) are arranged in a state between the ascending position and the descending position, and FIG. 10 (c) is arranged in the descending position. Corresponds to each state.

  35 (a) to 35 (c) and 36 (a) to 36 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c) are 33 (a) to 33 (c) respectively correspond to the cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) show the center in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c). Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven from the state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position, and the tip side The right arm body 430 is rotated in the rotational direction in which the (connecting pin 433) is directed downward (downward in FIG. 33A) (hereinafter, this rotation is referred to as “downward rotation”).

  This downward rotation of the right arm body 430 causes the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35 (a)) arm body 430 to push down the sliding groove 441a. As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (inclined) to a posture in which the right shoulder is lowered.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the left (right side in FIG. 35 (a)) arm body 430 in the stopped state is located between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441a in the raised position. A predetermined gap is formed in the. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (inclined) to the right shoulder downward (left shoulder downward in FIG. 35B) posture, the sliding groove 441a to which the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected is connected. Is steeper and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged in a direction that allows the movement (fall) of the first member 440 due to the action of gravity. ..

  Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the raised position shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), the first member 440 of the right arm body 430 is moved to the predetermined rotation position. While it can be displaced by being driven by rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotation position, the first member 440 is brought into a state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b) by free fall due to the action of gravity. Can be placed.

  That is, until the right arm body 430 reaches the predetermined rotation position, the first member 440, which was driven by the downward rotation of the right arm body 430, reaches the right rotation position after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Instead of being driven by the downward rotation of the arm body 430, the arm body 430 can be abruptly displaced downward by free fall to precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  When the right arm body 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b), the connecting pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35 (b)) arm body 430 slides. By further pushing down the moving groove 441a, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c), the downward-sloping posture of the first member 40 can be changed (inclined) to a steeper angle. ..

  In this case, the left (right side in FIG. 35B) arm body 430 is in a stopped state, and the connecting pin 433 reaches the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. The first member 440 can be rotated with the right side in (b) as the center of rotation, and the first member 440 is rotated toward the left arm body 430 side (in front view) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. It is possible to form a state of being pushed in (left side in FIG. 33).

  That is, in the process from the raised position of FIG. 33A to the state shown in FIG. 33C, the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 33) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. ), A rotational movement in the direction in which the shoulder falls downward (clockwise in FIG. 33), and a linear movement to the left (in the left direction in FIG. 33) can be displaced. You can change the movement.

  When the state shown in FIG. 33 (c) and FIG. 35 (c) is reached, in addition to the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the right arm body 430 is also located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the left arm body 430 (the left side in FIG. 33C) is then rotated downward.

  This downward rotation of the left arm body 430 causes the connecting pin 433 of the left (right side in FIG. 35 (c)) arm pin 433 to push down the sliding groove 441a, and thus the state shown in FIG. As shown in 36 (a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from the downward-sloping posture to the horizontal posture.

  In an example of the operation described here, the left arm body 430 is further moved downward from the state shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 36 (a) to a position regulated by the cutout portion 422 of the cover body 420. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the left (right side in FIG. 36 (a)) arm body 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a further downward, so that in contrast to the case described above (see FIG. 33), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36B and 36B, the first member 40 can be changed (inclined) to a posture in which the left shoulder is lowered.

  When the state shown in FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. 36 (b) is reached, the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowest position, and further downward rotation is restricted, so from this state, Next, the right (left side in FIG. 34B) arm body 430 is rotated downward to a position regulated by the cutout portion 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c), the first member 40 is changed (returned) from the downward-sloping left shoulder posture to the horizontal posture and is arranged at the lowermost position. You can That is, it is arranged in the lowered position.

  As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed so as to be displaceable (rotatable) independently of each other, and the distal end sides (connections) of the left and right arm bodies 430 are connected. Since the pin 433) is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be capable of relative displacement (sliding), the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced independently of each other, so that the first member 440 moves linearly. It is possible to give a movement that is a combination of a rotation movement and a rotation movement, and to give a change to the movement.

  In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotatably supported by the base body 410 and the cover body 420 at their base end sides (rotating shafts 431) and are rotated about the base end sides, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotated. Each of the distal ends (connecting pins 433) of 430 can be moved along arcuate loci whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, as compared with the case where the left and right arm bodies 430 are linearly slid and displaced, it is possible to give the first member 440 a movement that is a more complicated combination of linear movement and rotational movement, and to make a greater change. You can give to that movement.

  Here, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 arranged in the raised position or the lowered position is allowed to coast to the left and right arm bodies 430 without rotating the left and right arm bodies 430. It is possible to make relative displacement by (action of inertia). The displacement of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38 by taking the displacement at the lowered position as an example.

  37 (a) to 37 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged in the lowered position. In FIG. 37 (a), the state in which the first member 440 is located at the center is shown in FIG. FIGS. 37B and 37C show a state in which the first member 440 is laterally swayed from the state shown in FIG. 37A.

  38 (a) to 38 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) correspond to FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c). Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a), in the state of being arranged at the lowered position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is connected to each sliding groove of the first member 440. It is arranged at a position having a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end of 441a. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the above-described gap.

  For example, by displacing (rotating) one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 at a predetermined speed and then stopping the arm bodies 430, an inertial force generated due to the stop is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 causes A displacement that reciprocates toward the outer end or the inner end of the sliding groove 441a can be formed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is reciprocally moved (sways) left and right by inertia (action of inertia). You can change the movement.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are formed linearly and arranged non-parallel, the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and When the first member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (action of inertia), a rotation component can be added to the movement of the first member 440. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right (sideways) not only by the linear motion but also by the motion in which the linear motion is combined with the rotary motion, and as a result, the motion of the first member 440 is changed. Can be given.

  Further, since each sliding groove 441a is formed in a linear shape, when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a with the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430, resistance is increased. It can be suppressed and slid smoothly. Accordingly, the displacement of the first member 440 due to the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 can be stabilized, and the load on each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially V shape, after the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right converges and stops, the first state is brought to the stopped state. The member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, in a state where an effect is performed by another unit or a display device and the central floating unit 400 is retracted to the raised position and is on standby, the first member 440 can be prevented from rattling with respect to the arm body 430 due to a disturbance. .. As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, reciprocating the first member 440 left and right by inertia (action of inertia) after the arm body 430 is stopped means that the first member maintains the same posture between the raised position and the lowered position. This is not possible with a structure in which only the linear movement is performed (that is, a conventional product in which the left and right arm bodies cannot be independently displaced), and the left and right arm bodies 430 are independently displaced as in the present embodiment. It was made possible by making it possible. Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  That is, in the structure (conventional product) in which the first member only moves linearly while maintaining the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position, even if the arm body is stopped, the first member acts on the first member with the stop. The inertial force exerted cannot act as a trigger for reciprocating (hooking) the first member left and right.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, from the state in which the first member 440 is in the inclined posture, one arm body 430 remains stopped and only the other arm body 430 is displaced (rotated). Since the first member 440 can be arranged at the reference position (for example, the lowered position) (see FIG. 34 and FIG. 35), the inertial force due to the stop of the other arm body 430 causes the first member 440 to reciprocate laterally (rolling). ) It can be used as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to reliably generate the left and right reciprocating motion of the first member 440 and increase the amplitude of the left and right reciprocating motion.

  In addition, here, the lower position is described as an example of the position where the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) to the left and right by inertia (action of inertia) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, but it is understood from the above configuration. As possible, other positions are possible. That is, as long as the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440. May be in the position. Therefore, the reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the ascending position and the descending position, not limited to the ascending position or the descending position. Further, the rotation positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped do not have to be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Next, an operation of reciprocating (rolling) the first member 440 to the left and right by utilizing the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. That is, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 is moved to the left and right arm bodies 430 even after the left and right reciprocating motions of the first member 440 due to the inertia (action of inertia) described above have converged. It can be reciprocated left and right without rotating.

  39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the central floating unit 400 arranged in the lowered position. In FIG. 39 (a), the state in which the first member 440 is located at the center is shown in FIG. 39B and FIG. 39C, a state in which the first member 440 is horizontally swung from the state shown in FIG. 39A is shown.

  40 (a) to 40 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the central floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) correspond to FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c). Each corresponds to a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), in the state of being arranged in the lowered position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 has the first member 440 as described above. Of the sliding groove 441a is arranged at a position having a gap between each of the outer end and the inner end. Therefore, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm bodies 430 can be allowed by the above-described gap.

  That is, in the first member 440, since the arm member 444 is disposed on the back surface of the base body 441, by displacing (rotating) the arm member 444 by the driving force of the drive motor 445, the reaction force is applied to the base body 441. The connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or the inner end of each sliding groove 441a by the action of the reaction force. As a result, even when the left and right arm bodies 430 are in a stopped state, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, and the arm members are As shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b), the arm member 444 is rotated clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the front) from the state in which the 444 is in the neutral position, so that the reaction force acts. This makes it possible to rotate the base body 441 and the front body 442 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in front view, and, as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (c), move the arm member 444 counterclockwise in front view. Rotate around (clockwise).

  Accordingly, the base body 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) in a front view by the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) to the left and right, and the movement can be changed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the arm member 444 of the first member 440 is rotatably supported by the base body 441 and is rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445, so that the arm member 444 is not displaced. The accompanying reaction force can be easily applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 in the rotation direction. As a result, a rotational component can be easily generated in the movements of the base body 441 and the front body 442.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the center of rotation of the arm member 444 (the shaft 441c of the base body 441) is located at the center of the pair of connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 in the left-right direction, the rotation of the arm member 444 may be reversed. The force can be easily linked to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (base 441 and front body 442).

  In addition, here, as the position where the first member 440 is reciprocally moved (swayed) to the left and right by the reaction force when the arm member 444 is rotated, the lowered position is described as an example. It is also possible in position. That is, as long as the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped, there is a gap between each connecting pin 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a of the first member 440. May be in the position. Therefore, the reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the ascending position and the descending position, not limited to the ascending position or the descending position. Further, the rotation positions at which the left and right arm bodies 430 are stopped do not have to be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in an inclined posture).

  Here, the first member 440 may be provided with a sense device for detecting its posture, and control for changing the rotation state of the arm member 444 may be performed based on the detection result of the sensor device. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged, or the first member 440 can be reciprocally moved (rolled) to the left and right.

  For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) left and right with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). 37 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocating motion of the base body 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444). To act in a direction to cancel the movements of the base body 441 and the front body 442). Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

  Alternatively, from the state in which the movement of the first member 440 is converged and stopped, or the state in which the first member 440 is reciprocally moved (rolled) to the left and right due to inertia (action of inertia), the first member 440 is moved. The base member 441 and the front body 442 are reciprocally moved, or the arm member 444 is rotated so as to strengthen the reciprocating motion (the direction in which the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 is amplified by the movement of the base member 441 and the front body 442). To act). Accordingly, the first member 440 can be reciprocated to the left and right, and the reciprocation of the first member 440 to the left and right can be changed according to the rotation state of the arm member 444.

  As a sensor, an acceleration sensor (for example, an acceleration sensor (for example, a base member 441, a front body 442, a rear body 443, or the like) disposed in the other portion of the first member 440 excluding the arm member 444 to detect acceleration in the three directions (for example, , A capacitance type, a piezo type, etc.), a distance sensor (for example, a triangulation type or a time of flight type) that detects the distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440, and the like. The distance sensor is provided at at least two places and is configured to detect the relative posture of the first member 440 (base 441 or front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

  Next, cooperation between the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41 (a) is a front view of the center floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the center floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 500, and FIG. 41B is a cross-sectional rear view of the central floating unit 400 and the left-right rotation unit 500 taken along line XLIc-XLIc in FIG.

  41 (a) to 41 (c), the state in which the central floating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position and the left / right rotation unit 500 is arranged in the extended position is shown. 41 (a) to 41 (c), in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. are not shown. Only the main components required for explanation are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the left / right rotation unit 500 is arranged in the extended position with the central floating unit 400 arranged in the lowered position, the first member 440 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be able to contact with a pair of cylindrical portions 441b that are erected on the back surface of the base body 441). Thereby, the movement of the first member 430 can be restricted.

  For example, when the central floating unit 400 that has been placed in the raised position is placed in the lowered position by the downward rotation of the left and right arm bodies 430, the left and right rotating unit 500 is placed in the extended position at the same time, and By bringing the displacement member 530 into contact with the member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), as in the case described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the first member 440 reciprocates left and right by inertia (action of inertia) ( It is possible to regulate the rolling.

  Alternatively, when displacing (rotating) the arm member 444 of the first member 440, the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), so that the displacement reaction of the arm member 444 causes a first reaction. It is possible to restrict the members (the base body 441 and the front body 442) from reciprocating (rolling) to the left and right, whereby the front body 442 is maintained in a stopped state and only the arm member 444 is displaced. Can be made visible to the player.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arm is moved according to the disposition position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, by switching whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the tubular portion 441b). A mode in which the first member 540 (the base body 441 and the front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by the reaction force associated with the displacement of the member 444, and the first member 540 (the base body 441 and the front body 442) is maintained in a stopped state. The mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

  Next, the left / right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48. First, the relationship between the left and right sensor devices 600 and the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

  42 (a) and 43 (a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (b) are lines XLIIb-XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus 600 in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line of a). In FIG. 42, the first member 440 is shown in the raised position, and in FIG. 43, the first member 440 is shown in the lowered position.

  42 and 43, only the rear case 210, the first member 440, and the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are illustrated, and other configurations are omitted for the sake of simplicity and easy understanding. To be done. Further, in FIGS. 42 and 43, the paths of the light emitted from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light emitted to the plate glass 16a are schematically shown by two-dot chain lines. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45 described later, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left and right sensor device 600 detects a player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquires the presence / absence (presence) or position of the player's finger, or the operation direction or operation speed. And a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the back case 210. The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210. Is set up.

  The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the irradiation regions S1 and S2 of the light with which the plate glass 16a is irradiated are in the width direction of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 42 (a)). The light emitting portions are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting portions facing inward so as to have an overlap in the center. Therefore, as described above, the sensor devices 610 and 620 are located at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (positions on the outer side in the width direction) with the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) interposed therebetween. It can be arranged, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  In this case, the front side of the plate glass 16a (the front side in FIG. 42 (a), the lower side in FIG. 42 (b)), and the oblique front side of the irradiation regions S1 and S2 (the front side in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting unit). ) Has a player's finger, the light emitted from the light emitting unit and transmitted through the plate glass 16a is reflected by the player's finger, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving unit. The presence of a person's finger is detected.

  The left and right sensor device 600 has the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 disposed on the left and right, and can perform detection at two locations in front of the plate glass 16a (areas corresponding to the irradiation areas S1 and S2). Therefore, based on the detection results of both the sensors 610 and 620, the position of the player's finger (whether the irradiation area S1 or the irradiation area S2 is located in front), the operation direction (the irradiation area S1 to the irradiation area S2). It is possible to detect the direction toward or the opposite direction) or the operation speed (the speed at which the irradiation areas S1 and S2 are traversed).

  Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the light paths of the left and right sensor devices 600 (the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) are set so as to overlap the moving region of the first member 440. To be done. That is, the first member 440 is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the plate glass 16a) of the left and right sensor device.

  In this case, the first member 440 is, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), in front of the plate glass 16a (front side of FIG. 43 (a), lower side of FIG. 43 (b)). The area in the oblique front of the irradiation area S1 (the front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610) (hereinafter referred to as the “detection area of the first sensor 610”) and the front of the plate glass 16a. And is displaced to a position partitioning an area (hereinafter, referred to as a “detection area of the second sensor 620”) diagonally forward of the irradiation area S2 (front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620). It is possible.

  As a result, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated in front of the plate glass 16a. Therefore, the second sensor 620 surely avoids the player's finger in the detection area of the first sensor 610, and the first sensor 610 surely avoids the player's hand in the detection area of the second sensor 620. it can.

  Therefore, for example, an effect that allows the player to make an alternative selection (for example, two left and right positions in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (a position corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620). The selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed at two positions corresponding to the detection region, and the player brings his or her finger closer to one of the two regions (detection positions) corresponding to the selection target. Then, when performing an effect of selecting one of them, the detection accuracy of the player's selection operation can be increased.

  Further, in the central floating unit 400, as described above, the left and right arm bodies 430 are formed to be independently displaceable (rotatable), and the arm member 444 is relatively displaceable to the first member 440 (base body 441). Since the first member 440 is vertically arranged, the first member 440 can be linearly moved up and down along the vertical direction, and the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) horizontally (see FIG. 39). Further, the stop position of the first member 440 can be biased to either the left or right direction (see FIGS. 33 and 34).

  Accordingly, the size of at least one or both of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be changed according to the movement (position) of the first member 440. Therefore, for example, in accordance with a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player moves his or her finger to search for a position (detection area) where the finger is detected. It can be performed.

  Further, for example, the first member 440 can block one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 or the detection area of the second sensor 620 to make it undetectable, so that the third symbol display device 81 Despite the fact that the player is instructed to select the selection target with his / her fingers, the first member 440 shields one side of the detection area to obstruct the player's selection operation. It can be carried out. Alternatively, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas, so that the third symbol display device 81 can be directed to display an instruction prompting the player to select the other one.

  44 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a).

  As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed of a light-transmissive material, a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) are arranged inside, and the plurality of light emitting means emit light (turn on or off). By blinking), the light transmitted through the front surface and the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442 can be emitted to the outside from the front surface and the outer peripheral surface. This allows the player to visually recognize that the entire front body 442 (front surface and outer peripheral surface) is emitting light.

  In this case, when the light emitted from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (in particular, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the light is incident. The interference between the emitted light and the light emitted from the light emitting unit occurs and the light receiving unit directly receives the incident light, resulting in erroneous detection.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the light emitted from the front body 442 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface) to the outside is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. Displacement member 530 can be displaced to a position where it can shield (a position that crosses a virtual line (broken line arrow in FIG. 44B) connecting front body 442 and each sensor 610, 620, hereinafter referred to as “shielding position”). Formed in. Therefore, when the light emitting means of the front body 442 is caused to emit light, by displacing the displacement member 530 to the shielding position, the respective sensors 610, 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 from the light emitted from the light emitting means. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensors 610 and 620 can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the displacement member 530 also serves as a unit for blocking the light emitted from the light emitting unit from being incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, so that a permanent shielding member is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide it, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, so that a space can be secured by that amount as compared with the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retracting the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for displacement of another displacement member.

  Further, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed so as to be able to move up and down between a raised position and a lowered position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and depending on the displacement position of the first member 440, The displacing member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed in the shielding position. That is, the displacement member 530 can follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530 regardless of the arrangement (elevation position) of the first member 440.

  That is, when a permanent shielding member is provided so as to cover the entire movable range of the first member 440, a large space is required for disposing the shielding member. Since the first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position according to the displacement (elevation position) of the first member 440, the displacement member 530 can be downsized. Therefore, the permanent shielding member can be eliminated, so that not only the cost of parts can be reduced and the space can be secured, but also the load of the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the relationship between the left / right sensor device 600 and the left / right rotation unit 500 will be described.

  45 (a) is a front view of the left / right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left / right sensor device 600 taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 45, the left-right rotation unit 500 is formed such that the left and right displacement members 530 are displaceable (rotatable) between a retracted position (see FIG. 7) and an extended position (see FIG. 8). Where a sensor (not shown) that detects that the left and right displacement members 530 are arranged at the retracted position and the extended position is provided, the left and right displacement members 530 are provided between the retracted position and the extended position. At the intermediate position (predetermined position), it is formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620.

  The left and right sensor device 600 is formed such that the sensors 610 and 620 can independently detect that the displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are arranged at intermediate positions (predetermined positions). Thus, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided with means for detecting the presence or absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the plate glass 16a and means for detecting the disposition of the displacement member 530 at the intermediate position. It can be combined. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is arranged at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The position at which the displacement members 530 of the left / right rotation unit 500 are detected by the respective sensors 610 and 620 of the left / right sensor device 600 may be the extended position instead of the intermediate position. It is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacing member 530 is arranged at the projecting position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method for detecting the stain D on the plate glass 16a by the left and right sensor device 600 will be described.

  46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16, and correspond to FIG. 42 (b). Note that, in FIG. 46, the path of the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated using a chain double-dashed line. In addition, in FIG. 42A, the object F existing in the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the dirt D attached to the irradiation area S1 (see FIG. 42A) in FIG. It is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, for example, when the object F (a player's finger) is present in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), the light is emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610. The light passes through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, is then reflected by the object F, and follows the same path as the outward path, and is thus received by the light receiving section of the first sensor 610. As a result, the presence of the player's fingers is detected by the first sensor 610.

  In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are directed inward (see FIG. 42), and as described above, the game board 13 is provided. It is possible to dispose them at positions deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (positions on the outer side in the width direction) across the opening (see FIG. 6), and the respective sensors 610 and 620 are visually recognized by the player. It can be hard to be done.

  However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 with respect to the plate glass 16a becomes large (the incident direction and the plate glass 16a are close to parallel to each other. Therefore, if dirt D (for example, oil of the player's hand) is attached to the plate glass 16a, the dirt D causes light to be reflected in a direction different from the outward path, and the reflected light is reflected by the first sensor 610. The light receiving part of cannot receive light. Therefore, it is impossible for the first sensor 610 to detect whether or not the dirt D is attached to the plate glass 16a.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with their light emitting portion and light receiving portion facing inward, the irradiation area S1 of the plate glass 16a is soiled. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, whereby the stain D on the irradiation area S1 on the plate glass 16a is detected. The presence or absence of adherence can be detected. The presence or absence of the stain D on the irradiation area S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light receiving section of the first sensor 610 detects the light emitted from the light emitting section of the second sensor 620.

  That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620, the dirt D is attached to the irradiation area S1, and the light receiving portion of the second sensor 620 receives the light. If not, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610, the dirt D is attached to the irradiation area S2, and the light receiving portion of the first sensor 610 causes the light emission. When no light is received, it can be determined that the dirt D does not adhere to the irradiation area S2.

  Here, it is preferable that the detection of the stain D on the plate glass 16a by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is performed in a process when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since the player has not entered the store, there is no object F (a player's finger) in front of the plate glass 16a (the detection area of each sensor 610, 620). Therefore, the object F and the dirt D are distinguished (for example, based on the difference between the path length when reflected by the object and the path length when reflected by the dirt D, a threshold is set for the time required from light emission to light reception. This is because it is not necessary to perform (providing), and the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of the stain D on the plate glass 16a can be improved accordingly.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 (a) is a side view of the container 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLVIIb in FIG. 47 (a). Note that FIG. 47 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). Further, FIGS. 47A and 47B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  In the first embodiment, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, the rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b by the transmission mechanism, but the transmission in the second embodiment is described. The mechanism is formed so that the transmission of the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the second rotating body 340b can be intermittent. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 47A and 47D, the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment has a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and the drive gear 351 is meshed with the drive gear 351 in order. The gear train includes a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355.

  The first gear 2353 differs from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the number of teeth, and the other configurations are the same. The number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 is different from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and the two gears (the first side intermediate gear 2354a and the second side intermediate gear 2354b) are axially arranged (see FIG. 47). (B) It is formed as an integrated member that is concentrically overlapped in the left-right direction.

  The first side intermediate gear 2354a is formed with teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 2353 over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (first rotating body 340a) is being rotated, the intermediate gear 2354 (first side intermediate gear 2354a and second side intermediate gear 2354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation thereof. It The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a is set to 21.

  The second side intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 2354a except for the fact that some of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a are omitted. Specifically, the second side intermediate gear 2354b has a non-meshing region in which seven teeth are omitted (removed) and a remaining region of the non-meshing region (that is, 14 teeth And a meshing region which is a region continuous in the direction) is formed.

  In the non-meshing region of the second-side intermediate gear 2354b, teeth are omitted (removed) and cannot mesh with the teeth of the second gear 2355, so that rotation transmission from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355 is prevented. To be cut off. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth of the second gear 2355 can be meshed with each other, and the rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

  In this case, the non-meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is a region formed by omitting seven teeth from the first side intermediate gear 2354a whose number of teeth is set to 21, The central angle is 120 degrees, and the meshing area is an area corresponding to the remaining 14 teeth, so the central angle is 240 degrees.

  Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in the section corresponding to the non-meshing region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are non-meshed, and the second side intermediate gear 2354b is The second gear 2355 is rotated in a section corresponding to the start-up area in which the second gear 2355 is meshed. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 240 degrees.

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b. 49 and 50 are schematic side views of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b showing transition states when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated. 49 (e) to FIG. 50A to 50D in the states shown as Nos. 1 to 5 are shown in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 9, respectively.

  48 to 50, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by the reference symbols "A to C" in the second rotation, as in the case of the first embodiment. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by reference numerals "A 'to C'", respectively.

  Here, the state where the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition position (the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (a)). ) Is hereinafter referred to as "initial state". In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set to the boundary position on one side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the start of the non-meshing region). (See FIG. 47 (a)).

  48. 1 and FIG. 49 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotary body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotary body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 1 "A ', A", first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 2354 (the first gear). Due to the action of the non-meshing region in the second side intermediate gear 2354b), the rotation is not transmitted and the rotation state is maintained.

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  48. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated by 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)), and accordingly, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated by 120 degrees. Since the intermediate gear 2354 is rotated with respect to the second gear 2355, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 is arranged at the boundary position on the other side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the start end of the meshing region, the end of the non-meshing region). To be done.

  48. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the meshing area (the first half 120 degrees area of the central angle 240 degrees).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49C, the second rotating body 340b positions the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. As a result, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  48. 3 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 ° due to the action of the meshing region (the latter half of the central angle of 240 °, which is 120 °).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49D, the second rotating body 340b positions the third display plate 343C at the visual recognition position. As a result, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  48. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)), and along with this, the intermediate gear 2354 also becomes 360. Since the intermediate gear 2354 is rotated with respect to the second gear 2355, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 is arranged at the boundary position on one side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the start of the non-meshing region). To be done.

  The subsequent steps are substantially the same as the above-described aspect (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (a) to the state shown in No. 3 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (c)). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table makes one round from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, No. 1 in FIG. 4 to No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 6, it may be considered by replacing the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No in FIG. 48). .5 “C ′, B”) and a sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In addition, in FIG. 7-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 9, it can be considered by replacing the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No in FIG. 48). .7 "B ', A"), an eighth combination (No.8 "B', B" in FIG. 48) and a ninth combination (No.9 "C ', C" in FIG.48) are formed. be able to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is formed as a gear train composed of a plurality of gears, The first gear (intermediate gear 2354) has a meshing region that meshes with the mating gear (second gear 2355) to transmit the rotation, and a meshing region that does not mesh with the mating gear and blocks the rotation transmission. A non-occlusal region is formed.

  As a result, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so that the combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form 9 combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective effect by rotating the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  Particularly, according to the present embodiment, there are two states: a state in which the second rotating body 340b is stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a and a state in which both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. A state can be formed. That is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, and the stop of the second rotating body 340b can be released to restart the rotation, so that the first rotating body 340a and The interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of figures of the second rotating body 340b can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directivity in the rotation direction, it is possible to switch the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 48 by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 48) is formed. 48, the table of FIG. 48 is moved forward (downward in FIG. 48) to reveal the eighth combination, and the table of FIG. 48 is moved backward (upward in FIG. 48). Then, the ninth combination can be revealed.

  As a result, as in the former case, No. 1 in FIG. 7 to No. In the transition to 8, the second combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) of the first rotation body 340a is rotated while the second rotation body 340b is stopped to reveal the eighth combination. (1) "B '" is already displayed on one side, the other is switched from "A" to "B" to display "B', B", and the latter As in the case of FIG. 9 to No. In the shift to 8, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are both rotated to expose the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) (that is, one side). And both the other figures are switched and "B ', B" is revealed) and an effect can be arbitrarily selected and executed according to the game state.

  Further, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees seven times, whereas in the latter case, the rotation of the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees twice. Since it suffices to perform it, a desired combination of figures can be promptly revealed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a non-meshing region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (second side intermediate gear 2354b), and rotation and stop of the second rotating body 340b are performed while the first rotating body 340a is rotating. Are switched, and the combination of figures is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-meshing region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are provided with the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, respectively, and the graphics drawn on each outer peripheral surface are arranged at intervals of 120 degrees, it is possible to perform non-coupling. The formation range (center angle) of the area is set to 120 degrees.

  As a result, the phases of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b do not shift, so that the combination of the graphic of the first rotary body 340a and the graphic of the second rotary body 340b is used as an element in the table shown in FIG. The length can be shortened (the number of stages of the table can be reduced). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b required to bring out a desired combination of figures. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required to bring out a desired combination of figures.

  However, the formation range of the non-meshing region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set so as not to correspond to the intervals between the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, when the formation range of the non-meshing region is set to the range of the central angle of 108 degrees, a phase shift of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is generated as in the case of the first embodiment. be able to. Therefore, while it is possible to form a plurality of combinations of graphics (for example, 9 combinations), it is possible to form a state in which the graphics are not combined, so that the player can visually recognize the deviation of the graphics (the combination is not established).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. 51 (a) is a side view of the container 330 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 51 (b) is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a). Note that FIG. 51 (a) corresponds to FIG. 18 (a). Further, FIGS. 51A and 51B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the non-interlocking region and the interlocking region are formed in the intermediate gear 2354 at each one position has been described. Two mating regions are formed each. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51D, the transmission mechanism according to the third embodiment has a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and the drive gear 351 is meshed with the drive gear 351 in order. The gear train includes a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355.

  The first gear 3353 is different from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 is different from the second gear 355 in the first embodiment in the number of teeth and the thickness dimension, and other configurations are the same. The number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355, and the two gears (the first side intermediate gear 3354a and the second side intermediate gear 3354b) are axially arranged (see FIG. 51). (B) It is formed as an integrated member that is concentrically overlapped in the left-right direction.

  On the first side intermediate gear 3354a, teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first gear 3353 are formed over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 3353 (first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 3354 (first side intermediate gear 3354a and second side intermediate gear 3354b) is always rotated in synchronization with the rotation thereof. It The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is set to 35.

  The second side intermediate gear 3354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 3354a except for the fact that some of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a are omitted. Specifically, in the second side intermediate gear 3354b, the first non-meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2, which are regions in which seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth From the first meshing region Y1 and the first meshing region Y1 that is located in one of the meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2 and is a region in which seven teeth are circumferentially continuous. A second interlocking region Y2, which is a region where the 14 teeth are circumferentially continuous and is located on the other side between the first interlocking region X1 and the second non-interlocking region X2 with the phases being different by 180 degrees. And are formed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is rotated 120 degrees in the first meshing region Y1. At the same time, in the second meshing region Y2, the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) can be rotated 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region X2, while the second rotating body 340b (second gear 3355) is stopped, the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353). ) Can each be rotated 120 degrees.

  Next, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the third embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a table showing a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 53 and 54 are schematic side views of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b showing transition states when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated, respectively. 53A to 53D are shown in FIG. 54 (a) and 54 (b) in the state shown as Nos. 1 to 4 in FIG. The states shown as 5 and 6 respectively correspond.

  52 to 54, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are referred to by the reference symbols "A to C" to perform the second rotation. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by reference numerals "A 'to C'", respectively.

  Here, in the initial state in the third embodiment, as in the case of the second embodiment, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively set to the visible position. It is in a placed state. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first meshing region Y1). (The start end of the non-interlocking region X1) (see FIG. 51 (a)).

  No. 2 in FIG. 1 and FIG. 53 (a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 1 "A ', A", first combination), the first rotary body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotary body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (the first gear). Due to the action of the first non-meshing region X1 in the second side intermediate gear 3354b), the rotation is not transmitted and the rotation state is maintained.

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53B, the second rotary body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position. As a result, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and accordingly, the second gear 3355 is rotated. The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is at the boundary position between the first non-meshing region X1 and the second non-meshing region Y2 (the start end of the second meshing region Y2, the end of the first non-meshing region X1). Will be placed.

  No. 2 in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth in the first half of 14 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 53C, the second rotating body 340b positions the second display plate 343B at the visual recognition position. As a result, the third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  No. 2 in FIG. 3 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth in the latter half of 14 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53D, the second rotating body 340b positions the third display plate 343C at the visual recognition position. As a result, the fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)), and with this, the second gear 3355 is rotated. The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is arranged at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-meshing region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the start of the second non-meshing region). To be done.

  No. 2 in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). Due to the action of the second non-meshing region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b), the rotation is not transmitted and the rotation state is maintained.

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), the second rotary body 340b is maintained in a state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position. As a result, the fifth combination (No. 5 “C ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52. 5 and the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated by 480 degrees (120 degrees × 4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). , The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is the boundary position between the second non-meshing region X2 and the first meshing region Y1 (the end of the second non-meshing region X, the first meshing region). It is arranged at the start point) of the region Y1.

  No. 2 in FIG. 5 and the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b moves to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). It is rotated by 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing region Y2 (7 teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 54 (b), the second rotating body 340b positions the first display plate 343A at the visual recognition position. As a result, the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  52. 6 and the state shown in FIG. 54 (b), the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase with respect to the second gear 3355 is such that the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the first meshing region Y1 It is set to the terminal end, the starting end of the first non-meshing region X1 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Therefore, hereinafter, substantially the same as the above-described aspect (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 (a) to the state shown in No. 6 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 54 (b)). The same aspect is repeated. As a result, nine combinations can be formed in one cycle (one round from the start point to the end point of the table). In this embodiment, the number of stages in the table for one cycle is 15.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is formed as a gear train composed of a plurality of gears, The first gear (intermediate gear 3354) has a meshing region (first and second meshing regions Y1 and Y2) that meshes with the gear (second gear 3355) of the other party and transmits rotation, and Non-meshing regions (first and second non-meshing regions Y1 and Y2) that are non-meshing with respect to the gear and block transmission of rotation are formed.

  As a result, the second rotating body 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotating body 340a, so that the combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form 9 combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combinations can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective effect by rotating the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the component cost.

  Particularly, according to the present embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-meshing regions (first and second non-meshing regions X1 and X2) that block the transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. The teeth are arranged in a distributed manner, and the meshing regions and the non-mating regions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, in No. 2 of FIG. 4 to No. As in the state shown by 7, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be stopped continuously by two types of figures. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation and interest in visually recognizing the combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Further, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directivity in the rotation direction, it is possible to switch the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 52 by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 4 to No. By switching the traveling direction between forward and reverse between 7 and 7, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the rotational speeds of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b differently.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 (a) is a top view of the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVb in FIG. 55 (a). 55C is a rear view of the central floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55A. Note that, in FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of the base body 410, the cover body 420, and the like is omitted, and only main components necessary for description are illustrated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430 has been described, but the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment are described. 4449 are formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. In addition, the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), in the central floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, sliding grooves 4439 are formed in the distal ends of the pair of arm bodies 4430, and A pair of connecting pins 4449 inserted into the respective sliding grooves 4439 are provided so as to project from the back surface of the first member 4440.

  The sliding groove 4439 is formed as a linearly extending opening in the shape of a long hole in a front view, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connecting pin 4449 is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section that is slidable along the sliding groove 441a. The arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are relatively movably coupled to each other via the sliding groove 4439 and the coupling pin 4449. A collar having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 as a retaining member.

  As described above, according to the central floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the pair of arm bodies 4430 and the first member 4440 are formed by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. In the structure for connecting, the connecting pin 4449 is projected from the first member 4440, and the sliding groove 4439 is formed in the pair of arm bodies 4430. Therefore, by adjusting the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm bodies 4430, The direction (inclination angle) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

  That is, when the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped and the first member 4440 is reciprocated (rolls) to the left and right by inertia (action of inertia) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated). When the first member 4440 is reciprocated to the left and right (laterally swayed) by the action of the reaction force generated by (), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted to adjust the rotation angle of the pair of members. By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocation of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially V-shape, as described above, since the rotational component can be imparted, the first member 440 is Not only linear motion, but also a combination of linear motion and rotary motion makes it possible to reciprocate left and right (roll).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (opposite angle of the V-shape) is adjusted. As a result, the mode of the reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed.

  For example, by decreasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (decreasing the facing angle of the C-shape), the rotational component is increased, and the reciprocating motion (rolling) of the first member 4440 to the left and right (lateral vibration) is increased. The rate of rotary movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (increasing the facing angle of the C-shape), the rotational component is reduced, and the first member 4440 is reciprocated to the left and right (sway). The rate of linear movement can be increased.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), since the pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged in a straight line, the rotation component is not generated and the first member 4440 is moved to the left and right. The reciprocating motion (rolling) of can be performed only by a linear motion. That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the first member 4440 horizontally moves in the left-right direction.

  As described above, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 is changed to change the mode of reciprocal movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right (the mode including the rotational component and the mode including the rotational component). However, it is not possible in the first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (base body 441), and it is possible to achieve both the aspect of the linear component only). This is possible only when the sliding groove 4439 is formed at the tip. Thereby, the movement of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  Next, the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 (a) and 57 (a) are front views of the central floating unit 400 and the left / right rotating unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are the central floating unit 400. 9 is a cross-sectional rear view of the left / right rotation unit 5500. FIG.

  56 (b) and 57 (b) correspond to FIG. 41 (c). Further, in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. is omitted, and the main components necessary for the description are shown. Only the configuration is shown.

  The left / right rotation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment is arranged such that the overhang position is lower than the left / right rotation unit 500 (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Therefore, when the left / right rotating unit 5500 is placed in the projecting position while the central floating unit 400 is in the lowered position, the displacement member 530 of the left / right rotating unit 5500 causes the first member 440 of the central floating unit 400 ( It is possible to push down the pair of cylindrical portions 441b that are erected on the back surface of the base body 441).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are alternately arranged at the projecting position in the state where the central floating unit 400 is arranged at the descending position (one of them is stretched). It is possible to reciprocate (roll) the first member 440 left and right by arranging the first member 440 in the extended position and slightly retracting the other from the extended position.

  In this case, the operation of alternately arranging the left and right displacement members 530 at the extended position, the operation of retracting from the extended position, and the reciprocating motion (lateral vibration) of the first member 440 to the left and right. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) so that and are linked (synchronized). The whole of the first member 440 and the left and right displacement members 530 can be interlocked to form a motion that shakes up and down and left and right, and the player can recognize a large motion with a sense of unity.

  Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 collides with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b), and the reaction (inertia) generated by the collision causes the first member 440 to reciprocate laterally (sway) and at the same time. After the lapse of time, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then be caused to collide with the first member 440 (cylindrical portion 441b) so that the first member 440 continues to reciprocate leftward and rightward (sway). The player can be recognized by emphasizing the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right.

  Thus, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated left and right without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is moved relative to the arm body 430 by inertia (action of inertial force) when the upward rotation or the downward rotation of the arm body 430 of the central floating unit 400 is stopped. Not only the form of reciprocating left and right, but the form of reciprocating the first member 440 left and right by utilizing the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 without utilizing the inertial force resulting from the displacement of the arm body 430. Can also be formed.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the rotating body elevating / lowering unit 300, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b each include three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the three surfaces Although the case where the player visually recognizes the combination is described, the invention is not limited to this, and the number n of the display surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the number m of the display surfaces of the second rotating body 340b are not limited to this. It may be set to a different value.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the rotating body lifting unit 300, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is the drive gear 351, the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353. , 2353, 3353, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and the second gear 355. , 2355, 3355 may be formed at least.

  For example, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354 are disposed on the first rotating body 340a, and the second gears 355, 2355, and 3355 are engaged with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, and 3354 in the second rotating body 340b. And the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or the second gears 355, 2355, 3355. According to this structure, the number of gears can be reduced and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the rotating body elevating / lowering unit 300, the base portion 331 is provided with the reflecting portion RF on the front surface (inner surface) of the portion forming the back surface (the inner side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B) of the housing body 330. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reflection part RF may be provided in another part. Examples of the other portion include the inner surface of the portion of the base body 331 that forms the upper surface or the lower surface of the container 330. Since each of these surfaces is a surface facing the outer peripheral surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, the light emitted from the LED 344 is directed to the player. It can be reflected so as to be visible.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section, when the rotary bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the above-mentioned reflection is accompanied by the rotation. It is possible to increase or decrease the gap between each inner surface of the base body 441 on which the plate RF is disposed and the outer peripheral surface of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (the vertical gap in FIG. 18B), and at the same time, the reflector plate RF is provided. It is possible to change the facing angle between the display plates 343A to 343C of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b with respect to the inner surfaces of the base body 441 arranged. Thereby, the mode of the reflected light can be changed for the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmissive portion PN as the reflected light from the reflective portion RF.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the rotating shafts of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged parallel to each other in the rotating body lifting unit 300, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the orthogonal It may be one that does. This allows the player to displace (move) the figures respectively drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second outer peripheral surface 340b in directions orthogonal to each other. In this case, each of the display plates 344A to 344C is preferably formed in a square shape when viewed from the front. This is because when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged side by side, a sense of unity of the figures drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces can be formed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the number of the rotating bodies (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b) arranged in one housing 330 in the rotating body lifting unit 300 is two has been described. However, the number is not limited to this, and may be three or more.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the base end sides of the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotatably supported by the base body 410 in the central floating unit 400 has been described. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be slidably displaced with respect to the base body 410. Since the left and right arm bodies 430 can be independently displaced also by the slide displacement, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed as in the case of each of the above embodiments.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that the left and right arm bodies 430 are displaced (rotated) and inertial force is applied. The case where the first member 440 is displaceable relative to the arm member 430 when the arm member 430 is acted on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm body 430 and the first member 440 may be moved relative to each other. The displaceably connected structure may be another structure.

  As another structure, for example, the distal end of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, a rubber-like elastic body, urethane, a metal coil spring / torsion spring, a leaf spring, etc.). Then, a structure that allows relative displacement by elastic deformation of the elastic member, the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are rotatably connected by a shaft and a shaft hole, and relative displacement is caused by rotation of the shaft relative to the shaft hole. And a structure in which the tip of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by a spherical ball and a stud that makes spherical contact with the ball, and relative displacement is possible by rotation of the ball with respect to the stud. A structure in which the distal end of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or a plurality of link mechanisms, and relative displacement is enabled by deformation of the link mechanisms, and a part or all of these are assembled. Align were structures, and the like are exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation method when disposing the central floating unit 400 in the ascending position or the descending position has been described, but each of these operation methods is an example, and it is naturally possible to adopt other operation methods. .. Therefore, for example, in the operation method shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, a part thereof may be replaced with another operation method.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, when the first member 440 is reciprocally moved (sways) left and right by inertia (action of inertia), the left and right arm bodies 430 are maintained in a stopped state. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm bodies 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) with a predetermined amplitude before the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right converges. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the first member 440 is reciprocated to the left and right without causing the player to recognize the movement of the arm body 430, and the reciprocation due to inertia occurs. It is possible for the player to recognize that it is continued.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the central floating unit 400, the case where the arm member 444 has a symmetrical shape and the center of gravity of the arm member 444 is located at the center in the left-right direction has been described. The center of gravity may be eccentric to either side in the left-right direction. According to this, the reaction force applied to the base body 441 in accordance with the rotation of the arm member 444 can be increased, and the reciprocal movement (lateral rolling) of the first member 440 to the left and right can be increased and a change can be given.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the central floating unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500 and 5500, the displacement member 530 is brought into direct contact with the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) to move the first member 440. Although the case of restricting or causing movement of the first member 440 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 are not in contact with each other, The same operation may be formed to be executable.

  Specifically, the magnet is arranged on one of the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) or the displacement member 530, and the magnet is disposed on one of the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or an iron member is provided and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member, so that the first member 440 moves. A structure for restricting the movement or for causing the first member 440 to move is exemplified.

  According to this, the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 can be made non-contact with each other to avoid contact with each other, and thus damage due to collision can be suppressed. When an iron member is disposed on the other of the first member 440 (the tubular portion 441b of the base body 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440. , And the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440 are balanced so that the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530. Put in contact.

<Regarding control configuration>
Next, with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. 111, a first control example of the control configuration in the first embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the first control example>
Next, a first control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 111. FIG. 58A is a diagram showing the frame button 22 and the touch switch 290. The frame button 22 has a push-down section that the player pushes down, and when the push-down section is pushed down a predetermined amount, the limit type switch is turned on. The pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the frame button 22 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and also at the next monitoring timing (2 ms later) when it is determined to be "ON" from the "OFF" state. If it is determined to be "ON", it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that it is erroneously determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed when it is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like. In addition, when the frame button 22 is not continuously pressed, that is, the state is switched from the “ON” state to the “OFF” state, and the “OFF” state is determined at the next monitoring timing, the frame button 22 is pressed. Is determined to have been canceled.

  The touch switch 290 is arranged close to the frame button 22 on the front side. The touch switch 290 has a sensor portion arranged substantially on the same surface as the upper surface of the upper plate 17, and infrared rays are radiated from the sensor portion. The touch switch 290 is configured to turn on when the infrared rays hit an object and are reflected. There is. Therefore, the player can turn on the sensor by bringing the hand or the like close to the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 to a predetermined distance. In order to turn on the touch switch 290, bringing the hand or the like closer to the sensor unit is called operating the touch switch 290.

  Similarly to the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 also monitors the state of the touch switch 290 at predetermined intervals (2 ms in this control example), and the state is determined to be “OFF” and then changed to the “ON” state. Then, when it is further determined to be "ON", it is determined that the touch switch 290 has been operated by the player, and processing such as changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The word "touch" is shown on the upper surface of the sensor portion of the touch switch 290 so that the player can easily recognize that the touch switch 290 is arranged.

  FIG. 58B is a diagram showing the configuration of the selection switch 291. The selection switch 291 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22 and is composed of a push switch similar to the frame button 22. The selection switch 291 includes an upper selection switch 291a formed of an upward triangle and a lower selection switch 291b formed of a downward triangle. The selection switch 291 is used by being pressed by the player when mainly adjusting the volume. By pressing the upper selection switch 291a, the volume is set to be high. Also, by pressing the lower selection switch 291b, the volume is set to be low. When each switch is pressed and turned on, a signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 so that it can be determined that the switch has been pressed.

  On the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 59, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the vertical direction. Each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 is composed of a main symbol composed of characters and numbers, and a sub symbol (blank symbol) provided between the main symbols. These symbol columns are scrolled in the direction of arrow X (from right to left) with periodicity to perform variable display. Especially in the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, and in the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in the descending order.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right for each symbol column Z1 to Z3. The left column part of this display area is set as an effective line L1, and at each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the upper symbol column Z1, the lower symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. To be done. If the combination of the big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the middle row of the display area is the effective line L2, the right row is the effective line L3, and the diagonal line from the lower left to the upper right is the effective line L4. , A diagonal line from the upper left to the lower right is composed of the activated line L5 and a total of five activated lines, and even if the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

  Although omitted in FIG. 59, in the display area of the third symbol display device, a sub display area is provided in addition to the above-described display area (main display area) in which the third symbol is displayed. The sub display area is provided horizontally below the main display area, and is further equally divided into three small areas in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area on the left side is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, and other small areas. The area is an area for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area of the sub display area. In the small area, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count patterns are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is four. Indicates a sphere. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  Further, in the present control example, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the symbol only attached to the symbol in the case of super-reach, etc. There is a case where the display area is enlarged and the display area of the small display area disappears. With this configuration, it is possible to display a display mode with freshness to the player.

  In addition, in the present control example, the ball to the first winning opening 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of holding balls in the small area, the number of holding balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of holding balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a display mode of the left / right selection effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 60A is a schematic diagram showing the states of the third symbol display device 81, the central guiding unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect is executed. When the left-right selection effect is executed, first, the central floating unit 400 covers the common area where the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area (detection area) S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap. To descend.

  When the central floating unit 400 descends, the central floating unit 400 that descends blocks the light emitted from the left and right sensor devices 600, and the light does not reach the glass plate 16a. As a result, the surface of the glass plate 16a corresponding to the position where the central floating unit 400 descends is excluded from the detection areas of the left and right sensor devices, and the irradiation area (detection area) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are removed. The irradiation area (detection area) is separated.

  The contents to be selected by the player are displayed in the display areas corresponding to the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 divided in this way (in FIG. 60, the display area corresponding to the irradiation area S1 shows the sunset background, the irradiation area). A starry sky background is displayed in the display area corresponding to S2). With this configuration, the player can make an arbitrary selection by looking at the display content displayed in the display area and touching the glass plate 16a corresponding to the display screen. Further, the area where the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap and the area in the vicinity of the overlapping area are excluded from the irradiation areas of the left and right sensor devices 600 by the central floating unit 400. Since the irradiation area S1 and the irradiation area S2 are completely separated, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the side not selected by the player detects the finger of the player.

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the left and right sensor device 600 and the descent control of the central floating unit 400 in this control example, when an effect that only detects whether the player is touching the glass plate 16a is executed, Since the left and right sensor devices 600 are provided so that the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 partially overlap, it is possible to detect the player's fingers in a wide area. When the player performs an effect of selecting either left or right, the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 can be completely separated, and the player can It is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the non-selected side detects the player's finger. Thus, for a plurality of effects for detecting the fingers of the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early by constructing a detection situation suitable for each effect.

  In the present control example, the central floating unit 400 is configured to realize the left / right selection effect by dividing the irradiation regions (detection regions) S1 and S2 of the left / right sensor device 600, but the left and right are configured using other configurations. It may be configured such that the selection effect can be realized. Another example in which the left / right selection effect can be realized will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state of the third symbol display device 81, the central guiding unit 400, and the left / right sensor device 600 when the left / right selection effect in another example is executed. In this another example, when the left / right selection process is executed, the central floating unit 400 is first lowered so as to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the position information of the central floating unit 400 is calculated by acquiring information from the acceleration sensor provided in the central floating unit 400.

  Then, based on the calculated position information, a predetermined display area, which is not covered by the central floating unit 400, is set as the left / right selection display area in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the left / right selection display area is left / right. Display the selection screen. Next, the left / right selection device 600 is changed so that the irradiation positions (detection positions) S1 and S2 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 that form the left / right sensor device 600 overlap the left / right selection screen.

  According to the configuration of the another example described above, the left / right selection displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the movement of the variable member (central floating unit 400) that covers the display region of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to change the display position of the screen and the irradiation position (detection position) of the left and right sensor device 600, there is an effect that the selection operation by the player in the left and right selection effect can be reliably detected.

  In this example, the position of the variable member is calculated by using the acceleration sensor. However, the position of the variable member is not limited to this, and the position of the variable member may be calculated from the execution status of the program for controlling the driving of the variable member. Good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect period (mode C) will be described. 55 minutes after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a presentation called a pet time called a pet time and a touch switch 290 is displayed as a time production period (mode C) of 5 minutes. The display mode is displayed. In this period, the display mode (see FIG. 59) displayed in the normal production period (mode A) is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 61. The main display area in which the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed in the lower right, and the dog character is displayed in the other areas. Then, in the lower left display area, an effect is displayed that prompts the player to operate the touch center 290 to display an effect of calling the dog nearby (an effect of enlarging and displaying the dog). The character "call" is displayed to inform the player that the effect of calling the dog is displayed when the touch switch 290 is operated.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing an example of a "stroking effect" mode as a contact effect. In the “stroking effect”, the hand is brought close to a distance where the touch switch 290 can be turned on, and the periphery of the frame button 22 is urged to turn on (operate) the touch switch 290. When the touch switch 290 is turned on, the design imitating the hand displayed on the dog's head is also rotated and displayed so that the dog's head is stroked, and the dog is variably displayed with a happy expression.

  By doing so, the player's hand moves as if he were stroking the dog, so that the player can feel as if he was stroking the dog. In addition, an indicator is displayed on the upper part of the display mode for notifying the operation, a predetermined lottery is performed based on the player's stroking action, and the right side of the display screen is displayed according to the result of the lottery. The displayed indicator rises.

  The indicator displayed on the right side of the display screen displays the fish school reliability until the arrival of the next time effect period (effect period based on the time information acquired from RTC 292). That is, the contact effect executed during the time effect period is an effect for setting the fish school reliability, and by operating a large number of touch switches 290 during the contact effect, the reliability of the fish group until the next time effect period. It is configured to be set to a higher degree.

  With such a configuration, the player can change the reliability of the effect by his / her own operation, so that the player can actively participate in the game and suppress the tiredness of the game. Becomes

  In this control example, “stroking effect” is described as the contact effect, but a plurality of contact effect contents may be provided. In the case where a plurality of effect contents are provided, it is preferable to provide an effect in which the indicator has a high rate of rise, but the indicator is lowered if the indicator is operated by mistake so that the player can select the game property. As such an effect, for example, "brushing effect" can be considered. In the "brushing effect", the indicator can be greatly raised by successfully brushing the displayed torso of the dog, and the indicator can be lowered if the dog's face is mistakenly brushed.

  In addition, an effect may be provided in which the indicator descends when the player performs a contact effect. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to arbitrarily set settings such as intentionally lowering the fish school reliability and increasing the appearance frequency.

  In addition, a plurality of types of dogs may be prepared, and the degree of raising the indicator and the type of performance that can be set may be changed depending on the type of dog. When preparing a plurality of types of dogs, for example, the types of dogs that appear may be changed based on a plurality of missions and game contents in the normal period. With such a configuration, in order to obtain a desired privilege during the contact effect, the game in the normal period is concentrated and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  In addition, when the touch switch 290 is operated by rotating the periphery of the frame button 22, it is generally assumed that when the touch switch 290 is operated quickly, the touch switch 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms to 300 ms. Therefore, when the interval at which the touch switch 290 is turned on is 151 ms to 500 ms including 200 ms to 300 ms, the indicator is set to be most easily raised. Therefore, more privilege can be given to the player who operates the touch switch 290 quickly by the correct operation. Further, in this "stroking effect", the player does not increase the level of the indicator for the player who keeps the touch switch 290 turned on all the time, that is, the player who just holds his hand over the touch switch 290. did. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in the correct operation.

  FIG. 62B is a diagram showing an example of the end screen of the “contact effect”. By operating the touch switch 290 in the “contact time” (see FIG. 62 (a)) which is the “contact effect”, it is notified that the reliability of the school of fish has reached 70%. In addition, when the determination result is a pending storage of a big hit in the hold determination memory stored at the end of the “contact time”, the game result of the “contact time” is ignored and “the reliability of the school of fish is 100”. % ”May be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the player interested until the end of the effect, and it is possible to suppress tiredness of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a display mode of volume setting during variable display will be described. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the volume setting screen is displayed during the third symbol variable display. In this control example, even when the variable display of the third symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, the volume can be set based on the operation of the player as long as the reach is established. It is configured as follows.

  If the frame button 22 is operated while the variable display of the third symbol is being executed, the volume setting screen is displayed in a layer above the variable screen of the third symbol. The volume is adjusted by operating the selection switch 291 (the upper selection switch 291a and the lower selection switch 291b) while the volume setting screen is displayed. The volume setting screen displays the current volume level, the characters "volume setting" indicating that the volume can be set, and a mark prompting the user to operate the operation switch 291.

  In this volume setting screen, the selection switch 291 is not operated for a predetermined period of time after the changing third symbol is in the reach state or after the volume setting is enabled (after the volume setting screen is displayed). In case, or when the operation to complete the volume setting is performed, it is erased.

  As described above, in the present control example, since the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, the volume can be adjusted while listening to the voice during the game (while listening to the game volume). it can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the problem that the volume is adjusted when the third symbol does not change and the game volume becomes unexpected when the variable display of the third symbol is started.

  In this control example, the current volume level is displayed on the volume setting screen, but in addition to this, the game volume currently output with respect to the maximum value of the game volume output by the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. The volume value may be displayed so that the player can relatively understand how much. With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the volume based on the currently output game volume and volume value, and further reduce the problem that unexpected game volume is output during the game. Is possible.

  Further, when such a configuration is used, it is advisable to display it so that the player can grasp the maximum value of the game sound volume in the fluctuation display currently being executed. With this configuration, the player can detect in advance that a loud sound will be generated in the variable display this time, and the volume can be adjusted in advance. In addition, by displaying the maximum value of the game sound volume in the currently displayed change display, the player can predict the result of the hit / miss judgment, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, if the result of the hit / miss determination is a predetermined result such as a big hit, the volume setting screen may not be displayed even if the player operates the frame button 22, and the volume may not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to add a change based on the game result to the normally performed volume adjustment operation, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in FIG. 63, the volume setting screen in the case where the third symbol is changed is shown, but the title of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed by continuing the state in which the third symbol is not changed for a predetermined time. The volume setting screen is displayed even when the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed. In this case, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the demo screen was displayed, or when a predetermined operation was performed during the demo screen, the volume setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81, etc. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the change type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 84). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the holding balls of the special symbol, and the special symbol holding ball execution of the special symbol. Area is provided. In each area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64.

  Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a sphere passes through each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the gate 66 or 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1. However, when it coincides with the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and a high probability that the jackpot of a special symbol is higher than that at a low probability (special). It is divided into two types, ie, a period for which the symbol has a high probability state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed at a low probability of a special symbol and at a high probability of a special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability of special symbols (see FIG. 66 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability of special symbols (see FIG. 66 (a)) are mainly It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In this control example, two types of “big hit A” and “big hit B” are set, and one of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. It is stored. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value "0-9" is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/30”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, which is set in the big hit type selection table (not shown), the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 59" is "big hit A". When the value is “60 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value), the random number value for determining the big hit type of the special symbol is set by the big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)), This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 84) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Next, a mechanism in which main controller 110 selects a fluctuation pattern and voice lamp controller 113 determines a detailed fluctuation pattern based on a fluctuation pattern command from main controller 110 will be described. In the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, variation pattern selection tables for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol are set respectively as shown in FIGS. 69 to 70.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the sound lamp control device 113 measures the time from when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on based on the time measurement data measured by the RTC 292, and the normal time of 54 minutes is measured. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set. It Although the details of each period will be described later, even if the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected by the period may be different depending on the set period. Is set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effect is composed of the change time indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the change time of each effect, the judgment result, and the rough change of the effect. The contents (reach, super-reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With this configuration, main controller 110 does not need to determine individual fluctuation patterns, and can reduce control addition. Further, it is possible to suppress the data amount of the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The variation pattern selection table is configured to select each variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol in which the variation is started and the current effect mode. Here, the fluctuation pattern to be determined is to roughly determine the type of fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time. "Normal reach" and "super reach" are stipulated as variation patterns that are selected when the hit / miss determination result common to "big hit A" and "big hit B" is a big hit. A value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and if the result of the judgment is a hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. If the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of holdings. Here, when the hit / no hit determination result is a hit, the variation pattern of “super reach” is set to be more easily selected than “normal reach”. Therefore, if the result of the winning / disapproval determination is a win, the variation pattern of the “super reach” is executed and the frequency of the jackpot increases, and the player wins the jackpot when the variation pattern of the “super reach” is selected. Easy to have expectations.

  The normal reach jackpot variation pattern, which is the variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot, goes through the reach display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2 fluctuates for a predetermined time. After the display, it is a variable display mode in which the same symbol as the main symbol in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed. The variation pattern of the "normal reach" jackpot is composed of a relatively short variation time compared to the variation pattern of "super reach" which will be described later.

  Similar to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, the super reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are the variation patterns of the “super reach” jackpot, are displayed in the reach display mode, and subsequently, the characters and the like are displayed to display the reach display mode. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the same symbol as the symbol displayed in is executed. The variation pattern of "super reach" is composed of a variation time that is relatively longer than the variation pattern of "normal reach".

  Next, as a variation pattern to be selected when the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is out, as a variation pattern for detachment, "short time out (for short time)", "long time out (for short time)" ”,“ Normal reach off ”,“ Super reach off ”are defined. The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of "short-time deviation", is composed of a fluctuation time (7000 ms) shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode, and is the main symbol for a predetermined time. After the variable is displayed, the display mode in which the main symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2 is executed. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation”, has a longer fluctuation time (10000 ms) than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach out variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of "normal reach out", has a different display mode in which the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach display pattern with respect to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern. This is a display mode showing that the configured lottery result is out of order. This normal-reach-out variation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than a super-reach-out variation pattern, which will be described later, when the hit / miss determination result is out. In addition, the super-reach-out variation pattern, which is “super-reach-out”, is a different display mode in that it is finally displayed in the display mode indicating the out-of-range for various super-reach jackpot variation patterns.

  In addition, if the result of the determination whether or not the special symbol is out, the variation pattern to be selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4. The fluctuation type counter CS1 may be allocated to each fluctuation pattern so that the ratios of the above are different.

  For example, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of “short-time deviation”, and the fluctuation pattern may not be selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the variation time of the variation pattern selected becomes relatively long, and during that time, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first winning opening 64 and the variation of the special symbol. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the period in which the game is stopped (the period in which the game lottery is not executed).

  In addition, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, it is preferable to set a high rate of selecting the variation pattern of “short time deviation”. Accordingly, when the number of held balls is close to the upper limit number of 3 to 4, a short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected. It is possible to suppress the problem that becomes.

  The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, and is normally stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. In the case where the value of the random number to be a hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a probability of being a normal symbol from that low probability. It is divided into two types, one for high high probability time (the period when the symbol is in a time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. Furthermore, the type of the normal symbol hit is set to normal hit and long time hit, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, the normal hit of the normal symbol is a normal game state (low-probability game state), in the big hit game state, the operation in which the first electric auditors product 640a is operated in the open state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is 1 It is about to be executed once. In addition, during the time saving, during the probability variation period, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state for the opening time of 2 seconds is about to be repeated twice.

  When the ball is passing through the through gate 66 or 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device (not shown). In, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) Is displayed as a light. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the first electric auditors'sip 640a is normally opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first electric accessory 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”. Further, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "21 to 204", the first electric auditors product 640a is opened for "1 second × 2 times" per long time.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 66 (c)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, it is attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the first electric auditors product 640a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first electric accessory 640a is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 84) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 83). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 82) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d. It has a time saving medium counter 203e, a probability variation flag 203f, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first hit. The respective values of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

  Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). The vacant areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the variable display (third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64. This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed in (4) up to 4 times. This special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S404 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 77).

  The value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 77, see S405 of FIG. 79). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and holds the variable display hold ball in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is a variable display holding sphere number (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) which is performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 66 or 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times up to four times. This normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is set to an initial value of zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the number of holding spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 80).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (of FIG. 81). S703: No).

  The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. This time saving medium counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, the lottery of the special symbol is performed in the main controller 110, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is set. To be done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many times the time saving medium counter 203e is.

  The probability variation flag 203f is a flag that is set to ON when the gaming state is probability variation.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device (not shown), a second symbol holding lamp (not shown), a specific winning opening. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of 65a as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 connects via the input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the touch switch 290, the selection switch 291 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents of, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a SW announcement selection table 222b, a school of fish selection table 222c, and a swinging motion table 222d. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223c, the variation start flag 223d, the stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, time effect execution flag 223g, throwing time storage area 223h, start period flag 223i2, SW effective time storage area 223j, level storage area 223k, expectation degree storage area 223n, effect mode storage area 223n, At least the standby flag 223o, the touch effect effective time storage area 223q, the interval counter 223r, the volume setting storage area 223s, the volume setting flag 223t, the separation flag 223u, the operating flag 223v, and the other memory area 223z are provided. .

  The prize information storage area 223a is an area in which prize information is stored corresponding to the reserved balls, based on the prize command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various kinds of information such as the result of win / fail judgment, variation pattern, and stop type are set.

  The special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is a storage area in which the holding number of special symbols is stored based on the holding sphere command.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223c is a storage area in which the holding sphere number of the normal symbol is stored based on the holding sphere command.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is a flag indicating that it is time to start fluctuation of the third symbol.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is a flag indicating the stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type command output from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for determining various effects and details of the variation pattern, various lottery, and the like. The effect counter 223f is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

  The time effect execution flag 223g is a flag indicating that the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is normal. It is set to ON when it is determined that the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is within 3 years from the manufacturing, and is set to OFF when it is determined that 3 years have passed.

  The turn-on time storage area 223h is an area for storing the time when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the set period of the time effect period based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292. In the throw-in time storage area 223, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time setting process (FIG. 86, S1212) in the startup process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. In S1224, 24 hours of information on the time effect period is set.

  The preparation period flag 223i1 is a flag indicating that the preparation period is started. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is the preparation period, and is set to OFF when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is the time production period. To be done.

  The start period flag 223i2 is a flag indicating that the time effect period is started. The start period flag 223i2 is set to ON when the time information (time data) obtained from the RTC 292 is the time production period, and is turned OFF when the time information (time data) obtained from the RTC 292 has passed the time production period. Is set.

  The SW effective time storage area 223j is an area for storing the effective time of the SW operation. In the SW effect time storage area 223j, the effective time stored in the SW effect control process (FIG. 97, S2202) is subtracted or reset.

  The level storage area 223k is an area for storing the upper and lower levels to be changed based on the operation of the touch switch (touch sensor) 290 within the touch effect effective time in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

  The expectation storage area 223m is an area for storing the expectation based on the level stored in the level storage area 223k when the touch effect effective time becomes 0 in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). ..

  The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area in which information regarding effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C is stored (set), respectively. As for the effect mode, if the current effect mode is the normal game period (outside the time effect period), effect mode A is stored, if it is the time effect period, effect mode B is stored, and if it is the extended time effect period, effect. Mode C is stored.

  The standby flag 223o is a flag that indicates that the dog is in a display state of waiting during the time effect period (during the effect mode C) in the time effect period. The standby flag 223o is set to ON when the contact effect (time effect) is selected in the time effect period, and then set to OFF by turning on the touch switch 290.

  The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is an area for storing the effective time of the touch effect. The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is subtracted from the effective time stored in the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316).

  The interval counter 223r is a counter used for the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316). The interval counter 223r is counted when the touch sensor is not operated and is reset when the touch sensor is operated.

  The volume setting storage area 223s is an area for storing the volume set by the volume setting processing (FIG. 93, S1314).

  The volume setting flag 223t is a flag used in the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), and is set to ON when the volume setting becomes possible (FIG. 93, S1905) and set to OFF when the volume setting is completed. ..

  The separation flag 223u is a flag used in the left / right selection processing (FIG. 94, S1315), and is set to ON when the lowering of the central floating unit 400 is set (FIG. 94, S2004). When selected, it is set to off (FIG. 94, S2007).

  The operating flag 223v is a flag used in the swing control process (FIG. 95, S1316), and is set to ON when it is determined to be the accessory drive start timing (FIG. 95, S2103), and the swing operation of the accessory. Is set to OFF when the process ends (FIG. 95, S2111).

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 88) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, various tables provided in the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school notice selection table 222c in the first control example. Here, the fish school notice selection table 222c is referred to when executing S2332 of the touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316) described later based on the result of the contact time (time effect) described in FIG. It's a table.

  By using this table, the notice effect is controlled so that the fish school notice appears with the expectation corresponding to the reliability (expectation) displayed as a result of the contact time (see FIG. 62 (b)). Note that, in the present control example, the fish school notice selection table 222c is used, but when a plurality of effects in which the degree of expectation is set by the contact time (time effect) is provided, a table is provided to correspond to each effect.

  Further, in the fish school notice selection table 222c shown in FIG. 71 (a), the fish notice is set not to appear when the degree of expectation is 0%. However, for example, the fish notice appears only when the result of judgment is wrong. It may be set to do. With this configuration, a player who wants to give a notice of a fish school regardless of the result of winning / decision participation intentionally lowers the degree of expectation during the contact time (time performance). It is possible to suppress that.

  FIG. 71B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the shaking motion table 222d in the first control example. The shaking motion table 222d is a table referred to when executing S2108 of the shaking control process (FIG. 95, S1316) described later.

  Here, the movement control of the arm member 444 forming a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rotation status of the arm member 444 is configured to be comprehensible by the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444.

  In the present control example, when the control for rocking the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is referred to based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided in the arm member 444 with reference to the rocking motion table 222d. Has been decided. Specifically, when increasing the swing width (rotation range) of the arm member 444, if the information of the acceleration sensor is left rotation data, the rotation data is set such that the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation. If the information of the acceleration sensor is the right rotation data, the rotation data is set such that the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is the right rotation.

  That is, since the drive motor 445 is drive-controlled based on the actual rotation status by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation status) of the arm member 444 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the rotation of the drive motor 445. The force can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  Particularly, in the case of a variable member such as the arm member 444 that is configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state of the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end side of the variable member and drive-control the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

  Further, in the swing motion table 222d shown in FIG. 71 (b), only the motion table for increasing the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 is described, but the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 is reduced. An operation table for doing so may be provided. In this case, for example, if the information of the acceleration sensor is not the left rotation data, the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 becomes the right rotation is set, and the operation table for rotationally driving the drive motor 445 may be set. With this configuration, the rotational force of the arm member 444 and the driving force of the drive motor 445 cancel each other out, so that the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 can be efficiently reduced.

  Furthermore, the swing control of the arm member 444 (variable member) may be performed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed in synchronization with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm). It may be configured to control the rotation of the member 444). Specifically, the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member 444, and the worst. When pressed at the timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 is stationary).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the rotation state of the variable member based on the operation of the player, and increase the effects in which the player participates, so that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game. Become.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display controller 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in series on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs well-known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads / writes data from / to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. A known data address conversion is executed.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data in one bank while the other bank is used. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed after the boot process (see S2901 in FIG. 100) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced by the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result in the main control device 110 by the variation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Display on the symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", an image showing it is stopped of the variable effect. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first winning port 64, a power-on variable image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and images indicating "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on is performed. When a ball is detected at the first winning opening 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball into the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed in accordance with various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 controls the voice lamp. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data pre-resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and therefore the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image of one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame of the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately and designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, since the first winning hole 64 is a winning hole in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter, the first electric auditors object 640a is opened and the balls are first The number of prize balls increases when the player can easily enter the second winning opening 640. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in possession, or a state in which the number of balls in possession does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of a period when you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the one variation effect was stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

  Details of the display data table will be described below with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table of the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in that image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as images and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image.

  When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time effect) by the rear surface type, the player selects one of the backgrounds. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

  In this control example, the case where only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table will be described. However, instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd design is given a unique number, the variation design in the previous variation effect and the stop design according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are the 3rd design. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 73) is the data table The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 74). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address "0002H" in FIG. 74).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address Is included.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 74, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. At the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 74, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed (see S2905 in FIG. 100). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4105 in FIG. 109 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3201 in FIG. 102B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3208 of FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 102B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 102 (b) S3209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4001 in FIG. 109A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Performs resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 109 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 ((b) in FIG. )), The pointer update processing (FIG. 106) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 75), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 75, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), number of retained balls symbol 1, number of retained balls symbol 2, ..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all the sprites used for drawing the image for one frame based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. ) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3707 of FIG. 106). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4209 in FIG. 110). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4210 in FIG. 110). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 102B) is executed (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 to 84. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in this control example, When each reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and thereafter. The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown), is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67. Through-gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended. If the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and the special symbol changed by the calculation. A reserve ball number command indicating the value of the reserve ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S207 is executed, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 78. When this special symbol fluctuation start processing is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a special symbol big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present control example, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1, and the type of big hit (big hit A, big hit B) is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. However, it may be possible to determine whether or not to be a jackpot based on the value of one random number counter and to determine the type of a jackpot. In this case, for example, the total number of random number values is set to 3000, and the random number counter performs loop counting. By providing six random numbers corresponding to the big hit A and four random numbers corresponding to the big hit B among the total of 3000 random number values, it becomes possible to realize the distribution equivalent to this control example. By doing so, there is an effect that one counter can be reduced.

  In this control example, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

  After the processing of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (the jackpot A and the jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. Is a big hit B, 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). Then, the process of S215 is executed. If the jackpot type is a jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability which is a probability variation period (S213). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), then the stop command is set (S300), and this processing is ended.

  In this control example, if the jackpot type is a jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is the probability variation period, so that the next jackpot game is started. In the meantime, when the time saving game is played and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, 100 is set to the hour saving medium counter 203e, but a jackpot type different from that may be provided. For example, the gaming state is set to a high probability, a jackpot type that does not provide a time saving game, a jackpot type that sets the gaming state to a high probability and sets 100 to the hour saving medium counter 203e, and a probability variation counter are newly provided, 100 is set to each of the probability variation counter and the hour / hour reduction counter, and a jackpot type that provides a high-probability and short-time game for a predetermined number of times (100 times) and whether or not the high-probability game state continues is changed by a random lottery. The type of jackpot to be decided can be considered. As described above, by using various jackpot types or by combining them, it becomes possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of playability.

  In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / hour medium counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S300. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S300.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. 78 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 77) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a fluctuating effect that is to be seen.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, each value of the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the probability variation period (high-probability game state) (S302). The determination as to whether it is the probability variation period is performed by determining whether the probability variation flag 203f (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of "7" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that is the hit are the same, the special symbol is Determined to be a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (jackpot A, Of the jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16R big hit, a big variation period after the big hit game to the next big hit), and “60- If it is in the range of "99", it is determined to be a big hit B (100 big hits for 16R, 100 times for a normal symbol in a short time period).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A, 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the hit / miss determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the judgment. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-reach display mode, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the out-reach display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as it has the same variable time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", various "disconnection normal reach", and "disassembly super reach" are defined. As a variation pattern for both the big hit A and the big hit B, various kinds of "normal reach" and various kinds of "super reach" are defined.

  In the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The variation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is checked based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 84). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  In addition, in the present control example, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, but in addition to this, the variation type is set for each of the number of holdings stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A counter may be provided and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the number of holdings and the fluctuation type counter.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is performed. When there is, there is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters, and a prefetch of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. In other words, the winning is detected when the ball is detected three times continuously (6 ms) in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 ms. In the switch reading process S101, if the switch is configured to be able to determine the state that the switch continues to detect for a predetermined period, it is possible to eliminate the need to execute the timer interrupt process three times in this process. .

  Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number counter The value (N1) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the special symbol holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) (S407). Here, the entry into the second winning opening 640 is detected over the three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning in the second winning opening 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number counter The value (N2) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S410). Then, the special symbol holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S411, the RAM 203 is set to the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S412). In the process of S412, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, in the processing of S413, pre-reading is executed to set a winning command, and this processing ends. Here, the prefetching executed in S413 will be described. Prefetching is based on the game information (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, This is a pre-reading process that determines in advance the determination (validity determination) executed at the start of fluctuation.

  In the prefetching process, a determination is made in advance based on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the determination result is set as a winning command. Like other commands, this winning command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84). To be done.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the determination result based on the game information stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a before the start of fluctuation to give a predetermined notice to the player. Is possible.

  In this control example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching process and outputs the processing result (judgment result) to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command, but in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The stored game information (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) or the information corresponding to the game information is stored in the voice lamp controller 113. Alternatively, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may output and execute the above-described prefetching process. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), the variable display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device (not shown), and the second winning opening 640. Is a process for controlling the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the above. As described above, the control of the opening time of the second electric auditors product 82a associated with the third winning port 82 is also performed at the same time, but the control content is the same as that of the first electric auditors product 640a, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. To do.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). Incidentally, the time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), the process proceeds to S609. In the process of S608, although not shown in FIG. 80, it is also determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON. This is because in the present control example, when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 0 and the probability variation flag 203f is not set to ON, the process proceeds to S611, and the time saving medium timer 203e is processed. When the value is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON, the process proceeds to S609.

  In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit. As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off.

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 21 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off.

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 determines whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S612), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as when it becomes the deviation of the ordinary symbol. , The opening frequency and opening time of the first electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 640. The opening period of the first electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640. Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device. The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the processing in S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric auditors product 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the first electric operation is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 84) is executed next. The opening / closing control of the accessory 640a is started, and the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through-gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), judges whether or not the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, and if there is a ball passage, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the through gate 66 or 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (the number M of fluctuation display holdings in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (use areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (S913), sets initial values (S914), and starts payout control of game balls. It becomes possible. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 76) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111 Send the prize ball command. Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 77) and the starting prize winning process (see FIG. 79) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserve ball number command. Further, the winning command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the first electric auditors product 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the opening / closing control of the first electric auditors product 640a is started. .. The opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S620 of FIG. 80 or the processing of S621 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. The second electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 2) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example also performs the same opening / closing control as the first electric accessory, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), variation display is started on the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). To do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 82 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the usage area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see FIG. 83, S901) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 99. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 85, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1320 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 87). It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 87), the power-off process of S1320 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1320 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1320 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  The confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1320, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1320 is executed (see S1319 of FIG. 87). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is executed, the process of S1208 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case where after the power failure occurs, the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process of S1320 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interruption is performed. Permission is set (S1211). After that, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore, the process of S1204 to S1206 is performed. This is the case where the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interrupt permission is set. Yes (S1211). After that, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that skipping the clear processing of S1209 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204 when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 and S1206. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  In the process of S1212, a time setting process is executed (S1212). Details of the time setting process (S1212) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1212). In the time setting process (S1212), the process of acquiring the time information from the RTC 292 and setting the preparation period and the time production period in the input time storage area 223h based on the time information is executed.

  In the time setting process (S1212), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, the value of “hour, minute” is acquired. The RTC 292 is a time measuring means having a battery inside, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the RTC 292 is configured to initialize the same current time to the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about 3 and a half hours of operation. Further, the RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to discriminate "date". Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to change the background image to a Christmas-only background image and display a special character such as Santa.

  It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the time limit data (S1222). Here, in this control example, the deadline data is set to three years within the three and a half years which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC292. A date three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture is set as the deadline data, and when it is determined that the date is after that date, the setting of the time effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the start timings of the time effects cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10 due to a delay in time due to insufficient battery capacity or the like.

  In addition, in the present control example, it is configured to determine whether the date is three years after the preset date at the time of manufacture and set the time effect execution flag 223g to be described later to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC 292 is determined and the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON. Good. Here, it is desirable that the RTC 292 is set to a voltage value higher than or equal to the normal operation.

  In the processing of S1222, when it is determined that the acquired time information is outside the time limit data, that is, three years or more have passed (S1222: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the time limit data, that is, within three years (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time effect period are calculated and set in the throwing time storage area 223h (S1224). Here, in this control example, 54 minutes from the preset time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is the normal game period (production mode A), and the subsequent 1 minute is the preparation period (production mode B). ), 5 minutes after the preparation period has elapsed is set as a time production period (production mode C). After 5 minutes of the time presentation period, the normal game period of 54 minutes is set again, and thereafter, each period is similarly set.

  In addition, although each period is set as described above in the present control example, based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292, when the first predetermined time is reached, it corresponds to the normal game period (production mode A). The effect corresponding to the preparation period (effect mode B) is executed when the second predetermined time is reached, and the effect corresponding to the time effect period (effect mode C) is executed when the third predetermined time is reached. As described above, the setting may be performed in time series based on the time information. By doing so, even if there is an error in the time when the power is turned on for the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to cause the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to execute the same effect at a predetermined time. .. Further, since the RTC 292 is used, even if the power-on time is deviated, no error occurs in the time information (time information) to be timed.

  Each of the above-mentioned periods will be described in detail later, but in the normal game period and the time effect period, the types of the background image on which the displayed notice content and the special symbol are displayed are switched and displayed. Also, in the preparation period, it is a period for preparing for switching from the normal game period to the time production period, and before the change to the time production period, the fluctuation of the special symbol selected in the normal game period in the preparation period ends. Is set to.

  In addition, in this control example, the preparation period and the time production period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the input time storage area 223h. It may be configured such that 54 minutes for executing the game is set, the period is counted down or counted up, and the preparation period is set based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition to this, it is also possible to set a time after 54 minutes and set the time of the next period when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Further, the player may start execution of the normal period, the preparation period, and the time effect period based on performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291. By doing so, when the friends play the game on the adjacent stand, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform a desired effect regardless of the current time by simultaneously performing the above-described predetermined operation. ..

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or after the process of S1301 this time is performed (S1301), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process of S1302 to S1310 related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variable display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1316 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1305 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1308), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / outputting process in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. After the processing of this command determination processing (FIG. 88, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

  When the process of S1312 ends, the synchronous effect management process (S1313) is executed. This synchronization effect management process (S1313) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the synchronization effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313) is executed, the volume setting process is executed (S1314). Details of this volume setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

  When the process of S1314 ends, the left / right selection process (S1315) is executed. This left / right selection processing (S1315) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the left / right selection processing (FIG. 94, S1315) is executed, the shake control processing is executed (S1316). Details of this swing control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1316 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information about the occurrence of power failure is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1318: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, and thus can call the clerk of the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 87) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

  In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), and the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1403). This fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1403) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 89. After that, a notice selection process described later is executed (S1404). This advance notice selection processing (S1404) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When the process of S1404 ends, the process according to the other command is executed (S1412), and the process ends.

  Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1403) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection processing (S1403).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). The effect counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 87) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, and is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Next, it is determined whether the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is effect mode A (S1502).

  Here, in this control example, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C are set respectively. Each effect mode is configured to be set each time a predetermined time elapses after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and a game is started. 54 minutes after the power is turned on, the production mode A as the normal game period, when 54 minutes have passed, the following 1 minute, the production mode B is set as the preparation period, and when 1 minute of the preparation period has passed, then For 5 minutes, the effect mode C is set as the time effect period. After 5 minutes of the time effect period, effect mode A which is the normal game period is set again, and effect mode B and effect mode C are repeatedly set.

  In this way, after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the production mode is switched every time a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are powered on at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to match the timing when the effect modes are switched in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Therefore, the same effect can be executed at the same timing by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (that is, the normal game period) (S1502: Yes), the variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 69) or the variation pattern selection table B of the corresponding special symbol. (See FIG. 69), the fluctuation pattern is selected and set based on the result of the judgment, the number of holdings, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S1503), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1502: No), the variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table C (see FIG. 70) of the corresponding special symbol ( (S1504), this processing ends. In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set and the characters "Soon contact time starts !!" are displayed in the background to indicate that it is the preparation period. The contact time indicates a time production period. Further, during the preparation period, the time display is performed by counting down one minute on the background image. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long after the time effect period is started.

  Further, although details will be described in a notice selection process (see FIG. 90) described later, the notice effect is not set in the preparation period. With this configuration, when the time production period is started, the notice display set in the preparation period is displayed, and the notice production different from the dedicated notice production set in the time production period is displayed. It is possible to suppress defects.

  Details of the notice selection process (S1404) will be described below with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection processing (S1404).

  In the notice selection process (S1404), first, it is determined whether or not the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601). When the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601: Yes), this process ends. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON so that the notice effect is not set when it is determined in the synchronization effect management process (see FIG. 92) described later that it is the preparation period.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if the preparation period flag 223i1 is not set to ON (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not it is a variation pattern of super reach (S1602). If it is not the variation pattern of super reach (S1602: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is super reach (S1602: Yes), then the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1603). After that, the advance notice lottery is executed based on the set degree of expectation and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1604). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fish school notice is selected (S1605). When the fish school notice is not selected (S1605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the fish school notice is selected (S1605: Yes), the display command indicating the fish notice is set (S1606), and the process ends. The expected degree used in S1604 is set in S2332 of FIG. 99 described later, and details will be described later.

  Here, returning to FIG. 88, the description is continued. In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S1401: No), it is determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and S1412. Process shifts to. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved sphere number command is received (S1408: Yes), the reserved sphere number of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved sphere number command and set in the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 223b (S1409). After the processing of S1409 ends, the processing moves to S1412. In the process of S1408, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1410). When the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). After that, the processing shifts to S1412.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired by the main control device 110, and The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. In addition, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C2, CS1 is acquired in the main controller 110, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, from each value of each acquired counter C1 to C2, the original Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various kinds of information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S1410, when the winning command of the special symbol is not received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1412), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 91, S1312), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is determined from the RAM 223. It is acquired (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started. Further, the notice contents selected here are also notified.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is read from the RAM 223. The display for notifying the display control device 114 is obtained by setting the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708). A use stop type command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled. After the processing of S1709 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a synchronization effect management process (S1313) which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1313). In this synchronous effect management process (S1313), the time information is acquired from the RTC 292, based on the time information, it is determined whether it is the preparation period or the time effect period, and the effect mode indicating that is set. Run.

  In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313), first, it is determined whether the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1801). When it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S1801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S1801: Yes), after the time information of "hour, minute" is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1802), whether the start period flag 223i2 is on. It is determined (S1803). When it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is off (S1803: No), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804). .. If it is determined that it is not the preparation period (S1804: No), then it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time effect period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805).

  If it is determined by the process of S1805 that it is not the time effect period, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time effect period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1805: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to OFF ( After that, the start period flag 223i2 is set to ON (S1807). Then, the effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1808). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is the effect mode C (time effect period) is set (S1809), and this processing ends. It should be noted that the display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a display mode corresponding to the time effect period based on the reception of this command.

  The description will be continued by returning to S1804. In the process of S1804, when it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the input time storage area 223h (S1804: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON. (S1810), the effect mode B is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1811). After that, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is the effect mode B (preparation period) is set (S1812), and this processing is ended. It should be noted that the display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the preparation period based on the reception of this command.

  Further, in the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "Soon contact time starts !!" indicating the preparation period are displayed in the background. The contact time indicates a time production period. Further, during the preparation period, the time display is performed by counting down one minute on the background image. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long after the time effect period is started.

  Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. In the process of S1803, when it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is ON (S1803: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is outside the time effect period (S1813). When it is determined that it is not outside the time production period (S1813: No), this process ends. When it is determined that it is outside the time effect period (S1813: Yes), the start period flag 223i2 is set to OFF (S1814), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1815). ). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode A is set (S1816). Then, this process is completed. It should be noted that the display control device 113 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the display mode of the normal effect period based on the reception of this command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a sound volume setting process (S1314) which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this volume setting processing (S1314). In this volume setting process, a process of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is executed based on the operation of the selection switch 291 by the player.

  In the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is mode A (between normal gaming machines) (S1901). When the effect mode is not the mode A (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the effect mode is the mode A (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the reach is established (S1902). Here, the reach establishment period will be described. The reach establishment period means that the combination of the third symbols which is a big hit is stopped in a state where two symbol rows are stopped and displayed among the three symbol rows that are variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a period during which the state (reach state) in which the possibility of being displayed remains.

  If the result of the determination in S1902 is the reach establishment period (S1902: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is not the reach establishment period (S1902: No), it is then determined whether or not the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903). When the volume setting flag is off (S1903: No), it is then determined whether or not the selection switch 291 (upper selection switch 291a, lower selection switch 291b) is operated (S1904). If the selection switch 291 has not been operated (S1904: No), this process ends. If the selection switch 291 has been operated (S1904: Yes), then the volume setting flag 223t is set to ON (S1905), and a display command indicating the display of the volume setting screen is set (S1906). To finish.

  In the process of S1903, when the volume setting flag 223t is turned on (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907). When the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907: Yes), the volume level is increased and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1908), and the display command indicating the volume level is set (S1909). This process ends.

  In the process of S1907, when the upper selection switch 291a is not operated (S1907: No), it is then determined whether the lower selection switch 291 is operated (S1910). When the lower selection switch 291b has not been operated (S1910: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the down selection switch is operated (S1910: Yes), the volume level is lowered and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1911), and the display command indicating the volume level is set (S1912). The process ends.

  As described above, in the sound volume setting process (S1314), even in the state where the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the specific period (the effect mode A is set). In a state in which the reach is not established), the operation of the operation means (selection switch 291) operable by the player is enabled, and the volume can be set by operating the operation means. It is composed.

  With such a configuration, conventionally, the pachinko machine 10 can be set only in a state where the third symbol is not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (so-called demo screen display state or standby screen state). The volume can be set even while the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the player can enjoy the game at a desired volume.

  Further, in the present control example, when the effect mode is set to a mode other than A, the volume cannot be set. In this case, in a mode in which the effect is executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 such as the effect mode B or the effect mode C, control may be performed to synchronize the effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10. If the volume of the gaming machine is changed while such an effect is being performed, a synchronized effect with the surrounding pachinko machines 10 (for example, when a car approaches from a distance, the volume of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is changed). This is because the performance balance is lost in the controlled performance).

  Although not shown, when the production mode is set to B or C, the output of the volume relating to the synchronization production ignores the set volume level so that an appropriate volume is output in the synchronization production. And a predetermined volume level is output. With this configuration, even if different volume levels are set for the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronous effect, which is of interest to the player in terms of effect. It becomes possible to have.

  Furthermore, the predetermined volume level output during the above-described synchronization effect is set to be lower than the volume level that is the reference value in the normal state (so that the volume becomes smaller). This is because the same sound is often output simultaneously from a plurality of pachinko machines 10 during the synchronous effect.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the volume setting is controlled only by the digital signal (the pattern in which the output volume is output to the speaker by the digital signal), the volume control related to the synchronization effect can be performed by the above-described control. In the case of control (a pattern that adjusts the volume of the digital signal input to the speaker by controlling the output part of the speaker), the volume related to the synchronization effect is set to an appropriate volume based on the set volume level. Then, the digital signal may be controlled. By doing so, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronization effect.

  In this way, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of outputting the volume output corresponding to the synchronous production at an appropriate volume regardless of the set volume level, the production mode is The volume may be set even in a state other than the state set to A. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game at a desired volume.

  Further, in this control example, the volume cannot be set during the reach establishment period. This is because, after the reach is established, the movable accessory provided on the game board 13 is driven, and the effect of inspiring the expectation of a big hit is also performed on the third symbol display device. This is to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and to allow the entire pachinko machine 10 to execute the game and enjoy the effect.

  In this control example, since the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, it is possible to use the volume setting for playability. For example, if the lottery result is the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol that is a big hit, and the volume setting is performed when a large-volume effect for notifying the big hit is set at the end of the variable display of the third symbol, the volume setting is performed. It is conceivable that a notification such as "Be careful because a loud noise is generated in this change!". By giving such a notification, it is possible to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display, and it can also be used as a reference in setting the volume, and while the player enjoys the game, it can be more than desired. It is possible to prevent in advance that a large volume is generated. Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from unexpectedly making a loud noise, even a person with a weak heart can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, since the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, the player can set the volume while listening to the BGM during the variable display. Therefore, as a result of setting the volume level during the display of the demo screen as in the related art, it is possible to solve the problem that the volume of the BGM during the variable display becomes louder than expected and causes discomfort.

  Further, in this control example, only the volume setting process based on the operation of the player is described, but the volume setting may be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. For example, by operating the frame button 22 and the selection switch 291, the business hours (opening time and closing time) are input to the pachinko machine 10. When the time information obtained from the RTC 292 reaches the closing time, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level, and when the time information obtained from the RTC 292 reaches the opening time, the volume level is set to a predetermined reference level or the previous business day. It is better to automatically return to the set volume level. With such a configuration, it is possible to automatically reduce the volume output by the pachinko machine 10 during maintenance work performed outside business hours, and it is possible to prevent the maintenance worker from feeling uncomfortable. It will be possible.

  Further, during the time effect period executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, the volume level is automatically lowered to a predetermined level, and the result of the mini game performed during the time effect period or the time effect period is executed. You may control so that a volume level may rise based on the lottery result of the special symbol which has been. With such a configuration, the player around the pachinko machine 10 having a high volume also pays attention during the time production period, and the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 having a high volume becomes superior. You can soak.

  Further, when adopting such a configuration, it is preferable to control so that the volume level is increased based on the result of the prefetching process based on the winning command. By doing so, by grasping the change in the volume level before the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol whose lottery result is a big hit is started, the game with a high expectation for the big hit is played. It is possible to draw attention to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a left / right selection process (S1315) which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the left / right selection process (S1315). The left / right selection process is a process executed when the player is allowed to select an alternative (left / right) using the left / right sensor device 600 (first sensor 610, second sensor 620) (FIG. 60).

  Here, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 or FIG. The left and right sensor device 600 is a sensor for detecting the player's fingers in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquiring the presence / absence (presence) or position of the player's finger, the operation direction or the operation speed, and the rear case 210. The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 211a.

  The irradiation areas (detection areas) of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are set so as to partially overlap each other, as shown by the irradiation areas S1 and S2 in FIG. By doing so, the presence of the player's fingers can be detected in a wide continuous area.

  In the present control example, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 in which the irradiation area (detection area) is set in this way is divided into left and right by lowering the central floating unit 400, and the player is instructed to do so. An effect of making an alternative choice is performed (see FIG. 60). The process for allowing the player to make a binary selection is the left / right selection process.

  In the left / right selection process (FIG. 94, S1315), first, it is determined whether it is the right / left selection timing (S2001). The left / right selection timing is a case where the left / right selection effect is included in the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. It shows the timing at which the left / right selection effect is executed.

  In the processing of S2001, when it is not the right / left selection timing (S2001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is the right / left selection timing (S2001: Yes), it is then determined whether the separation flag 223u is on (S2002). If the separation flag 223u is off (S2002: No), then the lowering of the central floating unit 400 is set (S2003), the separation flag 223u is set to on (S2004), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S2002, if the separation flag 223u is on (S2002: Yes), then it is determined whether the left sensor is on (S2005). If the left sensor is on (S2005: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of left selection is set (S2006), then the separation flag 223u is set to off (S2007), and this processing ends. ..

  In the process of S2005, if the left sensor is off (S2005: No), then it is determined whether the right sensor is on (S2008). If the right sensor is off (S2008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the right sensor is on (S2008: Yes), then a display command indicating the background for right selection is set (S2009), the separation flag is set to off (S2010), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the shared detection area in which at least a part of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 overlap is formed, By making the detection area formed continuously by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 into one detection area, the operation of the player can be surely detected in a wide range, and an alternative is provided. When performing an effect, at least the above-described shared detection area is excluded from the detection area of the left and right sensor device 600 by inserting a movable accessory (variable member) between the plate glass 16a and the left and right sensor device 600. The detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are divided.

  With this configuration, when the player touches the plate glass 16a (or brings his / her fingers closer) without changing the left / right sensor device 600, a wide range of continuous touch operations by the player is performed. When it is possible to detect with, and when the player performs an effect game in which one of the two choices is selected, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are divided, and the player It is possible to accurately detect the selected side.

  Further, in the present control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 which form the left and right sensor device 600 are fixed and the detection area cannot be moved, but the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be moved. You may do it. By doing so, the detection area can be moved.

  With such a configuration, for example, the position of the movable accessory provided on the pachinko machine 10 is detected, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the region of the third symbol display device 81 that is not covered by the movable accessory. Can be the detection regions of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. As a result, "touch" is displayed in the display area that is not covered by the movable accessory, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the display area is set as the detection area of each sensor, whereby the movable accessory becomes the third area. Even when the display area of the symbol display device is covered, the player can be informed of the detection area in an easy-to-understand manner, and the effect can be sufficiently enjoyed.

  The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are configured to be movable, and the player operates the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 provided on the pachinko machine 10, whereby the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are operated. A function of adjusting the detection area of the sensor 620 may be provided. By doing so, the player can perform an effect only by touching a desired position on the plate glass 16a.

  In addition, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 may be configured to be movable so that the current detection area cannot be known. With this configuration, for example, an effect in which the player hits the detection area of the first sensor 610 can be executed.

  In the case of performing such an effect, it is advisable to touch the area of the second sensor 620 before touching the detection area of the first sensor 610, and the area will be removed. Further, as the winning bonus, it is possible to display a special image or a bonus that allows the player to obtain a large amount of points accumulated and information that can obtain a large amount of the points. By performing such an effect, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player can actually participate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In this control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are optical sensors having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by the fingers of the player and is reflected by the finger. The light receiving section receives light to detect the player's fingers, but other sensors may be used as long as they can detect the movement of the fingers.

  For example, multiple sensing axes are configured in the detection area, and a human sensor that detects that an object (finger) that generates heat (infrared rays) crosses the sensing axes, or a focus sensor that is a kind of dielectric with polarization. An electric current is used, and the infrared rays (5 to 10 μm) emitted from the human body are received by the light receiving surface of the pyroelectric body to generate a current (current generated with a change in charge state). A pyroelectric infrared sensor that detects a finger based on this can be considered.

  When a pyroelectric infrared sensor is used, it is advisable to mount the pyroelectric element on a dome-shaped lens in order to provide directivity in the detection direction. The pyroelectric element may be made of an inorganic ceramic material (lead zirconate titanate (PZT) or the like) or an organic material (polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) or the like). In particular, by using an organic ferroelectric thin film made of PVDF, it is possible to configure the infrared sensor as a flexible plastic film, so that it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the mounting position of the infrared sensor. Become.

  Further, by arranging a plurality of such elements, it is possible to detect the high speed movement and the moving direction of the finger, and it is also possible to detect the gesture operation of moving the finger. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new effect in which the player can actually participate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. As other sensors, a non-contact type photoelectric sensor, a capacitance type proximity switch, or a depth sensor may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a shake control process (S1316) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing this swing control processing (S1316). This swing control process is a process executed when the central floating unit 400 is swung using the drive motor 450.

  Here, variable control (operation control) of the variable member (central floating unit 400) using the drive motor in this control example will be described. First, the drive motor is formed by a stepping motor. The stepping motor rotates in steps by a constant angle (for example, 1.8 degrees) in synchronization with an input pulse, and controls the number of input pulses (the number of steps) and the pulse speed (frequency). The rotation amount and rotation speed of the motor are controlled, and the variable member can be movably controlled.

  Then, each variable member is configured to be variable by being driven by the transmission means (gear) that is interlocked with the rotational driving of the stepping motor described above. The voice lamp control device 113 is provided with drive motor control means for outputting a pulse to the stepping motor so as to correspond to a minimum unit (a unit in which a gear serving as a transmission means rotates by one tooth) in which the variable member varies. Has been.

  First, the movement control of the arm body 430 forming a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm body 430 is configured to be movable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank gear 453 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). Then, the variable member attached to the arm body 430 is configured to be variable based on the movement of the arm body 430. The crank gear 453 is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). With the origin detection sensor detecting the origin as a reference, the position of the arm body 430 is managed and controlled based on the rotation speed (step number) of the drive motor 450.

  Next, the movement control of the arm member 444 forming a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of the drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 which is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). An origin detection sensor (not shown) is provided on the back body 443 to which the drive motor 450 is attached. The position of the arm member 444 is managed and controlled based on the number of rotations (the number of steps) of the drive motor 445 with reference to the state where the limited detection sensor detects the origin.

  That is, the central floating unit 400 is configured to be able to operate in a plurality of patterns by controlling the drive motors 450 (two) and the drive motor 445, respectively (FIG. 31, FIG. 33, FIG. 33). 34, FIG. 37, and FIG. 39).

  Further, in the present control example, an acceleration sensor (not shown) is provided for a member configured to be variable, so that the current position of the variable member can be easily grasped. Therefore, by comparing the position (estimated position) of the variable member calculated from the rotation speed (step number) of the stepping motor with the current position of the variable member detected by the acceleration sensor, the variable member can be controlled to move normally. It is possible to determine whether or not it has been done. In addition, when the assumed position and the current position are different from each other, it is possible that the transmission mechanism (transmission means) is out of step and the movement is defective.

  Returning to FIG. 95, the description will be continued. In the swing control process (FIG. 95, S1316), first, it is determined whether or not it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101). This accessory driving start timing is a case where the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 89, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes an effect of shaking the character. It indicates the timing at which the effect of shaking the accessory is executed. If it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101: Yes), the set operation scenario is read (S2102), the in-operation flag 223v is set to ON (S2103), and this processing is ended.

  It should be noted that, although the figure illustrates the case where the accessory drive start timing is set based on the variation pattern, other than that, for example, the accessory drive start timing can be set by operating the frame button 22. It may be configured as follows.

  In the process of S2101, if it is not the timing to start the accessory drive (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the operating flag 223v is ON (S2104). When the operating flag 223v is off (S2104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the in-operation flag 223v is on (S2104: Yes), the operation scenario is updated (S2105), and then it is determined whether or not it is a shaking operation scenario (S2106). In the case of the shaking motion scenario (S2106: Yes), the information of the acceleration sensor is read (S2107), the shaking motion data is set from the shaking motion table 222d (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109. That is, in S2108, when the information of the acceleration sensor is left-rotating data, the rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation is set, and when the information of the acceleration sensor is right-rotating data, the arm member 444 is set. Rotation data in which the rotation direction of 444 is right rotation is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, when it is not the scenario of the shaking motion (S2106: No), this process ends. Next, in the process of S2109, it is determined whether the scenario end is reached (S2109). If it is not the scenario end (S2109: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the scenario end (S2109: Yes), the in-operation flag 223v is set to OFF (S2110), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the control for rocking the arm member 444 as the variable member is executed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is set based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided in the arm member 444. I have decided. That is, by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation status) of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the drive motor 445 can be drive-controlled based on the actual rotation status. The rotational force of 445 can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  Particularly, in the case of a variable member such as the arm member 444 that is configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end side of the member and the other member is not connected to the other end side, the rotation state of the other end side is the drive motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end side of the variable member and drive-control the drive motor 445 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor.

  The swing control of the variable member may be performed using the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 in synchronization with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm). Control the rotation of member 444). Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when it is pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member and the worst timing is detected. When the button is pressed with, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 is stationary).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the rotation state of the variable member based on the operation of the player, and increase the effects in which the player participates, so that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 87, S1307), first, it is determined whether the effect mode is A or not (S2201). When it is determined that the effect mode is A (S2201: Yes), the SW effect control process described below is executed (S2202), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the effect mode is not A (S2201: No), the special SW effect control process described later is executed (S2203), and then this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the SW effect control process (S2202), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96), will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this SW effect control processing (S2202). In the SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation in the normal period (effect mode A) that is a period other than the period (time effect period) in which the effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed is executed.

  In the SW effect control process (S2202), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is longer than 0 (S2301). If the SW valid time is 0 (S2301: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S2301, if the SW valid time is not 0 (S2301: Yes), the SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223j is subtracted (S2302), and then the SW provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used. It is determined whether or not a certain frame button 22 (the touch switch 290 and the selection switch 291) has been pressed (S2303). If the frame button 22 or the like has not been pressed (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 or the like is pressed (S2303: Yes), the selected advance notice command for display is set (S2304), and the SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223j is reset ( (S2305), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a special SW effect control process (S2203), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 96), will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the special SW effect control process (S2203). In this special SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation is executed in a period (time effect period) in which an effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed.

  In the special SW effect control process (S2203), first, it is determined whether the standby flag 223o is on (S2311). As shown in FIG. 61, the standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the contact effect is in a standby state in the time effect period. That is, the standby flag 223o is set to ON when the contact effect is selected in the time effect period. Then, by turning on the touch switch 290, the standby flag 223o is set to off.

  When it is determined that the standby flag 223o is on (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to off (S2313). A display state command indicating that the standby flag 223o is off is set (S2314). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S2312, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2312: No), this processing ends.

  In the process of S2311, when it is determined that the standby flag 223o is off (S2311: No), it is determined whether the touch effect effective time is longer than 0 (S2315). If the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2315: Yes), the touch sensor control process is executed (S2316), and then this process ends.

  Here, the touch sensor control process (S2316), which is one of the special SW effect control processes (see FIG. 98), will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this touch sensor control processing (S2316). In the touch sensor control process (S2316), first, the touch effect effective time is subtracted (S2321). Then, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322). If the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2323). After that, 1 is added to the level storage area 233k (S2324), and the display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2325). Subsequently, the interval counter 223r is reset (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2331.

  When the touch sensor 290 is determined to be off in the process of S2322 (S2322: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223r (S2327), and it is determined whether or not the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328). ). When the interval counter 223r is the upper limit value (S2328: Yes), the level storage area 223k is decremented by 1 (S2329). After that, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2330), and the process proceeds to S2331.

  In the process of S2331, it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331). When the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2331: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331: Yes), the expectation based on the level set in the level storage area 223k is set in the expectation storage area 223m (S2332). After that, a display command indicating that the degree of expectation has been set is set (S2333), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, like the present control example, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2901), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided as in the conventional gaming machine but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3002, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3002, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs that are currently being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S3003). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3004), the instruction pointer 231a should be executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (S2901 in FIG. 101). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) (S3005), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  In this way, by executing the boot process (S2901), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed subsequent to the process of S3002. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S3003 to S3005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S3001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3001. Alternatively, the processing of S3003 to S3005 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S3002.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present control example, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3003 to S3005 without performing the processes of S3001 and S3002. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2903). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of this register or a partial area of the internal memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2903, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2904). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2904, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2905). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 109A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 109A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B). The determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Further, also in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) at the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is the main control device. 110, through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple A variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer it. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2905, the interrupt permission is set (S2906), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3101), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 75) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S3202), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 or the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105.

  In the display setting process (S3203), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3202) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S3204). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S3203) or the simple display setting process (S3209). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also given a continuous notice. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S3206). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S3204), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205). The drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3207). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command are compared. Then, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3201: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3208) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S3209) is executed, and the process of S3204. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105, details of the above-described command determination processing (S3202) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing (FIG. 103, S3202), as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3301), and if there is no unprocessed new command. (S3301: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3302), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S3303).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3304), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3305), the process returns to S3301.

  Details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S3305) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 104A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3401).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command judgment processing is executed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, like the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3403, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S3405). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3406), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3405 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3402. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3404 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol according to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S3304, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3306). If there is a display stop type command (S3306: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3307), and the process returns to S3301.

  Here, details of the stop type command processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / outside reach, or complete out) indicated by the stop-type command for display is determined. (S3501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S3502).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3502 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S3503).

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the process of S3306, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3306: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension command among the unprocessed commands (S3308). When it is determined that the display hold command is received (S3308: Yes), the hold symbol data based on the command is set (S3309). As a result, the reserved symbols are displayed or the colors of the displayed retained symbols are set to be variable. Then, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display suspension command (S3308: No), it is determined whether there is a display advance command (S3310). When it is determined that there is a display advance notice command (S3310: Yes), advance notice display data based on the command is set. As a result, the frame button 22 is pressed and display setting such as a notice display corresponding to the SW notice is set. Then, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display advance notice command (S3310: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (S3312). If it is determined that there is a display state command (S3312: Yes), background display data corresponding to the state based on the command is set (S3313). Thereby, the display corresponding to the time effect and the like is set. Then, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display state command (S3312: No), it is determined whether there is a display touch command (S3314). When it is determined that there is a display touch command (S3314: Yes), corresponding display data is set based on the command (S3315). Thereby, the display corresponding to the touch effect such as the contact effect is set. Then, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display touch command (S3314: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3316), and if there is an error command (S3316). : Yes), the error command process is executed (S3318), and the process returns to S3301.

  Details of the error command process (S3318) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3601). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3602), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3601, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3602, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, then in step S3602, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S3316, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3316: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3317), and the process returns to S3301.

  In the processing of S3301 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes). ), And the processes of S3302 to S3317 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3301 to S3307 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3301 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S3208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, regarding other commands, The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3401. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3402, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108, details of the above-described display setting process (S3203) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 106, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3701: No), When it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3702 to S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3701: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to OFF (S3702), and then S3703 to S3704. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3703). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3703: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3704).

  Details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3801).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3801, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3802), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 106. After the warning image setting process (S3704) or in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3703: No), the process proceeds to S3705.

  In S3705, pointer update processing is executed (S3705). Details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer updating process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3901). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3901, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S3902). As a result, if it is End information (S3902: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3903), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3903: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3904), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3905), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3903, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3903: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3906), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3902, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3902: No), this processing is ended and returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 106, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706). In the task process, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S3906 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3707), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3708). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3708: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3708: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3709).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3709: No), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalization display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S3710), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3711). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3712), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the on state is set to on (S3714), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3715), and returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3715 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S3204), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, the stop design of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop design determination flag set in S3715, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3709, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3709: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S3716). If the demo display flag is off (S3716: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the finalized display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The contents are cleared by setting in the buffer 233d (S3717) and then writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3718). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3719). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3720), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3721), the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3716, if the demo display flag is ON (S3716: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S3209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102B). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The display data table that defines the stop display of the image is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3205) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 109 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001). If the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4001: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S4002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4001, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4003), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4002) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4002).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S4101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4101: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S4102). In the process of S4102, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the processing of S4102 that the transfer processing is not completed (S4102: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed by the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4102: Yes), the process proceeds to S4103. Further, as a result of the processing of S4101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4101: No), the processing proceeds to S4103.

  In the process of S4103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4103: No), it is not A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4104), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206) includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the drawing list. Based on the transferred data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S4103 (S4103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4105), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102B) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102B). Since the determination process (see FIG. 103 to FIG. 105) and the display setting process (see FIG. 106 to FIG. 108) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) (see S4001: No in FIG. 109 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process (S3705) of the display setting process (S3203) previously executed from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4202), and if it is transfer data information (S4202: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4203), further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205.

  In the process of S4202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4202: No), the processes of S4203 and S4204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data has been completed (S4205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4206).

  In the process of S4206, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S4206 that the transfer process is not completed (S4206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to S4207. Further, as a result of the processing of S4205, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4205: No), the processing proceeds to S4207.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4207). If the transfer start flag is on (S4207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S4207: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S4212). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S4212: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4213), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4214). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the storage destination (usually The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4215), and the process proceeds to S4209.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore, the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4214, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S4209, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209). The determination in the process of S4209 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S4209, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4209, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4210). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206) includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. The image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S4210, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4211), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  Further, in this control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, and thus the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the above-described drawing process (S3206) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S3204) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S3204). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 102B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed every 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 117. In the second control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the first control example. In addition to the processing performed in the first control example described above, the reel control processing is added, and the variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 based on the addition of the reel control processing and The difference is that a new process is added to the variable display setting process. Since other configurations are the same, other configurations are omitted.

  First, FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is an example showing a display mode in a state where the container 330 is raised to a position covering the lower side of the third symbol display device 81. In this FIG. 112 (a), the third symbol (hereinafter referred to as the main third symbol) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a of the container 330 and the first symbol A third symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a sub-third symbol) that is combined and displayed by the outer peripheral surface of the two-rotation body 340b is simultaneously displayed. This display mode is executed by raising the container 330 by the reel control process (see FIG. 115) when the setting start flag 223d is set to ON in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 117) described later. It is a display mode.

  In this display mode, the main third symbol and the sub-third symbol are each displayed in the left-right three directions, and the left column, the middle column, and the right column are displayed in association with each other. That is, the main third symbol in the left column (the symbol in which 4 and 7 are displayed) and the sub-third symbol in the left column (the symbol in which A and A'are combined and displayed) correspond to each other. The main third design in the row (blank design) and the sub-third design in the middle row (design in which C and B'are combined and displayed) correspond to each other, and the main third design in the right row (blank design) And the sub-third symbol in the right column (the symbol in which C and A'are combined and displayed) correspond to each other.

  The sub-third symbol has "A and A '", "B and B'", "C and C '" as a specific combination, and all three sub-third symbols are "A and A'". When combined and displayed, the fact that the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol has been won is a big hit. In addition, when all three sub-third symbols are combined and displayed as "B and B '" or "C and C'", it is a notification that makes the player expect a big hit, for example, "B and B '. It is configured such that "Cha n Su" is displayed by arranging three sub-third symbols that are compositely displayed by "".

  FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state where the middle and right third symbols are switched after FIG. 112 (a) is displayed. As shown in this figure, in the case of displaying the main third symbol and the sub-third symbol, it is designed to display the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol is a combination of the respective symbols. If the determination result is a big hit, the main 3rd symbol is a combination of winning / discarding the special symbol (a combination of three shark / turtle symbols arranged side by side), and the sub 3rd symbol is the winning or losing of the special symbol. A combination in which the determination result is a big hit (a combination in which three symbols to be combined and displayed in A and A'line up) is displayed.

  As described above, in this control example, in the normal game state, the third symbol that is variably displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is used to notify the result of the determination of the special symbol, When shifting to the reel mode, which is a game state different from the normal game state, a special combination of the main third symbol displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the above-described sub third symbol It is configured to be able to notify the result of the determination whether or not the symbol is valid.

  In addition, as a transition condition to the reel mode described above, when the winning / discarding determination result of the special symbol is a predetermined determination result (big hit), or the variation pattern command or the winning command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is the reel mode. There is a case where the production information corresponding to is included.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example has a reel scenario table 222e added to the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the main process 2. Of the main processing 2, each processing of S1301 to S1313, S1315, S1317 to S1321 is the same as each processing of S1301 to S1313, S1315, S1317 to S1321 of the main processing (see FIG. 87) in the first control example. Since the processing is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. This control example is different from the first control example in that the volume setting process of S1314 (see FIG. 93) executed in the main process is not performed and the reel control process of S1330 (see FIG. 115) is performed. The differences are described below.

  The reel control process (S1330) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel control process (S1330) which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401). When the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401: Yes), the set reel scenario is read (S2402), and the start position of each reel is set (S2403). After that, the setting start flag 223w is set to OFF (S2404), the reel mode flag 223x is set to ON (S2405), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if the setting start flag 223w is off (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S2406). If the reel mode flag is off (S2406: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the reel mode flag is on (S2406: Yes), the set scenario is updated (S2407). Then, it is determined whether it is end data (S2408). If it is end data (S2408: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end data (S2408: No), the operation data is set based on the scenario (S2409), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the variation pattern selection process 2.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S1512). When the effect mode is A (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513). When the reel mode flag 223x is off (S1513: No), a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table A or B and set (S1514). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513: Yes), the variation pattern is selected from the reel scenario table (S1515), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table is a table referred to in the effect control process (prefetch control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (fluctuation pattern selection process) executed when a variation pattern command is received. ) Are separately provided.

  In S1515, the reel scenario table corresponding to the variation pattern selection process is referred to. In this reel scenario table, there are a reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, at a position where the player can visually recognize it (exposed position) and a position where the player cannot easily visually recognize it (storage position). There are prepared a plurality of scenarios in which the reel position, which determines which position is determined, and the rotation speed of the reel member, which is predetermined, are prepared. Based on the information included in the variation pattern selection command and the rotation operation amount. It is configured so that it is appropriately selected and set by the user (see FIG. 134A).

  In the process of S1512, if the effect mode is not A (S1512: No), a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table C and set (S1516). Then, this process is completed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 117, the variable display setting process 2 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1340). In the variable display setting process 2, each process of S1711 to S1719 is the same as each process of S1701 to S1709 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) in the first control example. Detailed description is omitted. This control example is different from the first control example in that the processes of S1720 to S1723 are performed, and will be described below.

  In the process of S1720, it is determined whether or not the information included in the stop type selection command is the reel mode entry pattern (S1720). If it is the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: Yes), the setting start flag 223w is set to ON (S1721), and this processing is ended. The reel mode rush pattern is configured so that the stop type selection command in the case where the special symbol hit determination result is a big hit is included more than the stop type selection command in the case where the special symbol hit determination result is not a big hit. ing.

  On the other hand, if it is not the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the reel mode end pattern (S1722). If it is not the reel mode end pattern (S1722: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the reel mode end pattern (S1722: Yes), the reel mode flag is set to OFF (S1723), and this process is ended.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 133. In the third control example, the content of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the second control example. Specifically, the above-mentioned command determination processing is added with a winning effect change processing, a volume setting processing 2 is added, a special effect processing is added, and a shake control processing 2 is added. , The difference is that other processing is added. Since the other configurations are the same, the description of the other configurations will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 118, a display mode displayed during the special volume setting effect will be described. Here, the special sound volume setting effect will be described. The special sound volume setting effect is an effect that occurs when a ball is thrown in, and during the period in which the effect is generated, the normal volume setting effect (Fig. A special sound volume setting (see FIG. 130) different from that in FIG. When the sound volume is set by this special sound volume setting, the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the special jackpot expectation degree of the changing special symbol and the jackpot expectation degree in the holding symbol are special voices, sound volumes, or display modes. Is configured to be notified.

  According to the special sound volume setting effect configured in this manner, the operation of setting the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 also causes the notification indicating the jackpot expectation degree to be executed. Therefore, based on one operation performed by the player, it is possible to perform two types of settings, that is, a volume setting and an expectation suggestion notification (effect setting), and to the frame button 22 (operating means) performed by the player to enjoy the game. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the number of operations.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special volume setting effect. When the special volume setting effect is executed as shown in the figure, a part of the sub-pattern (blank pattern) is changed to the volume pattern indicating the volume setting and displayed. During the special volume setting effect, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 is controlled so as to correspond to the display area in which the volume symbol is displayed, and the player controls the glass plate 16a corresponding to the volume symbol. Touch it to set the special volume.

  When the special volume can be set, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be set by operating the selection switch 291 provided on the pachinko machine 10. Based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume pattern displayed on the display screen is changed and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the volume level indicating the volume level.

  In addition, based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume pattern is changed to a display mode according to the jackpot expectation degree of the special symbol that is changing the display manner and the jackpot expectation degree in the reserved symbol. Specifically, the color of the volume pattern is changed from white → blue → yellow → red → rainbow. As a method of changing the display mode based on the jackpot expectation, not only changing the color but also changing the type of the pattern displayed on the volume symbol or changing the form of the symbol mark displayed as the volume symbol, for example. You can think of a change method to do or increase the number.

  Furthermore, as the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation, not only changing the display mode of the volume symbol, but also notification using sound (volume) may be performed, for example, even if an operation to increase the volume level is performed. Regardless, a contradictory effect that the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, or a notification sound effect that announces that there is a big hit in the hit / miss judgment result may be performed. When the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in this way, the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation level is performed using sound, so that the different categories of the volume setting and the notification effect can be related. This makes it possible for the player who has set the volume to easily notice the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation.

  In this control example, the control for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 as the special volume setting effect is described, but the same control may be used other than the volume setting. For example, it may be used when setting the brightness and color tone of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display device). In the case of adopting such a configuration, the sub-pattern (blank pattern) is changed and displayed to a light pattern indicating the brightness or a color bar pattern indicating the hue, and the display mode of the pattern described above as the notification effect based on the expectation degree of the jackpot. In addition to the effect to be changed, a plurality of lamps (LEDs) provided on the pachinko machine 10 may be used for notification. With such a configuration, the expectation of the jackpot is executed by a visual notification effect (luminance of the lamp, hue) based on an operation performed by the player to change the visual setting (luminance, hue). It is possible to make the player notice the notification effect.

  Further, the plurality of sub-symbols (blank symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed to volume symbols, light symbols, and color bar symbols, respectively, so that the setting corresponding to the symbol selected by the player is performed. May be.

  In addition, in this control example, the sub-symbol that is stopped and displayed and a part of the sub-symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner are configured to be changed to the volume symbol, but only the sub-symbol that is stopped and displayed can be changed to the volume symbol. Alternatively, only the sub-symbol that is being variably displayed may be changed to the volume symbol. Further, the jackpot expectation degree may be notified based on the volume setting operation in the normal time.

  Further, in the present control example, a configuration is used in which it is determined whether or not the player has touched the volume symbol based on the detection result of the left and right sensor device 600, but the volume symbol is changed by an operation using an operation means other than the left and right sensor device 600. You may make it the structure which determines having selected.

  As described above, in the special sound volume setting effect in this control example, since the player only performs the operation of setting the sound volume, the state suggestion notification effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is also performed. It is possible to prevent the operation of the operation means (frame button 22, selection switch 291) from becoming complicated.

  Further, since the mode using the sound is used as the mode of the state suggestion notification effect based on the volume setting operation, it is possible to make the player easily notice the state suggestion notification effect.

  Next, the time effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the timing for executing the time production period. First, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the current time information is the timekeeping means by the time setting process (see FIG. 86) in the startup process (see FIG. 85) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Obtained from RTC 292. Based on the acquired time information, the preparation period (effect mode B) is set when 54 minutes have elapsed. It should be noted that the normal game period (production mode A) is set until the preparation period is set. Then, when one minute elapses after the preparation period (production mode B) is set, the time production period (production mode C) is set. After that, when 5 minutes have elapsed since the time performance period (production mode C) was set, the normal game period is set again.

  In this control example, the player obtains points during the normal game period (production mode A1), displays the results of the points obtained during the preparation period (production mode B), and produces time according to the obtained points. The effect of changing the content of the time effect performed during the period (effect mode C) and changing the game content of the next normal game period (effect mode A2) based on the result of the time effect is performed.

  Next, detailed contents of the effect in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. Note that description of the same effects as the contents described in the above-described first control example will be omitted.

  FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, for the player to earn points. It is a figure which shows the mini game performed. Three treasure boxes are lined up in the center of the display screen, and a comment prompting the player to select an arbitrary treasure box is displayed above the treasure boxes. When the player selects an arbitrary treasure box, a display mode showing points appears from the selected treasure box, and the points are added to the points acquired by the player.

  Further, on the display screen, the acquired points (10) and the maximum acquirable points (100) acquired by the player are displayed as “10/100” at the lower left of the screen. The contents of the time effect executed in the subsequent time effect period are determined according to the points obtained during the normal game period.

  Furthermore, near the area where the acquired points are displayed, the acquired point indicator with the maximum value set to 100 points is displayed, and it is possible to visually see how much the current acquired points are with respect to the maximum value. You can grasp it. Further, a boundary line is attached to the position indicating the points 40, 70, 90 acquired in the indicator, and the character "GET" is displayed on each boundary line. In this figure, a display corresponding to 10 points is displayed.

  This boundary line indicates a value at which the table (see FIG. 125A) used when determining the content of the time effect (effect performed in the effect mode C) performed later is switched. By displaying the boundary line in such a manner that it can be visually recognized by the player in this way, it is possible to grasp the number of points required up to the stage where the time effect may be changed while the boundary line is set as the target value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the mini game.

  In addition, the display of the number of acquired points on the indicator is configured so that the color changes by crossing the boundary line. In addition, in the present control example, although the above-mentioned two displays of the acquired points are performed, only one of them may be displayed.

  Note that, in this control example, points can be acquired in the normal game effect as shown in FIG. 120 (b) in addition to the mini game shown in FIG. 120 (a). Therefore, FIG. 120 (b) will be described.

  FIG. 120 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, and is a specific effect "fish school reach". FIG. When the “fish school reach” is executed, “fish school GET + 20 points” is displayed on the display screen and 20 points are added. In this way, even in the normal game effect, since points can be acquired when a specific effect is executed, it is possible to accumulate points even if the mini game cannot be operated well. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect that occurs during the normal game period.

  Regarding the points that can be obtained in the normal game effect, it is preferable that the number of points and a specific effect to which the points are given can be set at random. When such a configuration is used, the type of effect and the number of points set as the specific effect during the current normal game period may be displayed on the display screen. Further, when all the effects set as the specific effects are executed during the normal game period, a privilege of maximizing the acquired points may be provided.

  Further, it may be configured such that a part of the number of points is not added on the display without displaying on the display screen all the number of points acquired by executing the mini game or the specific effect during the normal game period. , It is better to acquire and display less points than the points actually acquired in the mini game, or to display a part of the effects set as a specific effect as a normal effect that is not a specific effect on the display. .. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the specific number of points to be acquired, and the production can be enjoyed until the final result announcement (see FIG. 121 (a)).

  FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (production mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen which announces the result of a number. In the upper area of the main display screen, a comment notifying that the “contact time”, which is a time effect, will be started soon is displayed, and in the right area of the main display screen, the remaining time until the time effect is started (35 There is provided a countdown display section for displaying a countdown of seconds. When the numerical value (seconds) displayed on the countdown display unit becomes 0, the time effect period (effect mode C) is entered and the time effect is started.

  Further, in the left side area of the display screen, there is provided an acquired point result display section for displaying a result of the number of points acquired during the normal game period (production mode A1), and the points acquired during the normal game period are displayed. To be done. In addition, if it is configured not to display all the points acquired during the normal game period on the display screen, it is necessary to check the result of the number of points displayed on the result display section of this figure for the first time during the normal game period. It is possible to know the number of points earned.

  121 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (production mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and points obtained during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen in which the dog breed selected based on the dog breed selection table (refer FIG. 125 (a)) is displayed using a number. In the upper area of the display screen, a comment indicating that the dog type used during the next time effect period (effect mode C) is determined is displayed. In the left area of the display screen, a dog breed display section for displaying the dog breed determined this time is provided, and the dog breed C is displayed as the dog breed used during the next time performance period. Further, the countdown display section displays a display indicating 9 seconds remaining.

  Here, the dog breed used during the time production period will be described. In this control example, dog breeds A to D are prepared as dog breeds used during the time production period, and are selected and determined by the dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) described later. Each breed has individuality, and the degree of increase in reliability in the production (see FIGS. 61 and 62) during the contact time (during time production) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in reliability is set to “normal”, and the effect in which the reliability can be custom set is set to “reach of fish”.

  In this control example, the type of performance in which the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability can be custom-set is set for each breed, but the player custom-sets the degree of increase in reliability and the degree of reliability. You may make it possible to select the type of possible effects. In such a case, for example, when the dog type D is selected, the selectable range is reduced, and when the dog type A is selected, the selectable range is increased. With this configuration, the player will play the game so that the dog breed A is set regardless of various custom settings.

  In addition, a game mode other than the game modes (reach type, reliability) described in this control example may be custom-set. For example, the appearance rate of the premier effect in the variable display in which the hit determination result is a big hit, the appearance rate of the effect capable of giving a large amount of points accumulated by the player, and the like can be considered.

  In this control example, the normal game period is divided into a period for obtaining points (production mode A1) and a period for performing production based on the content set in the time production (production mode A2), and the alternate execution is performed. However, for example, at the start of the normal game period (at the end of the time effect period), the player may be allowed to select which period is to be executed during the normal game period. With this configuration, if the desired setting cannot be made during the time production period, it becomes possible to select the period for which points are to be acquired again, so that the player is encouraged to actively participate in the production. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the normal game period is divided into the first half part and the second half part, the first half part may be a period for performing an effect based on the contents set during the time effect period, and the second half part may be a period for acquiring points, or points may be set. The acquisition period and the period for performing the effect based on the content set in the time effect may be overlapped and both may be performed at the same time.

  Further, the points obtained during the normal game period may be accumulated all day long, and the content of the time effect may be set based on the accumulated points. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play for a long time. Also, the acquired points are converted into information (for example, a two-dimensional code) that can be read by an external terminal (mobile device) and output, and information (for example, a password) created based on the information read by the external device. By inputting to the pachinko machine 10, it may be possible to execute a game that succeeds the previously acquired points. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage a player who has no time to play a game for a long time over the days.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, detailed contents of the effect in the swing effect 2 will be described. FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the swing effect 2, in which the player uses the arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) which is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which urges to operate the frame button 22 in time to shake.

  Here, the swing effect 2 will be described. The swing effect 2 is an effect in which the slightly swinging arm member 444 is moved based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. Specifically, the timing of calculating the movable state (swaying state) data of the arm member 444 from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444, and notifying the operation timing on the display screen based on the calculated data. Display the notification. Then, the timing for driving the arm member 444 is determined based on the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 and the operation timing based on the movable state (swaying state) data of the arm member, and the effect of driving the arm member 444 is determined. Is.

  In the swing effect 2 described above, the player operates the frame button 22 at a timely timing so that the arm member 444 is controlled to swing greatly, and when the player operates the frame button 22 at a wrong timing, the arm member 444 is controlled. It is controlled so that the shaking becomes small. In this way, by controlling the operation of the variable member based on the operation of the player, the player feels that he / she is participating in the production of the pachinko machine 10, so that he / she can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. be able to.

  Further, in the swing effect 2 in this control example, since the timing display for displaying the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is controlled based on the actual swing state of the variable member, it is displayed on the display screen. The timing display and the actual shaking state of the variable member are synchronized. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated in good timing in accordance with the timing display, the leg member 444 is controlled so as to sway greatly, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. In the center area of the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a), a comment urging the player to operate the frame button 22 and a diagram simulating the frame button 22 are displayed. Is provided with a timing display portion in which an indicator is displayed to move in the left-right direction within a predetermined area M. The indicator displayed on the timing display unit is increased / decreased in the left / right direction based on the information obtained by converting the actual shaking state of the arm member 444 into data using an acceleration sensor. The speed of increasing / decreasing movement in the left / right direction may be controlled so as to increase as the swing width of the arm member 444 increases, or the speed obtained by correcting the information obtained from the acceleration sensor may be controlled to be a constant speed at all times. Good.

  Then, the timing at which the indicator is located at the center position S (range of “a”) within the predetermined area M is the timing for swinging the arm member 444 most efficiently by operating the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is operated. The arm member 444 is controlled such that the arm member 444 does not swing greatly as the timing moves away from the center position S (range b → range c). It should be noted that the timing display is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during one swing effect 2.

  In this control example, the player uses the frame button 22 with good timing as the swing member effect 2, but the effect shown in FIG. 122 (b) may be used as an effect other than that. FIG. 122 (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the swing effect 2, in which the player is an arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) that is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which prompts you to carry out continuous operation of the frame button 22 in order to shake.

  In this another example, a comment urging the player to repeatedly press the frame button 22 and a diagram imitating the frame button 22 are displayed in the center area of the display screen, and the right side area of the display screen is displayed with continuous hits. A continuous hit number display unit is provided for displaying an indicator that moves (raises) upward depending on the number of times. In another example shown in this figure, the indicator of the continuous hit number display portion rises according to the number of times the frame button 22 is hit repeatedly. The arm member 444 may be driven at a timing at which the arm member 444 greatly shakes as the indicator level of the continuous hit count display portion increases (as it rises).

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
The third control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 123A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example has a rotary body operation table 222f and a dog breed selection table 222g added to the second control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, FIG. 123B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example has a volume setting period flag 223α and a special volume setting flag 223β added to the second control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the RAM 223 shown in FIG. 123 (b), the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the fluctuation start flag 223d are not described, but this is in the other memory area 223z. The same processing as that of the second control example is performed, assuming that it is included and only omitting the description.

  Next, a combination of figures displayed on the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG. Regarding the configurations of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram showing a rotary body operation table showing a combination of graphics of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b and an error range used when setting the combination of the graphics in this control example. Here, the rotating operation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven, its rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b by the transmission mechanism (detailed description is omitted because it is the same as the first embodiment described above). To). The number of teeth of the first gear 353, which is a transmission mechanism that transmits the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a, is set to 14. On the other hand, the number of teeth of the second gear 355, which is a transmission mechanism that transmits the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the second rotary body 340b, is set to 20.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 350 is rotationally driven and the first gear 353 rotates by one tooth, the first rotating body 340a rotates about 25 degrees. The second gear 355 also rotates by one tooth in conjunction with the rotation of the first gear 353 by one tooth. When the second gear 355 rotates by one tooth, the second rotating body 340b rotates about 18 degrees. As described above, since the first rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate at different angles based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350, various combinations can be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. In the rotary body operation table shown in this figure, the vertical axis shows No. Are provided from "1" to "141". No. shown on the vertical axis. Is attached in correspondence with the unit in which the drive motor control means described above performs control, that is, each state in which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 rotate by one tooth based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. No. The state in which the first rotary body 340a has rotated 25 degrees and the second rotary body 340b has rotated 18 degrees from the state shown in No. 1 is No. Shown as 2. In the following, numbers are sequentially assigned based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. No. becomes "141". It returns to the same state as "1". That is, the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 have 140 teeth, that is, the first rotating body 340a rotates 3600 degrees (10 rotations), and the second rotating body 340b rotates 2520 degrees (7 rotations). It is configured to return to the state.

  Further, the rotating body operation table is provided with a first error range and a second error range, and the No. It shows whether the display mode of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b corresponding to is allowed as the display mode of the third symbol. Here, the first error range and the second error range provided in the rotating body operation table will be described. In addition, regarding the mechanism in which an error occurs in the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the structure for preventing the display form from causing an uncomfortable feeling due to the error, the structure described in the first embodiment described above. The description is omitted because it is the same as the above.

  The first error range shown in the rotating body operation table is an error range (12 degrees) set as a range in which the display mode can be visually recognized without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and the second error range is It is a range wider than the first error range and is an error range (30 degrees) set as a range visible to the player.

  For example, the No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b in the state of "48" is "B, B '", and this display mode is set as the first error range. In addition, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b in the state of "89" is also "B, B '", and this display mode is set as the second error range.

  This is No. 1 which is the first error range from the current display mode (display information) of the rotating body obtained in the prefetch reel display effect processing (see FIG. 129) described later. When the amount of rotation until moving to “48” is equal to or more than the predetermined amount, the second error range No. This is so that the correction can be performed so as to move to “89”.

  By setting a plurality of error ranges in this way, when the time to stop each rotating body (remaining variation time of the third symbol) is short, for example, in the winning command that occurs during variable display of the third symbol A predetermined stop display mode is displayed even in the variation effect using the rotating body based on the rotating effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 generated while the third symbol is varyingly displayed. It becomes possible.

  In this control example, the drive motor 350 described in the first embodiment is used, and the first rotating member 340a and the second rotating member 340b are rotated in the forward rotation direction (the ascending direction of No.) or the reverse rotation direction ( It can be rotated in the descending direction of No.) and is controlled by the drive motor control means provided in the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, each table used in the special effect process and the swing effect process 2 added in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a dog breed selection table used in a special effect process (see FIG. 132) described later.

  This breed selection table is based on the points (mission achievement result) acquired while the effect mode is set to mode A, and the special effect (contact time) that is executed while the effect mode is set to mode C. ) Is a table for selecting a dog type used in (1), and is configured so that any one of dog types A to D is selected depending on the mission achievement result.

  The breeds A to D are set so that the degree of increase in reliability in the production (see FIGS. 61 and 62) during the contact time (during time production) and the type of production in which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121B, the degree of increase in reliability is set to “normal”, and the effect in which the reliability can be custom set is set to “reach of fish”. It should be noted that, the more points the mission achievement result has, the higher the performance effect is set for the player, and the breed A is set to be the breed with the highest performance effect.

  Here, the high effect of the effect means, for example, increasing the appearance frequency of the effect (premier effect) that rarely appears in the normal case or expanding the range of the custom setting of the reliability, and thus the normal game. It means making it possible to experience productions that cannot be experienced in the state.

  Next, FIG. 125B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the shaking motion table 2 used in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) described later. This shaking motion table 2 obtains the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the variable status of the variable member (arm member 444) in the shaking control process 2 (see FIG. 132) executed when a shaking effect is being performed. 9 is a table for setting a direction in which the variable member (arm member 444) is rotated based on the acceleration sensor information for performing the operation.

  In the shaking motion table 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b), the button operation timing is divided into three, "81-100", "51-80", and "0-50". This division corresponds to the indicators “a”, “b”, and “c” displayed in FIG. 122 (a), for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed in the circle (center position S In the case of (in), the direction of rotating the variable member (arm member 444) is set by referring to the table of "81 to 100" corresponding to the button operation timing of "a".

  Next, the acceleration sensor information shown in the swing motion table 2 in FIG. 125 (b) is classified based on the information obtained from the acceleration sensor provided in the variable member. When the information acquired from the table indicates that the variable member is rotating to the left, the table of the left rotation period is referred to.

  Then, the rotation direction of the variable member (arm member 444) is set by referring to the table corresponding to the above-mentioned button operation timing and acceleration sensor information. In this control example, when the button operation timing is "81 to 100", data for driving the drive motor in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member increases is set, and when the button operation timing is "51 to 80", , The data for driving the drive motor is not set in order to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. Further, when the button operation timing is “0 to 50”, data for driving the drive motor in the direction in which the rotation width of the variable member becomes smaller is set.

  In this control example, the data for driving the drive motor is not set to maintain the rotation width of the variable member, but the data for driving the drive motor to maintain the rotation width of the variable member is set. You may set it.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 133, a control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This control example is different from the above control examples in that a part of the command determination process, the volume setting process, and the shake control process is changed, and that a special effect process is newly added, and other The parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 126, the details of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main process, first, similarly to the second control example, the processes of S1301 to S1310 are executed. Next, a command determination process 2 is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1351). Details of this command determination processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. After the command determination process 2 (S1351) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed as in the second control example described above, and then the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. This volume setting process 2 is a process executed during the special volume setting effect described with reference to FIG. 118, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the special effect process (S1353) is executed. This special effect process is a process executed during the special effect described in FIGS. 119 and 120, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. Next, the swing control process 2 (S1354) performed during the swing effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 121 is performed. Details of the swing control process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the other processing (S1355) described in the above-described first control example or the second control example is executed, and the processing from S1317 to S1321 is executed similarly to the above-described second control example. In S1355, a synchronization effect management process (S1313), a left / right selection process (S1315), and a reel control process (S1330) are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the details of the command determination processing 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 2 (S1351). In this command determination processing 2 (S1351), a point-of-winning effect change processing (S1451) performed when a special symbol winning command is received is added to the command determination processing (S1311) in the second control example described above. However, the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the command determination process 2, first, the processes of S1401 to S1410 are executed similarly to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 88). Next, when it is determined in S1410 that the winning command of the special symbol is not received (S1410: No), the process (S1412) corresponding to the other command is executed similarly to the command determination process described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1410 that the special symbol winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area (S1411), and the winning effect changing process is performed. (S1451) is executed. This winning production effect changing process (S1451) is, when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device 110, executes an effect changing process based on the winning command. See below. Then, the effect changing process at the time of winning (S1451) is executed and then the process proceeds to S1412.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a winning command for a special symbol is received from the main control device 110, an effect (so-called prefetching effect) based on the information included in the winning command can be realized. Are described as follows. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects by changing the effect at a timing other than the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, and thus it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of the player. There is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the prize winning effect change process (S1451) performed in the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the effect changing process (S1451) at the time of winning a prize. In the prize effect changing process (S1451), a process related to an effect (so-called prefetch effect) executed based on the information included in the received prize command is executed.

  In the effect changing process at the time of winning, first, the winning information received this time is extracted from the winning information storage area (S4401). Next, it is determined whether the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the look-ahead effect (S4402). If the extracted winning information does not include the information corresponding to the prefetching effect (S4402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the prefetching effect (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the prefetching effect is the chance eye display effect (S4403).

  This chance eye display effect is an effect executed based on the determination result of the prize command received this time, and the third symbol executed until the third symbol variation based on the prize command received this time is started. In the fluctuation, the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is a predetermined specific combination other than the combination that becomes the big hit, and this is an effect that suggests that there is a big hit in the determination result of the reserved symbols.

  When it is determined in S4403 that the prefetch effect is not the chance display effect (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prefetch effect is the chance display effect (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404).

  Here, when it is determined that the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404: Yes), the stop symbol for display in which the stop symbol is the chance is set (S4413), and the process proceeds to S4408.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the third symbol is not changing at high speed (S4404: No), it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the third symbol is more than 3 seconds (S4405). If the variation remaining time of the third symbol is 3 seconds or less (S4405: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time of fluctuation of the third symbol is more than 3 seconds (S4405: Yes), the reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table based on the remaining time of fluctuation (S4406), and the setting start flag is set. Set to on. Then, the process proceeds to S4408.

  As described above, in the chance eye display effect in the present control example, it is possible to change the mode in which the chance eye is displayed according to the timing at which the winning command including the information for executing the chance target indication effect is received. That is, when the timing of receiving the prize command is changing the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at a high speed, the process of changing the stopped symbol of the variation to the chance is executed. Even if the player does not feel uncomfortable, the stop symbol of the third symbol, which is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, is set as a display stop type command for a chance. On the other hand, when the timing of receiving the prize command is not changing at a high speed, the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, at least one of the plurality of symbol columns is stopped and displayed). At the timing of timing, or at the time of low-speed display at which at least one of the plurality of symbol rows allows the player to visually recognize fluctuations in the symbol), a reel member (first rotor 340a The third symbol is synthesized and displayed by the outer peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b, and a member for variably displaying a plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol displayed on the screen is raised to a position (exposure position) that covers the third symbol, and the opportunity is controlled to be displayed.

  With this configuration, even if the winning command including the information of the chance display effect is received at the timing when the third symbol is stopped or changed at a low speed on the display screen, the player feels strange. It is possible to display the chance eyes without any. Therefore, when the winning command including the information of the chance display effect is received, the stop display of the changing third symbol can be changed to the chance, and the changing third symbol can be changed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. This has the effect of lengthening the period during which the stop display can be changed to a chance.

  In this control example, the remaining variation time of the third symbol is determined in S4405. This is to raise the reel member stored in the storage position, which is difficult for the player to see in the normal game state, to the exposed position that covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by driving the rotating body lifting unit 300. If the time required to raise the reel member to the exposed position is shortened, the remaining fluctuation time determined in S4405 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present control example, the reel member stored in the storage position is reel-controlled so that the display mode synthesized and displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member corresponds to the chance pattern of the third symbol. That is, after the third symbol variation effect using the reel member is finished and the reel member is lowered to the storage position by the rotating body lifting unit 300, the reel control described above is executed. It should be noted that the display mode displayed on the display surface when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are located at the origin position (initial position) may be configured to correspond to the chance eye. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a reel control that makes the display mode of the reel member an opportunity, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 128, the description will be continued. Next, the prefetch reel display effect process is executed (S4408). Here, the prefetch reel display effect, in order to securely display the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the information of the prefetch reel display effect, within the variation time, the prefetch reel It is a process of changing the display mode of the reel member until the symbol variation corresponding to the winning command including the information of the display effect is started. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the pre-reading reel display effect process (S4408) is executed, it is determined whether the pre-reading effect is the special volume setting effect (S4409). Here, the special volume setting effect is an effect indicating a period during which a special volume setting different from the normal volume setting (see FIG. 93) is possible, and when the volume is set by this special volume setting, While the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, the expected jackpot of the changing special symbol and the expected jackpot of the pending symbol are notified using a special voice, volume, or display mode.

  If it is not determined in S4409 that the prefetch effect is the special volume setting (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4412. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is the special volume setting (S4409: Yes), the display stop type command in which the blank symbol (sub symbol) is changed to the volume symbol is set (S4410). Then, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to ON (S4411).

  Next, other processing related to the prefetch effect is executed (S4412). Here, as other processing, for example, there is processing for changing the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information included in the winning command. After executing the other prefetching processing in S4412, this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the winning command of the special symbol is received from the main control device, the prefetching effect is executed based on the information included in the winning command. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that suggests the result of the determination based on the winning in the period between the winning of the ball in the winning opening and the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the details of the prefetch reel display effect process (S4408) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the prefetch reel display effect processing (S4408). The pre-reading reel display effect process (S4408) is a process related to the pre-reading effect that is performed during the above-described winning-time effect changing process (S1451).

  When the prefetch reel display effect process is started, first, the current display information of the reel member (the sub-third symbol information displayed on the reel member) and the prefetch stop display information (the sub-third symbol based on the winning command) Stop display information) is acquired (S4501). The sub-third symbol displayed on the reel member is formed by combining and displaying the symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is controlled by the rotation drive of the drive motor 350.

  Therefore, the current display information can be acquired by detecting the rotational drive status of the drive motor 350. Specifically, the number of steps (the number of pulses) for driving the drive motor 350, which is a stepping motor, to rotate is detected, and a portion corresponding to the current step number is acquired from the rotary body operation table as current display information.

  Further, with the acquisition of the prefetch stop display information, the stop display symbol of the sub-third symbol based on the prize command is determined from the information included in the prize command, and the stop display symbol is the first from the rotating body operation table. No. displayed within the error range. It is to get information.

  Next, the rotation amount is calculated using the current display information acquired as described above and the prefetch stop display method (S4502). Specifically, in the rotating body operation table, the No. corresponding to the current display information. And the prefetch stop display information corresponds to the No. Calculate the difference between and. In this control example, the drive motor 350 is configured to be capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation. And the case where the drive motor 350 is rotated in the reverse direction (the case where the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. decreases), the smaller rotation amount is calculated.

  Then, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated in S4502 is the rotation amount that rotates the first rotating body more than 1080 degrees (S4503). Here, the rotation amount of the first rotating body will be described. In this control example, it takes about 1 second for the first rotating body to complete one revolution. That is, in S4503, the No. corresponding to the current display information. No. corresponding to the prefetch stop display information. It is determined whether the number of seconds required to move (rotate) to is 3 seconds or more.

  In the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the rotation amount is the rotation amount to rotate more than 1080 degrees (S4503: Yes), the No. corresponding to the stop display information is displayed. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4504. According to the rotation operation table shown in FIG. 124, the No. corresponding to the current information is displayed. However, the No. corresponding to the stop display information in the first error range. No. need to rotate more than 1080 degrees to rotate up to No. If it is No. No. corresponding to the stop display information in the second error range within the rotation range of 1080 degrees or less. Is present, the No. corresponding to the stop display information in the process of S4506. By correcting from the first error range to the second error range, the rotation amount can be corrected within 3 seconds.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4503, when it is determined that the rotation amount is 1080 degrees or less, the corresponding reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table (S4504), and the setting start flag is set to ON (S4505). Then, this process ends.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table is a table referred to in the effect control process (prefetch control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (fluctuation pattern selection process) executed when a variation pattern command is received. ) Are separately provided.

  In S4504, the reel scenario table corresponding to the prefetch control process is referred to. In the reel scenario table, the reel member constituted by the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is located at a position where the player can visually recognize it (exposed position) or at a position where the player cannot visually recognize it (storage position). The reel position that determines whether or not to position the reel member, the rotation speed of the reel member as a rotating operation, the presence or absence of pre-rotation, and the presence or absence of a notification effect that notifies the player that the pre-read reel display effect is being performed. A plurality of predetermined scenarios are prepared, and are configured to be appropriately selected and set based on the information included in the winning command, the amount of rotational movement, and the number of reserved symbols (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  The pre-rotation provided in the reel scenario table is No. corresponding to the current display information. From the No. corresponding to the stop display information. The rotation operation up to, not only during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the prefetch information (information of the prefetch reel display effect), the prize command including the prefetch information (information of the prefetch reel display effect) No. corresponding to the current display information while other variable display (pre-variation display) executed until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to No. From the No. corresponding to the stop display information. It is a control to rotate the reel symbol in advance toward.

  The control of the pre-rotation is based on the number of pre-variation display (or the number of holding symbols) of the pre-rotation amount, and a pattern in which the pre-rotation amount is made uniform for each variation display and the rotation amount. There is a pattern in which the pre-rotation movement amount is set based on the value, which is set based on the value acquired from the effect counter and the variation time of each variation display.

  By using such a configuration, even if the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the prefetch information (information of the prefetch reel display effect) is short, the angle at which the reel is rotated during the variable display ( It is possible to reduce the number of rotations in advance, and it is possible to provide the look-ahead reel display effect to the player without any discomfort.

  In the case of performing the above-described pre-rotation, the effect pattern of raising the reel to the exposed position, performing the pre-rotation, and lowering the reel to the storage position again, and the pre-rotation with the reel in the storage position are performed. It is advisable to provide both an effect pattern for performing.

  With such a configuration, by performing the pre-rotation at the exposure position in the former effect pattern, the player is informed that the pre-read reel display effect is being performed, and the player is expected. In the latter effect pattern, which makes it possible to play the game, by performing the pre-rotation at the storage position, it is possible to carry out the contents of the pre-rotation without notifying the player, as if any pattern It is possible to make (the stop display with the No. corresponding to the stop display information) appear to be displayed quickly.

  Further, as the notification effect for notifying the player that the pre-reading reel display effect is being performed, there is an effect in which the container 300, which is a reel member, is driven to swing at the storage position, and a plurality of values are obtained based on the value acquired from the effect counter. It is set appropriately from the swing pattern.

  As a condition for selecting a scenario from the reel scenario table, a game state or a game result may be added. With this configuration, it is possible to complicate the effect pattern, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Although the rotation speed of the first rotating body 340a has been described as one rotation for about 1 second, in actuality, by controlling the pulse width (frequency) input to the drive motor 350, low speed rotation, medium speed rotation, It is configured so that high-speed rotation and rotation speed can be changed. In the process of S4503, the No. corresponding to the stop display information is based on the rotation speed when the low speed rotation is performed. A correction boundary value (1080 degrees) for correcting the above from the first error range to the second error range is provided.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to stop display the stop display information, regardless of the rotation speed set in the reel scenario set in S4504.

  In this control example, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated based on the current display information and the prefetch stop display information is larger than a predetermined amount. No. displayed the stop display pattern Is configured to be acquired from within the second error range, but the stop display symbol may be set from within the first error range or within the second error range by other methods. For example, the time until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command including the information of the prefetch reel display effect is started as the prefetch effect, or until the variable display of the third symbol based on the winning command is stopped. You may make it set whether to acquire a stop display symbol from a 1st error range or a 2nd error range based on time. With this configuration, the player can be more surely caused to display the stop display information.

  Further, in the present control example, the present process is configured as a process (so-called prefetching effect process) of the effect based on the reception of the winning command, but, for example, the process of the effect based on the reception of the variation pattern command. This process may be used as With this configuration, it is possible to determine which error range to set the stop display symbol based on the variation time of the variation, and the problem that the stop display cannot be made in time within the variation time. It becomes possible to suppress.

  In addition to this, it may be used for an effect executed based on the player operating the frame button 22. As such an effect, for example, before the player operates the frame button 22, the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22. The production in which the variable display of the third symbol is changed to a mode using the reel member is conceivable.

  Even when performing such an effect, the variable display of the third symbol displayed on the liquid crystal corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, the third symbol using the reel member during the variable display of the special symbol In the case of using the effect of switching to the variable display, as in the present control example, the stop display mode of the third symbol using the reel member is configured to be settable from the first error range and the second error range. If the fluctuation remaining time of the symbol has a margin, it can be set from the first error range, and if there is no margin in the fluctuation time, it can be set from the second error range. Therefore, the stop display will be in time within the fluctuation time. It becomes possible to suppress such a problem as not to occur, and by providing the second error range, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from the liquid crystal display to the reel member even when the remaining time of fluctuation of the special symbol is reduced. For To change to the display was able to allow.

  Further, in this control example, the symbol (liquid crystal symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol (rotary symbol) synthetically displayed by the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are respectively designated as Although it is used as 3 symbols, other than that, for example, only the liquid crystal symbol is used as the 3rd symbol, and the rotary symbol may be used as the effect symbol for effect (the symbol which does not directly correspond to the variable display of the special symbol), or the liquid crystal symbol. May be used as the effect symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as the third symbol. Further, the third symbol may be switched from the liquid crystal symbol to the rotary symbol during one variable display. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide various effects by combining the third symbol and the effect symbol.

  Next, the details of the volume setting process 2 (S1352) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the volume setting processing 2 (S1352). The volume setting process 2 (S1352) is different from the above-described volume setting process (S1314) in that a process when the volume setting period flag 223α is determined to be ON is added, and other parts are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the volume setting process 2, first, it is determined whether the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601). When it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is not turned on (S4601: No), the above-described volume setting process (S1314) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the special volume setting flag 223β is set on (S4602). When the special volume setting flag 223β is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is determined whether the volume symbol is selected by the player (S4603).

  In the processing of S4603, when it is determined that the volume symbol is not selected (S4603: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume pattern is selected (S4603: Yes), the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON (S4604), and the display command indicating the display of the special volume setting screen is set (S4605). . Next, a special volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

  When the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON, the volume level controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 is switched from the volume level in the normal game to the special volume level in the special volume setting effect. With this configuration, when the special volume setting effect is finished and the normal game is returned to, the volume level operated during the special volume setting effect is automatically switched to the volume level in the normal game. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a troublesome operation in which the player sets the volume of the pachinko machine 10 again to the volume level suitable for the normal game.

  Returning to the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the special volume setting flag 223β is ON (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607). If it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a has been pressed (S4607: Yes), the special volume level is increased to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4608), and the display command indicating the special volume level is displayed. Is set (S4609). On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a is not pressed (S4607: No), then it is determined whether the lower selection switch 291b is pressed (S4610).

  In the process of S4610, when it is determined that the lower selection switch 291b is not pressed (S4610: No), the process proceeds to the special volume setting period management process (S4606). On the other hand, if it is determined that the down selection switch 291b has been pressed (S4610: Yes), the special volume level is lowered and set to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4611), and the display indicating the special volume level is displayed. Command is set (S4612). Next, a special volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

  The special volume setting period management process (S4606) is a process of managing the period during which the special volume is set, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. After the processing of S4606 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, details of the special sound volume setting period management processing (S4606) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the volume setting period management processing (S4606).

  In the volume setting period management process, first, it is determined whether the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701). Here, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop command corresponding to the winning information in which the special volume setting effect is set is received (S4702). This determination is made by receiving the stop command set in S300 of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 77) executed in main controller 110.

  In the present control example, the winning command and the stop command output from the main control device are provided with identification information that can be linked, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 indicates the winning command based on the identification information. Although the winning information and the stop command are configured to be associated with each other, other configurations may be used. For example, an area in which prize information including special volume setting performance information is stored in the prize information storage area is stored, and an area in which prize information including special volume setting performance information is stored is shifted to the execution area. You may make it the structure which manages that.

  Returning to FIG. 131, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4702 that there is no stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect has been set (not received yet) (S4702: No), this process ends because the volume setting period is still in progress. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect is set is received (received), the special volume level is cleared (S4703), and the display command for erasing the display of the special volume setting screen is displayed. Is set (S4704). Next, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to OFF (S4705), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the volume set in the special volume setting process executed during the special volume setting effect is set as the special volume level, which can be stored and set separately from the normal volume level. Has been done. Therefore, when the special volume setting effect is finished and the game returns to the normal game, the volume set in the normal game before the special volume setting effect is started (the volume level stored in the volume setting storage area) It is possible to return to the ready.

  Next, details of the special effect process (S1353) performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special effect process (S1353).

  In the special effect process, first, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode A (S4801). When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the mode A (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current effect mode is the mode A (S4801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a mini game is in progress (S4802). Here, the mini game is a game effect shown in FIG. 120A in which the player operates the operation means (frame button 22, touch switch 290, selection switch 291) to obtain points.

  In the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the mini game is not in progress (S4802: No), the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mini game is in progress (S4802: Yes), points corresponding to the result of the mini game are added to the acquired point storage area (S4803), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4804). ). Then, the process proceeds to S4805.

  Next, it is determined whether the current effect is a specific effect (S4805). Here, the specific effect is a predetermined effect that can earn points by appearing among the effects generated in the normal game shown in FIG. 120 (b). In the process of S4805, when it is determined that the effect is not the specific effect (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the specific effect (S4805: Yes), points corresponding to the specific effect are added to the acquired point storage area (S4806), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4807).

  As described above, in the special effect process when the effect mode is the mode A, a process of adding points acquired by the player based on the mini game or the specific effect is performed. Note that another method may be used as a method for allowing the player to obtain points during the production mode A. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that a predetermined password can be input, and the points can be added by the player inputting the predetermined password. The points may be added based on the number of balls.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the process (S4802-S4807) when the effect mode is the mode A is executed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is the mode B (S4808). When it is determined that the effect mode is not the mode B (S4808: No), the process proceeds to S4811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect mode is the mode B (S4808: Yes), then the dog type is selected from the dog type selection table (see FIG. 125 (a)) based on the number of points in the acquired point storage area. (S4809). Then, a display command indicating the dog type is set (S4810), and the process proceeds to S4811.

  As described above, in the special effect process when the effect mode is the mode B, a process of selecting a dog breed used in the mode C described later is performed based on the points acquired in the mode A. In this control example, by selecting a specific dog breed from a plurality of types of dogs, the content of the setting performed during mode C (reliability of the rendering and the type of rendering that sets the reliability) is changed. However, even if the player can select the type of setting performed in mode C and the degree of increase in reliability based on the points acquired in mode A in mode B, Good. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to increase the range that the player can select as the number of points acquired in the mode A increases. By doing so, the player can positively gain points, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing early.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the process (S4809 to S4810) when the effect mode is the mode B is performed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is the mode C (S48118). When it is determined that the effect mode is not the mode C (S4811: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is mode C (S4811: Yes), the effect corresponding to the dog breed set in S4809 is set (S4812). Then, the above-described special SW effect control process (FIG. 98, S2203) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, the effect (special effect) in which the reliability of the game effect executed when the effect mode is the mode C can be changed (custom setting) can be set. With regard to the above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that it is possible to change the type of the effect to be custom-set and the degree of increase in the reliability of the effect based on the points acquired when the effect mode is the mode A. Even when the player stays in the effect mode, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the game effect at all times, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  Next, referring to FIG. 133, the details of the shake control process 2 (S1354) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the shake control process 2 (S1354).

  In the swing control process 2, first, it is determined whether the operating flag is set to ON (S4901). When it is determined that the operating flag is set to ON (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the in-operation flag is not set to ON (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the variation pattern is a swing effect (S4902).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4902 that the fluctuation pattern is not the shaking effect (S4902: No), other shaking control processing (S4911) is executed, and this processing ends. The other shaking control processing executed in S4911 is the shaking control processing (S1316) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S49028 that the fluctuation pattern is a swing effect (S4902: Yes), initial motion data for driving the arm member 444 (movable accessory) in a predetermined manner is set ( (S4903), the operating flag is set to ON (S4904). Next, the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the movable accessory is read to obtain the swing information of the movable accessory (S4905). Then, a display command for moving the indicator is set based on the information of the acceleration sensor (S4906). The indicator corresponding to the display command set here becomes the indicator displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a).

  When the process of S4906 is executed, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated next (S4907). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907: Yes), the shaking motion data (see FIG. 125 (b)) based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the information of the acceleration sensor is used for the shaking motion data. To set. Then, it is determined whether or not the shaking effect has ended (S4909).

  If it is determined that the shaking effect has not ended (S4909: No), this processing ends, while if it is determined that the shaking effect has ended (S4909: Yes), the operating flag is turned off. The setting is made (S4910), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the swing control process 2 in this control example, the operation status of the movable accessory is acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 (movable accessory), and is operated by the player. Based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 (operating means) and the operating condition of the movable accessory, the movable accessory is moved in a direction in which it largely shakes (moving direction), or a direction in which the movable accessory shakes slightly (moves). The movable member is actually controlled to move based on the player's operation, because the swing motion (movable motion) table 2 is used to set whether to move in the direction). As a result, it is possible to urge the player to positively operate the operation means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the present control example, an indicator (operation timing notification display) for notifying the timing at which the player operates the operating means is provided on the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation status of the movable accessory obtained from the information of the acceleration sensor. Since it can be displayed on the display screen, the player can cause the movable accessory to perform a desired movable operation by operating the operation means while watching the operation timing notification display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114, and when the command is received by the display controller 114, the display controller 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. Then, after that, the display control device 114 may be configured to transmit a command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, is in use). Resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, in use). ) And) may be provided in the image controller 237 and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and from the state of the signal, the resident It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, whether the scan is in the blank period, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237, or a notification from the image controller 237. If the scanning state is in the blank period, the video RAMs 235 and 236 may be determined to be unused. Thereby, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data that is not Null data to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table etc., the drawing of that sprite The image data which is not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by utilizing the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform the important process such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can perform the transfer process of.

  In the above-described embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM and each video RAM may be managed. With this configuration, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the storage RAM type is not included, and the address set in the common address system is simply used. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be directly connected to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit such as a hard disk. May be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, an image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first provides the area after the system reset is released. It is also possible to store a part of the boot program that is executed by the. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after system reset is released. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) is provided with the first program storage area 234d1, and a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). It is also possible to provide a first program storage area in that memory and store a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. In, a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, a case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and thus the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. As a result, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by being connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connected to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-port type is also possible. Type RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while reading image data from the normal video RAM 236 and drawing an image, the data is read from the character ROM 234. It is possible to perform parallel processing of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drawing process from being delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I / O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferably resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by the drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten during power-on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 is not necessarily limited thereto. Based on a command received from the third symbol display device 81, when the image to be displayed is greatly different, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger. Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated when the other resident images are updated, and is retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You can leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly made resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to (data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may do so.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is displayed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read the image data that should be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is stored is stored in advance. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM judgment value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, and therefore the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to. In this case, the image data may be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the instantaneous blackout and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If so, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for restoration from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a whose reading speed is slow, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank region which is the scanning region other than the display region in which the actual image is displayed, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. Corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are turned on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area. Although the case of transferring to the 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is being displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used for power-on. When the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like, The image data to be made resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Further, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read from the memory, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command and the frame button. The case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the effect mode of super reach is changed based on the operation command has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image and the super reach according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the effect mode of super reach according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the changed super-reach of the effect mode is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the combined data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is defined. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, by transmitting an error command to the display control device 114, The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110, The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may transmit an error command for notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and further transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 Corresponding to an address in which the time (20 msec in this embodiment) for displaying an image for a frame is defined as one unit, at that time, the type of the sprite whose color tone is changed and the sprite after the change in the sprite The color information specifying the color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing content of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with an address represented by 1 unit of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) displayed, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added to each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, ...) For identifying the additionally displayable effect. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used, according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame in which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so that the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. Alternatively, the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and the image information is output to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d and before the finalized display effect is completed, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received, when setting the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect in the display data table buffer 233d Although described, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d as the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect is produced until either the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113. The fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d each time the display ends. As a result, it is possible to continue displaying the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect is described as a case where the rear image is changed and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image which is completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. In the case of transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on after the transfer is completed on the third symbol display device 81, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned on. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, image data to be resident including image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be used in the operation check in the player, the hall personnel, or the factory at the time of manufacturing. You can immediately check that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Thus, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. On the basis of the above, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is preferably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on variation image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) and the contents to be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be defined at every predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, if the third symbol display device 81 is to display an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

  Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn that is defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for identifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is also stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It has been described that the MPU 231 determines whether or not the normal video RAM 236 stores the predetermined sprite type image data in the normal video RAM 236, and executes the transfer process non-execution process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to check whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. May be stored. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if the MPU 231 needs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 236 regardless of the storage state of the image data. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” of the plurality of rear images is made to be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times that the

  In the above-described embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 instructs the transfer instruction at the predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case has been described where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is configured to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234 normally. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to be transferred to the dedicated video RAM 236.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the back surface C that is the back image of the “island stage” changes with time has been described, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. Further, as the back image, not only those that scroll or change in color tone over time, but instead of such a back image, an object that appears over time (for example, a person) It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 uses the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of the winning prize to be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 as the number of reserved balls. Although the case of including in the command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of winning the start prize is voice-lamped by another command. The control device 113 may be notified.

  In the above-described embodiment, when performing the variation effect, the case where the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so that the player cannot visually recognize them is described, but instead of the display of this high-speed variation. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which one first winning opening 64 is provided in the game board 13 to start the special symbol jackpot lottery when a ball is entered, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of one, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started may be provided in the game board 13. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each of the first entrances indicates which of the first entrances has been held. Information may be included. Further, when the fluctuation starts, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 may include information indicating which of the first entrances the fluctuation effect is held. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entered indicated by the reserved ball number command. When the number of holding balls for the mouth is set to the number of holding balls and the variation pattern command is received, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 performs the main control of the reserved ball number command each time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). The case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c in the main controller 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load on the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the first winning hole 64 and the passage of the through gate 66 or 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of balls to be variably displayed based on winning in the first winning opening 64 is a numeral in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of balls to be reserved. A mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and it is not limited to the vertical direction. The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or in a variety of different motion displays or changed displays. It also includes display effects that are displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot several times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In addition, in this control example, the normal gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability as the gaming state and the probability variation gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability can be set, and the ordinary symbol is more likely to hit. Although a pachinko machine that can set a time saving state that is a gaming state and a normal state in which a normal symbol is harder to hit than the time saving state is used, the pachinko machine having other gaming states may be implemented. For example, when the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a probability fluctuation state, if the value of the specific first random number counter C1 is acquired, it is advantageous for the player even if the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is incorrect. The second probability variation game state in which the state (so-called small hit) is set with a higher probability than usual may be settable. In addition, the small hit is a state in which the ball can be won in the variable winning a prize device 65 within a predetermined condition range, although the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is won.

  With such a configuration, the player who has entered the probability variation game state will play the game aiming at the second probability variation game state, which is a more advantageous state for the player, and may get tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the case where the second probability variation game state can be set, a limit (for example, 100 times) is set to the number of times of determination of the special symbols executed during the probability variation game state, and when the number of times of determination is exceeded. May be configured to shift from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state. By configuring in this way, the probability variation game state does not continue until the next big hit if it becomes the probability variation game state as in the past, so even if it is during the probability variation game state, concentrate on the player. A game can be played.

  In this way, when the second probability variation game state is set on a pachinko machine or the like in which the number of times of winning / decision determination is limited to the special symbol in the probability variation game state, the second probability variation game state is set, and the player obtains more balls during the second probability variation game state. You will be aware of big hits and small hits. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to concentrate on playing the game, and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Further, when using a game machine that can set the second probability variation game state, it is good to provide a plurality of third symbol display devices and switch the device for performing variable display of the third symbol according to the game state. By doing so, it is possible to inform the surrounding players that the player is playing the game in the most favorable game state such as the second probability variation game state, and the player can be satisfied. Can be provided.

  As the plurality of third symbol display devices, the third symbol display device 81 used in this control example, and a reel member (the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body) provided in the rotating body lifting unit 300. It is advisable to use a member for synthesizing and displaying the third symbol by the outer peripheral surface of 340b and variably displaying a plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body. With such a configuration, the variable display of the third symbol can be displayed in different modes such as the display on the liquid crystal and the rotation display by the reel member, and the difference in appearance can be clarified.

  In addition, by raising and lowering control of the rotating body raising and lowering unit 300, the rotating body raising and lowering unit 300 is moved to an exposure position (a position that covers at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device) visible to the player, or the player moves Since it can be moved to a storage position that is difficult to visually recognize (a position that is stored inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)), for example, the variable display of the third symbol in the second probability variation gaming state is reeled. By being configured to be performed by the members, it is possible to let the surroundings know that the rotating body elevating unit 300 is located at the exposed position and play the game in the second probability variation gaming state, and the player is satisfied. It can provide a feeling.

  Further, as the raising / lowering control of the rotating body raising / lowering unit 300, by performing an operation in which the rotating body raising / lowering unit 300 moves back and forth between the stored position and the exposed position, an effect that suggests the current game state to the player is provided. Since it can be performed, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the second probability variation game state, the variable display indicating whether or not the special symbol hit determination result is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol hit determination result in the reel member is a small hit. The variable display indicating whether or not each may be executed. With this configuration, for example, the player pays attention to the reel member in which the variable display indicating whether or not it is a small hit in the first half period of the second probability variation game state is performed, and the latter half of the second probability variation game state. Attention will be paid to the third symbol display device 81 in which a variable display suggesting whether or not it is a big hit is performed when the period comes. As a result, the player can easily confirm the determination result of the desired special symbol.

  In addition, using a different display device, the variable display that indicates whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit and the variable display that indicates whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit When displaying at the same time, either one may be displayed as the third symbol and the other may be displayed as the decorative symbol. Further, instead of the variable display of symbols, a story effect such as whether or not a given mission can be achieved, or an effect using only a sound or a lamp, or the like, may be used to suggest the result of win / fail judgment. Further, the display device that is variably displayed may be switched based on the determination result of the special symbol.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variation display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and finally displayed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls that are dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<About the concept of the invention with the left and right sensor device 600 as an example>
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a light-transmissive transparent plate disposed at a front side of the game board with a space through which a game medium can pass, and a rear side of the game board. Displaceable member that is arranged so that it can be seen by the player through the opening of the game board, and a sensor device that detects an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening of the game board. In the gaming machine described above, the displacing member is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of a detection area of the sensor device.

  Here, for example, an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light toward the front of the game board (a plate glass of the front frame) and a light receiving unit that receives the light reflected from the object is provided, and the optical sensor of the player is used. A device that detects the presence or movement of a finger is known (for example, JP 2010-094348 A). In this case, the path of the light of the optical sensor (irradiation light and reflected light) is set so as not to overlap the moving region of the displaceable member (for example, paragraph 0045 of JP 2010-094348 A). And Fig. 5). Therefore, there is a problem that the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and the displacement member cannot be effectively utilized.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area of the sensor device, so that the displacement of the displacement member affects the detection area of the sensor device. You can That is, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, whereby the displacement member can be utilized.

  The sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, and for example, an optical sensor device (irradiating means for irradiating light composed of visible light or invisible light and an object (object) irradiated from the irradiating means). And a light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by (1) to evaluate the received light). As an evaluation method of the received light, a triangulation method for converting the image forming position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence or absence (distance) of the object, or the time required from the irradiation of the light to the reception of the light An example is a time-of-flight formula that converts the value into the presence or absence (distance) of the object.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the displacement member has a detection area of the first sensor and a detection area of the second sensor. A gaming machine A2, which is capable of being displaced to a position that divides.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the displacement member can be displaced to a position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor. The two areas can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the operation of causing the player to select one of the two detection areas.

  On the other hand, by retracting the displacement member from the position that divides the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, the division of these two detection areas by the displacement member can be released. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, a detection area detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can be displaced in a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor, and the displacement of the displacement member causes the first sensor to move. The game machine A3 is characterized in that the size of at least one of the detection area of the second sensor and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can displace a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor. With the displacement of the displacement member, the size of at least one of the detection region of the first sensor and the detection region of the second sensor can be changed. Thereby, for example, when the player performs an operation of detecting his or her hand or finger, the player can search the detection area.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at the predetermined position. That is, the sensor device can serve as both the means for detecting the object on the front side of the transparent plate and the means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member, and there is no need to separately provide means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. .. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a light emitting unit is provided that is capable of emitting light, and the displacement member is displaceable to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting unit from entering the sensor device. A gaming machine A5 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided, it is possible to perform an effect by the light emission of the light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means can be suppressed from being received by the sensor device. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4. Further, since the member for blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device can be used also as the displacement member, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be retracted from the shielding position and a space can be secured, so that the space can be used as a space for displacement of another displacement member. it can.

  In the gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged at different positions, and the displacement member causes the light emission from the light emitting means to enter the sensor device according to the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means. The game machine A6, wherein the displacement member is displaceable to a position where it can be shielded.

  According to the gaming machine A6, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means to emit light among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device in accordance with the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means. It is possible to suppress light from being received by the. As a result, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5. Further, in the case of providing a fixed member capable of shielding the light emitted from any one of the plurality of light emitting means from entering the sensor device, a large space is required for disposing such a member. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for another displacement member to be displaced.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, a second displacing member is provided which is displaceably arranged on the back side of the game board and is visible through an opening of the game board, and the light emitting means is arranged, The displacing member is configured such that the displacing member can be displaced to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device according to the displacing position of the second displacing member. Playing machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, since the light emitting means is arranged on the second displaceable member which is displaceably formed, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light at a different position according to the displacement of the second displaceable member. .. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device according to the displaced position of the second displacement member. It is possible to suppress light from being received by the. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, when a fixed member capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from entering the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large space is required for disposing the member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for another displacement member to be displaced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor which are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, and the sensor device emits light from one of the first sensor and the second sensor. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive light reflected by dirt on the transparent plate.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor that are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, and the first sensor or the second sensor. Since the light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate is formed so that the other of the first sensor and the second sensor can receive the light, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to see. At the same time, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of stains on the transparent plate (for example, oil on the player's hand).

  For example, in a configuration in which one sensor device is arranged at a position deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the game board and the light emitted from the sensor device is obliquely applied to the transparent plate, the sensor device is seen from the front. Can be made less visible to the player, and an object existing on the front side of the transparent plate (for example, the player's hand or finger) can be detected. However, since the incident angle of the light emitted from the sensor device with respect to the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the dirt of the transparent plate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, for example, by arranging the first sensor and the second sensor at positions deeper in the width direction than the edges of the opening across the opening of the gaming board, It can be made hard to see by the player. In this case, when the light emitted from one of the first sensor and the second sensor is reflected by the dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor and the second sensor, and the dirt on the transparent plate is received. When there is no light, the light emitted from one of the first sensor and the second sensor passes through the transparent plate and is not received by the other of the first sensor and the second sensor. This makes it possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate.

  It should be noted that the detection of the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate by the first sensor and the second sensor is preferably performed in a process when the power of the game machine is turned on. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, since the player is not in the store, it is not necessary to distinguish between the object (player's hand or finger) on the front side of the transparent plate and the stain on the transparent plate. This is because it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the emitted light on a surface on which the light emitted from the sensor device is emitted. Playing machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the emitted light on the surface on which the light emitted from the sensor device is emitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control load can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a part of the displacement member to which the light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated is formed of a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light. Aircraft A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member is formed of a material through which the emitted light from the sensor device is radiated. It is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control load can be suppressed.

  Further, since the above-mentioned portion of the displacement member is formed of a material capable of transmitting the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device is transmitted, and the transmitted light is transmitted to the object on the front side of the transparent plate. In addition to being able to irradiate, the light reflected by the object can be transmitted, and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. Accordingly, the displacement member can be displaced while ensuring the detection area of the sensor device.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member has a reflecting surface formed on a surface irradiated with light emitted from the sensor device, the reflective surface reflecting the irradiated light in a direction different from that of the sensor device. A gaming machine A11 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member is a reflection that reflects the emitted light in a direction different from that of the sensor device, on the surface on which the light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated. Since the surface is formed, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is the light reflected by the object on the front side of the transparent plate or the light reflected by the displacement member. The detection accuracy of the object can be improved, the determination process can be simplified, and the control load can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention with the central floating unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a displaceable displacement member, a first member displaceably disposed on the displaceable member, and drive means for applying a driving force to the displaceable member, the displaceable member A gaming machine B1 comprising a pair of arm members which are displaceable independently of each other, and the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  Here, it is known that a displaceable displaceable member is provided and an effect is produced by displacement of the displaceable member. Further, there is also one in which a first member is further provided on the front surface of the displacement member and the effect is enhanced by rotating the first member (for example, JP 2012-105873 A). However, in the above-mentioned thing, there was a problem that the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and the first member rotates, and the change of the movement of the first member is poor.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the displacement member is provided with a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and one end of the pair of arm members is connected to the first member, the pair of arm members are separated from each other. By displacing independently, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  Further, since the displacement member is connected to the arm member so as to be relatively displaceable, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member and both are displaced by independent displacement, or when the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the displacement of the first member is continued. This can be done, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  The displacement of the arm member may be, for example, a rotation about the other end side, a slide displacement at the other end side, or a combination of these (one of the arm members rotates and the other slide displacement). , Each adopted form) and the like.

  As a mode in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, a shaft provided in one of the arm member and the first member is provided in a shaft hole provided in the other. A configuration in which the supported shaft is relatively displaceable by rotating the shaft with respect to the shaft hole, and a pin provided on one of the arm member and the first member slides along a slide groove provided on the other. In which the arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member and the elastic member is elastically deformed to be relatively displaceable, and the arm member and the first member are disposed on one of the arm member and the first member. A spherical ball provided on the other side is relatively displaceable by rotating in an arbitrary direction with respect to a stud that is in spherical contact with the ball. The arm member and the first member have one or a plurality of link mechanisms (not deformed). Seki where knots are moving parts Form that allows relative displacement by coupled linkage via a connected system) is deformed, and the form of a combination of each of these embodiments are illustrated by.

  In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is relatively displaceable, and are driven by the driving force given by the driving means. A gaming machine B2, which is rotated about the other end.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at one end opposite to the one end at which the first member is disposed so as to be driven. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate loci whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that is a combination of the linear motion and the rotary motion, and it is possible to change the motion.

  The pair of arm members may have the same distance from one end to the other end, or may have different lengths.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, one of the arm member and the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member and the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is provided, and the sliding groove has at least one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is arranged at the reference position. A game machine B3 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin portion, and at least the arm member is at the reference position in the sliding groove. In the arranged state, a gap is formed between one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove and the pin portion, so that even if the arm member is stopped, the first member is equal to the gap. It is possible to allow relative displacement with respect to the arm member. Thereby, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at the reference position, the inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member, so that the pin portion is directed toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. A reciprocating displacement can be formed. As a result, the first member can be reciprocated (swinged) after the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

  In the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and a pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and the pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the arm member is prevented. After being stopped at the reference position, when the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member by the amount of the gap between the one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion, A rotational component can be added to the relative displacement. Thereby, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a linear shape, the pin portion can be slid smoothly along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. It is possible to suppress the load on the drive means.

  In the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially V-shape, the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C-shape, so after the reciprocating motion of the first member converges and stops, the gaming machine B5 enters the stopped state. The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, the first member retracted to the retracted position can be prevented from rattling due to disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is displaceably arranged, and are driven by the driving force given by the driving means. The sliding groove is rotated about the other end, the sliding groove is linearly formed, and is arranged at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is arranged on the first member. Amusement machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is relatively displaceable and driven. Since the other end is rotated by the driving force applied from the means, one end of each of the pair of arm members can be moved along arcuate loci whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) each of the pair of arm members, it is possible to give the first member a motion that is a combination of the linear motion and the rotary motion, and it is possible to change the motion.

  In this case, since the sliding groove is formed linearly and is arranged at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is arranged on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove (( The inclination direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially V shape or can be arranged in a straight line. Accordingly, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocally moved by the action of inertial force, when the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially V shape, While allowing a rotational component to be added to the motion, the reciprocating motion can be quickly converged toward the center of the V-shape, and when the sliding groove is arranged in a straight line, The movement can be limited to the linear component.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed in a linear shape, the pin portion can be slid smoothly along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member due to the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. It is possible to suppress the load on the drive means.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between the one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion allows the movement of the first member by the action of gravity. A gaming machine B7, which is arranged in the direction of.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between the one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion is the first member due to the action of gravity. Is arranged in a direction in which the movement of the arm member is allowed, the movement of the first member can be a movement that follows the displacement of the arm member, and a movement that does not follow the displacement of the arm member and that falls freely due to the action of gravity. .. Thereby, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is connected, a driven portion displaceably arranged in the main body portion, and a driven portion thereof. A game machine B8, characterized in that the game machine B8 is provided with a second drive means for applying a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member is a main body portion to which one end of the arm member is connected, and a driven portion displaceably disposed in the main body portion. Since the driven unit is provided with the second driving unit that applies the driving force, it is possible to perform an effect of relatively displacing the driven unit with respect to the main body unit by the driving force of the second driving unit. In this case, a reaction force caused by the displacement of the driven portion is applied to the main body portion, so that the reaction force may form a displacement that causes the pin portion to reciprocate toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove. it can. As a result, the main body portion (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocating) while the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

  In the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion, and is rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion and is rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means. When the displacement of the member is stopped and the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the drive unit is applied to the main body to displace the main body, it is possible to easily generate a rotational component in the movement of the main body.

  Examples of the shape of the driven portion include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, and an elongated shape. In this case, the driven part may have its center of gravity position decentered from the center of rotation (the position pivotally supported by the main body). As a result, the reaction force associated with the rotation of the drive unit can be increased and the variation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle can be increased to change the movement of the main body.

  In the gaming machine B9, the center of rotation of the driven portion is located between the pair of pin portions, the gaming machine B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven portion is located between the pair of pin portions, so that the reaction force due to the rotation of the driving portion causes the rotation of the main body portion. It can be easily connected to movement.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the gaming machine B11 is provided with a second displacing member that is displaceably formed, and the second displacing member is formed so as to be capable of contacting the first member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B10, a second displacing member that is displaceable is provided, and the second displacing member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member. By such contact, both the movement of the first member can be regulated and the movement of the first member can be changed. For example, when the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first member, whereby the first member is displaced (reciprocating) by the inertial force generated with the stop of the arm member. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, while the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member, and the first member is bounced off, whereby the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member. It is possible to form a mode in which the first member is displaced and a mode in which the first member is displaced while being integrated with the second displacement member.

  Further, when the first member includes the main body portion and the driven portion, the second displacement member is brought into contact with the main body portion to displace only the driven portion while maintaining the main body portion in the stopped state. Can be made That is, it is possible to form a mode in which the main body part is displaced together with the driven part by a reaction force associated with the displacement of the driven part and a mode in which only the driven part is displaced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, a second displacing member that is displaceably formed is provided, and a magnet is disposed in one of the first member and the second displacing member, and the first member or the first displacing member is provided. A magnet or an iron member is disposed on the other of the two displacement members, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member. A gaming machine B12 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the gaming machine B12 is provided with a second displacement member that is displaceable, and is disposed on one of the first member and the second displacement member. Since a magnetic force acts between the magnet and the magnet or the iron member arranged on the other of the first member or the second displacement member, the action of the magnetic force regulates the movement of the first member, or The first member can be displaced. For example, after the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the second displacement member is moved closer to or separated from the first member, whereby the first member can be displaced (reciprocating) by the action of the magnetic force. Since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of the magnetic force, it is not necessary to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other, and both can be brought into non-contact with each other, so that damage can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention with the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as an example>
C1. Driving means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and first and second rotating bodies that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. In a gaming machine including at least, and allowing a player to visually recognize the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body, the transmission means includes a rotating state of the first rotating body and a rotating state of the second rotating body. The gaming machine C1 is formed so that the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so as to differ from each other.

  Here, a first rotating body and a second rotating body having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated to be drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body. There is known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize the drawn figure and the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220215). In this case, the first rotary body is driven to rotate independently by the first drive motor (driving means) and the second rotary body is driven to rotate independently of the second drive motor, and the figure of the first rotary body visually recognized by the player. The combination of and the figure of the second rotating body can be changed. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine requires the same number of drive motors as the rotating body, which causes a problem of increased cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means applies the driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body so that the rotating state of the first rotating body and the rotating state of the second rotating body are different from each other. Therefore, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed even with one driving means. That is, the required number of driving means can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The different rotation states of the one rotating body and the other rotating body include, for example, a state in which the rotating speeds of one rotating body and the other rotating body are different, and one rotating body is rotated while the other rotating body is rotated. The state in which the rotating body is stopped is illustrated. The rotation speed does not have to be constant and may be increased or decreased.

  As the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotating body, for example, letters, patterns, colors, patterns, or a combination thereof is exemplified. In this case, the graphic may be a part of a character or a pattern (which is combined with another graphic to form one character or a pattern), or all (only the graphic forms one character or a pattern). Stuff).

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. The rotation cycle and the rotation cycle of the second rotating body can be different. Therefore, even with one driving means, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed.

  Further, since the transmission means has a configuration in which the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the drive means to the first rotary body and the second rotary body is different, the structure of the transmission means can be simplified.

  Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism that transmits rotation by meshing (gear transmission mechanism or chain transmission mechanism) and a mechanism that transmits rotation by friction (friction transmission mechanism or belt transmission mechanism). Gear transmissions include spur gears, worms and worms, bevel gears, or racks and pinions, chain transmissions include chains and sprockets, friction transmissions include friction gears, and belt transmissions. , A pulley and a belt are exemplified.

  In this case, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by the above-described meshing between the rotation shaft of the first rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means and between the rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the driving means. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and the rotation shaft of one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is directly connected to the drive shaft of the driving means, The mechanism for transmitting rotation by the above-mentioned meshing or the mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be arranged between the other rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the drive means. In the latter case, it is possible to reduce the number of parts (gear etc.) for forming the mechanism for transmitting the rotation, and correspondingly reduce the cost.

  In the gaming machine C2, the first rotary body and the second rotary body are in a state in which the phase of the other is deviated from the phase of the other at the visual recognition position at which the player can visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being stopped at.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear, and it is necessary to make a desired combination of figures appear. The number of rotations can be suppressed and it can be made to appear in a short time.

  That is, when stopping the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the visual recognition position for allowing the player to visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface, if the phases of both the rotary bodies are requested to match, the combination is made. As the number of possible graphics decreases, the number of rotations required to bring out the desired combination of graphics increases (the table lengthens). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are stopped at the visual recognition position, one phase of the two rotating bodies is shifted from the other phase. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of figures that can be made to appear, and to suppress the number of rotations required to make a desired combination of figures be made to appear in a short time. it can.

  In this case, at least a part or all of the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are curved in an arc shape protruding outward in a cross-sectional view orthogonal to the rotation axis. Is preferred. This is because even if there is a phase shift between the first rotary body and the second rotary body stopped at the visual recognition position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission means includes first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and second transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear. A gaming machine C4 comprising: a meshing region for transmitting rotation and a non-meshing region for blocking transmission of rotation by setting the meshing of the other gear as a non-meshing.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and second transmission for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means comprises at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, one gear of which is geared with the other gear to transmit rotation and the other of which Since the non-meshing region that blocks the transmission of rotation by making the meshing with the gear non-mesh, the state in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped and the other is rotated, and the first rotating body A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated can be formed. Therefore, even with one driving means, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body visually recognized by the player can be changed.

  Further, as described above, the transmission means can rotate the other of the first rotary body and the second rotary body while stopping the rotation of one of them and canceling the stop to restart the rotation. It is possible to enhance the expectation of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figure of the rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body.

  Both of the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears has a meshing region and a non-meshing region. And may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to form a state in which both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state in which both of them stop, a state in which one stops and the other rotates, and a state in which one rotates and the other stops. ..

  In the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-meshing region, and the formation range of the non-meshing region is the first rotating body or A gaming machine C5, which is set in correspondence with an interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is provided with the gear having the meshing area and the non-meshing area, so that the driving means is driven. In the state in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is switched between rotation and stop, the other is kept rotating. In this case, the formation range of the non-meshing region is set in correspondence with the interval between the plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. It is possible to shorten the length of a table having a combination with the figure of the second rotating body as an element. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body required to bring out a desired combination of figures. That is, it is possible to shorten the time required to bring out a desired combination of figures.

  It should be noted that that the formation range of the non-meshing region is set corresponding to the intervals of the plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface means that one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is defined by the non-meshing region. It means that the other is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval of n figures (n is an integer including 1) while being stopped. Particularly, it is preferable to set n = 1. This is because the length of the above-mentioned table can be minimized to minimize the number of rotations required to bring out a desired combination of figures.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the transmission means is a forward transmission means for transmitting rotation of the drive means in the forward direction to the first rotary body and the second rotary body, and a forward direction of the drive means. And a reverse transmission means for transmitting a rotation in the opposite direction to the first rotation body and the second rotation body, and the positive rotation of the drive means when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction. The transmission to the direction transmission means is permitted, the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is blocked, and when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation of the drive means is transmitted to the forward direction transmission means. A game machine C6, which is provided with a switching means that cuts off and permits transmission to the reverse transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in the effect that any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5 has, when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, the switching means transmits the rotation of the drive means to the forward direction transmission means. When the transmission is allowed and the transmission to the reverse transmission means is blocked, and the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction, the switching means blocks the transmission of the rotation of the drive means to the forward transmission means. Since the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is permitted, the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation visually recognized by the player depending on whether the driving means is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction. The type of combination with the figure of the body can be different. That is, there are two types of tables having elements of the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body, and by changing the rotation direction of the driving means, it is possible to arbitrarily select the two types of tables. can do.

  As the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means, the first structure described in the gaming machine C2 or C3 (structure in which the rotation ratio between the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different), the gaming machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (a structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by the non-meshing region), and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are synchronously rotated at the same speed. It can be arbitrarily selected from the three structures.

  For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward transmission means and the second structure is selected as the reverse transmission means is illustrated. Also, the same structure may be selected for the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means. For example, a case where the first structure is selected or a case where the second structure is selected as the forward transmission means and the reverse transmission means is exemplified. In the former case, the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means have different rotation ratios, and in the latter case, the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means have a meshing region and a non-meshing region. The formation ratios of the are different. Also by this, there are two types of tables having elements of the combination of the figure of the first rotating body and the figure of the second rotating body, and the two kinds of tables are arbitrarily selected by changing the rotation direction of the driving means. It can be possible.

  Further, the rotation directions of the first rotary body and the second rotary body when the drive means is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation directions of the first rotary body and the second rotary body when the drive means is rotated in the reverse direction. And may be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, it is preferable that the directions are the same. This is because it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the rotation direction of the drive means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the light emitting means is provided inside at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and the outer periphery of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine C7, wherein at least a part of the surface is formed of a light transmissive material.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is formed of a light-transmissive material. The player can visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means arranged inside at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  The light emitted by the light emitting means may be constantly emitted or may be emitted under predetermined conditions. The predetermined condition is, for example, when the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body form a specific combination, or when one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped, the stop thereof. When the rotation is restarted before or after is executed, etc. are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C7, the front surface is formed in a box shape, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided through the open portion of the front surface. A gaming machine C8, which is provided with a container for allowing a player to visually recognize the figure drawn in FIG.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine C7, the front surface is formed in a box shape, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are accommodated and the first rotation is performed through the open portion of the front surface. Since the container that allows the player to visually recognize the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the body and the second rotating body is provided, the player can visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means by using the container. That is, the player can visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means in a different mode from the case of directly visually recognizing the light emission. For example, a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the inner wall surface of the housing to be visually recognized by the player, and the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall of the housing to irradiate a predetermined object Examples include a mode in which the player visually recognizes the object together with a predetermined object, a mode in which light emitted from the light emitting means is made incident on the wall portion of the housing to cause a predetermined portion of the housing (for example, the front end face) to emit light. It

  In each of the above aspects, for example, a specific figure among a plurality of figures drawn on at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is a rear side of the first rotating body or the second rotating body (that is, It is preferably executed when the player is placed in a position invisible to the player). A specific figure arranged at a position invisible to the player is reminded to the player by the light emission of the light emitting means (the first rotating body or the second rotating body is arranged so that the specific figure becomes visible). This is because it can be expected to be rotated). Particularly, the light emission of the light emitting means is preferably executed in a state where at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C8, a housing in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are housed, and a production position and a game in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be visually recognized by the player. A gaming machine C9, comprising: a moving unit that moves between a retracted position and a person who cannot see it.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are used by the player to store the first rotating body and the second rotating body. Since a moving means for moving between a production position visible from the player and a retracted position invisible to the player is provided, a desired combination of the figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be selected. It can be made to appear promptly at the necessary timing.

  That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a relatively large amount in order to bring out a desired combination, and when the time is long, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated by the moving means. Since the body can be moved to the retracted position invisible to the player, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated to a predetermined rotating position in advance at the retracted position. When the required timing comes, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be moved to the effect position by the moving means, and the desired combination can be promptly revealed.

  In the gaming machine C9, an operating means for executing a predetermined operation is provided, and the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the operating means is arranged and disposed in the retracted position. Characteristic game machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the retreat position is arranged and the operating means is operated, so the first rotation is performed. When the body and the second rotating body are rotated in advance in the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the rotation from being recognized by the player.

  That is, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, a comparatively loud sound is generated, so even if the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved to the retreat position and become invisible to the player, A player may recognize the rotation by the sound generated by the rotation of the second rotating body. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, the rotation of the first rotating body and the rotation of the second rotating body can be performed while being reflected in the operation of the operating means, and thus it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation. it can.

  Note that, as the operating means, for example, a payout device, a voice generating device, etc. are exemplified. That is, in the state where the payout device is paying out the game medium, a relatively loud sound is generated along with the payout operation of the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the like. The same applies to the state in which sound is being generated from the sound generating device. Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the predetermined display is performed on the display device, the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be rotated. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the like.

<About the concept of the invention using the LED 344 as an example>
A plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and at least a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is made of a light-transmissive material, a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body, and the rotating body. In a gaming machine comprising a body rotatably housed and allowing a player to visually recognize a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary body through an open portion of the front surface, the rotating body is illuminated by the light emitting means. The game machine D1 is characterized in that the light transmitted from the outer wall is reflected by the container and is visually recognized by the player.

  Here, a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and a part of the outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmissive material, and a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body. A gaming machine is known which includes a housing in which a rotating body is rotatably housed and allows a player to visually recognize a graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). -220215). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the light of the light emitting means is only visually recognized by the player through the outer wall of the rotating body visually recognized from the open portion of the front surface of the housing. There is a problem that the effect of light is not effectively exerted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the containing body and is visually recognized by the player, so that the light transmitted through the outer wall of the rotating body is recognized. The player can visually recognize the light in a mode different from the case of directly visually recognizing it, and as a result, the effect effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a transmitting portion that transmits the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a light-reflecting material. And a reflecting portion that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the inside of the rotating body, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion form an irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body rotates. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being able to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is provided with a transmitting portion for transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and the light emitted from the light emitting means. Since the reflecting portion for reflecting the light inside the rotating body is formed, and the transmitting portion and the reflecting portion can pass through the irradiation region of the light emitted from the light emitting means when the rotating body rotates, the light emitted from the light emitting means is formed. It is possible to form a mode in which the light is directly transmitted from the transmission part to the outside, and a mode in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted to the outside from the transmission part. Can be switched with the rotation of. That is, two light emission forms can be formed by only one light emitting means, and for example, the position of the light visually recognized by the player can be switched to at least two locations without adopting a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure.

  In the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a posture in which light is emitted toward an open portion of the front surface of the container.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in such a posture that the light is emitted toward the open portion of the front surface of the container, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. In the mode in which the light is directly transmitted to the outside from the transmitting portion, the light can be made visible to the player from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open portion of the front surface of the housing, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected. In the mode in which the light is reflected by the part and then transmitted through the transmission part to the outside, the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is made invisible from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located in the open part of the front surface of the container. The player can visually recognize it around the rotating body. As a result, the position where the light is visually recognized can be switched with the rotation of the rotating body, and the position where the light is visually recognized can be significantly different, and as a result, the effect effect of the light can be effectively exhibited. it can.

  The gaming machine D4 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, wherein the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body having a polygonal cross section, so that the appearance of the rotating body is apparent as the rotating body rotates. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the housing is made visible to the player around the rotating body, It is possible to increase or decrease the size of the visually recognized area with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, it is possible to effectively exert the effect effect of light.

  In the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged in parallel with the first rotating body, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively provided. A gaming machine D5, which is formed as a substantially triangular columnar body having a substantially triangular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged in parallel with the first rotating body. Since the rotating body and the second rotating body are each formed as a triangular columnar body having a triangular cross-section, the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body (with the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body ( The facing interval) can be changed. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion, then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the housing is passed through the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When the player visually recognizes the size, the size of the region where the light is visually recognized can be increased or decreased in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided with the reflecting portion on the inner surface of the outer wall that forms one outer surface of the outer surface having the substantially triangular cross section. A game machine D6, wherein the transparent portion is provided on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided on the inner surface of the outer wall forming one outer surface of the outer surface having the substantially triangular cross section. Since the reflection part is provided and the transmission part is provided on each outer wall forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflection part and then transmitted to the outside from the transmission part. In such a case, light can be transmitted to the outside from two outer surfaces (transmissive portions). Therefore, the light can be reflected at two different locations on the inner wall surface of the container to be visually recognized by the player, or the light transmitted from one of the transmissive portions can be directly perceived by the player and transmitted from the other transmissive portion. The generated light can be reflected on the inner wall surface of the container to be visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect effect of the light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D6, the container is formed into a box-shaped body having an open front surface, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is provided with a reflection portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light. A gaming machine D7, which is arranged in a range exceeding the outer shapes of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the container is formed into a box-shaped body with an open front surface, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is made of a material capable of reflecting light. When the reflecting portion to be formed is arranged in a range exceeding the outer shapes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside. In addition, the player is made to visually recognize the light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back surface side of the box-shaped body in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D7, the accommodation body can reflect light on the inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body, the inner wall surface facing in parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that a reflecting portion made of a different material is provided.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the accommodation body is an inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body and faces the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in parallel. Since the inner wall surface is provided with a reflection part made of a material capable of reflecting light, the light reflected on the inner wall surface on the back side of the container is further reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface to be visually recognized by the player. At the same time, the light transmitted from the transmitting portion can be reflected on the inner wall surface of the side surface of the container to be visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of light can be effectively exhibited.

<Feature E group> (AQ mode)
It is possible to dynamically display the identification information on the display means and the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, The identification information is configured to show the determination result of the determination means by displaying a plurality of identification information in combination, and the first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and the first rotating body. A symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the rotating body, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, a first game state and its first The second game that is different from the game state When the first game state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the state and the state setting means, the determination result by the determination means is indicated by the combination of the identification information. When the second game state is set, the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means are switched and set so as to show the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine E1 having a switching setting means.

  Here, in conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, by rotating a rotating body having a plurality of symbols instead of displaying the symbols on a liquid crystal screen, a gaming machine capable of displaying symbols in a combination of a plurality of symbols is provided. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-23040). However, even in this kind of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player is bored because only the game of always rotating the rotating body to display the symbol is performed. The gaming machine E1 is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine E1, based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the determination means for performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information are moved to the display means. Dynamic display means that can be displayed dynamically, and privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, The identification information is configured to indicate the determination result of the determination means by displaying a plurality of identification information in combination, and the first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. And a symbol display means having at least a second rotating body different from the first rotating body, a rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and a first game state. And its first game state different from the first When the first game state is set by the state setting means capable of setting at least one of the game state, the determination result by the determination means is obtained by the combination of the identification information. Shown, when the second gaming state is set, the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means are switched and set so as to show the determination result by the determination means. And a switching setting means for performing the switching. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, there is a variable means for changing the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a visible first position and a second position which is harder to see than the first position. Means, when the first game state is set by the state setting means, the first rotating body and the second rotating body at the second position more than when the second game state is set. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is easy to change and.

  The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1. That is, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be changed to the first position or the second position by the changing means based on the game state.

  As a result, it is possible to assume the game state based on the positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body becomes a specific combination, the display means has a performance executing means for executing a specific performance. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to execute the effect based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the display means. The effects can be associated with the symbol display means and the display means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine includes a drive transmission unit that transmits a driving force that rotates the first rotation and the second rotation body, and the drive transmission unit includes the first rotation body and the second rotation body. A gaming machine E4, characterized in that the driving force is transmitted to the rotating body at different rotation ratios.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to display various display modes on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by transmitting the driving force by the drive transmitting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, an acquisition unit that acquires information determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition unit, and the acquisition unit that acquires the information until at least the determination condition is satisfied. In the case where a storage unit that stores information, a pre-determination unit that performs a determination on the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and the second game state are set , A gaming machine characterized by having a deciding means for deciding a combination of symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body, based on a result of the determination by the preliminary determining means. E5.

  The gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, since the combination of symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body is determined based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, the time until the determined combination of symbols is displayed is secured. can do.

  As a result, for example, it is possible to provide the player with an effect by using the time until it is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E5, when the symbol combination determined by the determination means is determined, before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the pre-determination means is started, The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it has a predetermined amount of pre-rotation means for rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are activated before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the advance determination means is started. Since it is possible to rotate by a predetermined amount, it is possible to reliably display the symbol combination determined by the determining means.

<Characteristic F group> (Volume is displayed during demo)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a determination means for performing the determination, a performance executing means for performing the performance based on the determination result by the determination means, and a sound based on the performance performed by the performance executing means are output. In the gaming machine having the sound output means, the operation means operable by the player, and the volume setting means for setting the volume based on the operation of the operation means, A game machine F1 comprising: a setting unit that effectively sets the operation by the operation unit when a specific period is included in the period in which the effect is executed.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes a sound output device and can set a sound volume of a sound such as a game effect (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-237647). .. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the volume can be set only when the game-based effect is not executed, and an unintended sound volume is output when the game-based effect is executed. There was a problem. The gaming machine F1 is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of playing a game at a volume desired by the player.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the determination means that performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the performance executing means that executes the performance based on the determination result by the determination means, and the performance executing means. A gaming machine having a sound output means for outputting a sound based on the effect, an operation means operable by a player, and a volume setting means for setting a volume based on the operation of the operation means. In the above, there is provided a setting means for effectively setting the operation by the operating means when the effect is being executed by the effect executing means during a specific period. As a result, the volume can be adjusted appropriately. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game at a desired volume.

  In the gaming machine F1, an effect determining unit that determines the content of the effect executed by the effect executing unit, and a specific period setting unit that sets the specific period based on the effect determined by the effect determining unit, A gaming machine F2 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, it is possible to set a specific period based on the contents of the effect, so that the volume can be set within a range that does not interfere with the effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. There is an effect that the damage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the setting means sets an effective period for effectively setting the operation by the operating means when the effect is not executed by the effect executing means for a predetermined period. Machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, it is possible to set the volume even when the production is not executed by the production executing means for a predetermined period, so that the player can set the volume at a desired timing. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the display means displays a display mode in which the effect mode is displayed by the effect executing means, and a setting mode indicating that the specific period is set by the setting means. A setting mode display control means, and a gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the period during which the volume can be set can be displayed on the display means, so that the period during which the player can set the volume can be easily performed. There is an effect that it can be grasped and the player can easily set the volume.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the discrimination information notifying means for notifying the discrimination information indicating the volume set by the volume setting means when the production is not executed by the production executing means for the predetermined period. A gaming machine F5 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed by the effect executing means for a predetermined time, the set volume can be discriminated. It is possible to easily determine whether the volume should be changed.

  Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5 has a prohibition unit that prohibits the operation unit from being effectively set by the setting unit based on the determination result being determined by the determination unit. A gaming machine F6 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the operating means is prohibited from being effectively set when the specific determination result is determined by the determining means. It is possible to grasp the determination result of the determination means by the operation for setting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result, and the identification information is the specific determination. At least a first symbol indicating a result and a second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the setting mode variably displays the second symbol. A gaming machine F7 characterized by being played.

  The gaming machine F7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6. That is, the effect that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result is executed by the effect executing means, and at least the first symbol indicating the specific determination result and the specific determination result are different determination results. Of the identification information composed of the second symbol indicating, the second symbol is variably displayed in the setting mode.

  Thereby, the second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result can be used for setting the volume. Therefore, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means can be effectively used.

  One of the gaming machines F4 to F7 has a brightness varying means for varying the brightness of the display means based on the operation of the operating means when the specific period is set. Gaming machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the luminance of the display means is changed by the luminance changing means based on the operation of the operating means when a specific period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game at the brightness desired by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, an acquisition unit that acquires information used to determine the determination condition based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and an acquisition unit that acquires the information until at least the determination condition is satisfied. A storage unit that stores the information, a pre-determination unit that determines the information stored by the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined condition based on the determination result by the pre-determination unit. And a setting unit that determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination unit, and the setting unit determines the information that has been determined by the preliminary determination unit for at least the specific period. A gaming machine F9, characterized in that the operation of the operating means is effectively set until the effect corresponding to is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effect is achieved. That is, the information used for the determination of the determination unit is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition. The storage means stores the acquired information at least until the determination condition is satisfied. The stored information is judged by the preliminary judgment means before the judgment condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the advance determination means, the determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation of the operation unit is effectively set by the setting unit until the effect corresponding to the information determined by the advance determination unit is executed.

  Accordingly, the period from the determination of the information by the pre-determination means to the execution of the effect corresponding to the information can be set as the period in which the volume can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can set a desired volume corresponding to the effect based on the determination result of the advance determination means.

<Characteristic G group> (Fish group customization setting)
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a determination means for performing determination, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. In the gaming machine having the dynamic display means and the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed, by the operation of the player, An operation unit capable of inputting game information, a storage unit capable of storing the game information input by the operation unit, and the determination unit by the determination unit during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Prior display means for displaying the prior information based on the determination result on the display means, and prior information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the prior display means based on the determination result. Setting means for setting the ratio of the specific preliminary information determined by the preliminary information determining means, depending on whether the determination result is a specific determination result or a case other than the specific determination result A gaming machine G1 characterized by further comprising: a proportion determining means for determining the proportion set by the setting means based on the game information stored in the storage means.

  Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine is proposed in which a game lottery is executed and an effect based on the lottery is executed (for example, JP 2010-094348 A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, it is difficult to set the expectation level of the production according to the preference of each player, and it is difficult to provide a game machine that meets the preference of the player. was there. The gaming machine G1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suits the taste of the player.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification displayed on the display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, An operation means capable of inputting game information by a person's operation, a storage means capable of storing the game information input by the operation means, and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, Prior display means for causing the display means to display prior information based on the determination result by the determination means, and prior information determination for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the prior display means based on the determination result And a setting means for setting a probability of determining the specific prior information that can be determined when the determination result is a specific determination result by the prior information determining means. Probability determining means for determining the probability set by the above based on the game information stored in the storing means. As a result, the degree of expectation indicated by the advance information can be changed according to the preference of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that matches the taste of the player.

  In the gaming machine G1, a gaming machine G2 indicating that the specific advance information informs a player of the degree of expectation indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the expectation indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is notified to the player as specific advance information. The effect is that the effect can be set in more detail.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming information input to the player by the operating means is information indicating the degree of expectation, and the gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the game information input to the player by the operating means is the information indicating the degree of expectation, and therefore the game machine G3 is rendered in more detail according to the player's preference. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a counter unit capable of repeatedly updating the counter value within a predetermined range, and an acquisition for acquiring the counter value counted by the counter unit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Means for determining whether the determination result is a determination result that is a specific determination result or a determination result that is other than the specific determination result. If a value is set, and the a priori information determining unit is any of the determination values set in the specific prior information, the counter value acquired by the acquiring unit is the specific prior information. A gaming machine G4 characterized by determining the

  The gaming machine G4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the counter means repeatedly updates the counter value within a predetermined range. The acquisition unit acquires the counter value counted by the counter unit based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The specific prior information is acquired by the acquisition unit when the determination result is a specific determination result and when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. When the counter value is one of the determination values set in the specific prior information, the specific prior information is determined. This has the effect of simplifying the control.

  In the gaming machine G4, the ratio setting means sets a range of the determination value to be set based on the gaming information, the gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, the range of the judgment value is set by the ratio setting means based on the game information, so that the judgment value can be set more easily.

<Characteristic H group> (Control for dividing the area of the touch detection position)
A performance executing means for executing a performance, a detecting means capable of non-contactly detecting an operation operation of a player, and a specific performance by the effect executing means when the operation motion is detected by the detecting means. In a gaming machine having a production varying means for executing the above, the detecting means includes a first detection area capable of detecting the operation motion and a second detection including a shared detection area that is a part of the first detection area. A variable member that has at least a region and is variable between a prohibited position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region and a permitted position that permits the formation of the shared detection region, and Variable control means for variably controlling the variable member between the prohibited position and the permitted position, and a judgment means for judging in which of the first detection area and the second detection area the detection means has detected. However, when the variable member is changed to the prohibited position, the effect changing unit detects the determination result detected by one of the first detection region and the second detection region by the determination unit. Based on the above, the gaming machine H1 is adapted to be changed to the corresponding specific effects.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start opening into which the game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening. The game lottery is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As a means for changing the effect by the player's operation, a touch sensor that allows the player to input with a finger or the like is arranged, and the player performs a touch operation to switch and execute the effect or the like. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-219617). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, a further suitable game using an input means such as a touch sensor has been demanded. An object is to provide a suitable game machine.

  According to the gaming machine H1, an effect executing means for executing an effect, a detecting means capable of detecting a player, and a specific effect by the effect executing means when an operation is detected by the detecting means. And a second detection area including a first detection area capable of detecting the player and a shared detection area which is a part of the first detection area. However, a variable member that can be changed between a prohibited position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region and a permitted position that allows the shared detection region to be formed, and the variable member that prohibits the variable member. The effect variable control means has a variable control means for variably controlling the position and the permission position, and a discrimination means for discriminating which of the first area and the second detection area the detection means has detected. Means are forbidden If it is variable in position on the basis of the discrimination result by the discriminating means, but for varying the specific effect that the corresponding.

  As a result, since the variable member prohibits the shared detection region from being formed, the region detected by the detection unit can be changed by the operation of the variable member, and the detection unit can be used functionally. .. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable game machine can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H1, there is a display means capable of displaying a performance mode as the effect, the variable member is arranged so as to be variable on the front side of the display area of the display means, and the detection means is The gaming machine H2, characterized in that it has the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, since the variable member is variable on the front side of the display means, the player can be informed of the detection area at the position of the variable member, which is easier to understand. A game can be played. Further, there is an effect that the player can select an effect displayed on the display means and various effects can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H2, the effect execution means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area when the variable member is at the permission position, and when the variable member is at the prohibited position. The game machine H3, wherein the second effect is displayed at positions corresponding to the first detection area and the second detection area, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, the first effect is displayed in the shared detection area when in the permitted position, and the first detection area and the second detection area when in the prohibited position. Since the second effect is displayed in each, the player can be informed of the effective detection area in an easy-to-understand manner, and the effect combined with the effect displayed on the display means can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second effect is a selection display mode that allows the player to select one of the display mode displayed in the first detection area and the display mode displayed in the second detection area. A gaming machine H4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, the player can perform a selection operation in the selection display mode, and the player can participate in the game more and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means includes at least first detection means for setting a first detection area and second detection means for setting the second detection area. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detecting means includes a first detecting means for setting a first detecting area and a second detecting means for setting a second detecting area. Since it has at least, it is possible to independently detect the first detection region and the second detection region.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the detection means is an output section capable of outputting infrared rays to the first detection area and the second detection area, and the infrared ray output from the output section is a target. A gaming machine H6, which has at least a detection unit capable of detecting infrared rays reflected by an object.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first detection area and the second detection area are detected by the infrared rays, so that the variable means is erroneously detected. This has the effect of suppressing such problems.

<Characteristic I group> (Increasing the sway width of the swaying character, suppression control)
A swinging member configured to swing, swinging means for moving the swinging member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and swinging the swinging member; State determination means capable of determining which of the first direction and the second direction the member is operating, and a swing for controlling the swing means based on the determination result by the state determination means. A game machine I1 having a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start opening into which the game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening. The game lottery is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In the production showing the lottery result lottery, a game machine has been proposed in which a movable accessory provided on the game board is moved to perform a notice production that informs the player in advance of information regarding the result of winning / decision determination (for example, , JP 2010-094348 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there are restrictions on the size of the game board surface, usable electric power, etc., and the number of movable means such as a motor for moving the movable accessory is limited, and the game machine can be moved. There is a problem in that there are restrictions on movements and the like, and there is a limit to the production, which reduces the interest in the game. The present gaming machine has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an increased interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the swinging member configured to be swingable, and the swinging member that is operated to swing in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction with respect to the effect member. Means, state determining means capable of determining which of the first direction and the second direction the swinging member is operating, and the swinging operation based on the determination result by the state determining means. Swing control means for controlling the means.

  This makes it possible to easily control the swing of the swing member. Therefore, there is an effect that the game control processing can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine I1, state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the swing member is swung and a second state in which swing of the swing member is suppressed, and the state setting means for setting the first state. A means for controlling the rocking means by the rocking control means so as to move the rocking member in the same direction as the direction discriminated by the state discrimination means based on the setting of one state. A gaming machine I2 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, when the first state for swinging the swinging member is set by the state setting means, the direction is the same as the direction determined by the state determining means. Since the rocking member is controlled by the rocking control means to operate the rocking member, there is an effect that the rocking of the rocking member can be continued.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the swinging member includes a displaceable displacement member and a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable to the displacement member, and the displacement member is displaced independently of each other. A gaming machine I3 comprising a pair of possible arm members, and the first member is coupled to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement is relatively displaced by the first member and the displacement member, so that the displacement width of the swinging member can be further increased, and the effect is dynamically produced. The effect is that it can be done.

  In the gaming machine I3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the swinging means. The gaming machine I4, which is rotated about the other end by the.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I3, the other end opposite to the one end at which the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable is rotatably supported and imparted from the swinging means. Since the pair of arm members are rotated around the other end by the driving force, the swinging can be continuously performed, and the effect can be made longer.

  In the gaming machine I3 or I4, one of the arm member and the first member is provided with a sliding groove, and the other of the arm member and the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is provided, and the sliding groove has at least one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where the arm member is arranged at the reference position. A game machine I5 characterized in that a gap is formed between them.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I3 or I4, a sliding groove is provided in one of the arm member or the first member, and the other of the arm member or the first member slides. A pin portion that is slidably formed along the groove is provided, and the sliding groove is at least one end portion or the other end portion of the sliding groove when the arm member is arranged at the reference position. Since a gap is formed between the pin portion and the pin portion, it is possible to reduce friction when swinging and suppress damping of swinging.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state determination means has an acceleration sensor arranged on the swing member, and determines the state of the swing member based on information output from the acceleration sensor. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine I6, the state of the swinging member is determined by the state determining means based on the information output from the acceleration sensor arranged on the swinging member, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5. Therefore, there is an effect that the swing control can be executed according to the state of the swing member.

<Characteristic J group> (Pre-rotation control of rotating reel)
Driving means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and first and second rotating bodies that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. And a combination of effect contents determining means for determining effect contents, and rotation control of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the figure is formed in a combination indicating the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so as to be displayed, and the first rotation body and the second rotation body each have a first position and a first position at which the player can easily see the graphic. The rotation control means is configured to be changeable to a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the figure, and the rotation control means displays the combination of the figures indicating the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. 2nd place After rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body by a predetermined amount respectively, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively changed to the first position. A gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided with a start opening into which the game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening. The game lottery is executed, and the effect showing the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As a presentation showing a lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols are rotated a plurality of times, and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-2004). -160759). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols, the reel rotation time (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is located in the front is determined by the size of the reel, the number of symbols shown, etc.). However, there is a problem in that the time until the lottery result is displayed becomes longer and the interest in the game is reduced. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with an increased interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the driving means, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the transmission means, and the plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface while being rotated. The rotating body and the second rotating body, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively rotationally controlled, and the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. Rotation control means for controlling the rotation so that the figure is displayed in a combination shown in, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively the first and the second rotating bodies where the player can easily see the figure. It is configured to be changeable between one position and a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the graphic than the first position, and the rotation control means is a combination of the graphics showing the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. Show In this case, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively moved to the first position. It is variable.

  This allows any figure to be displayed quickly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the waiting time until the graphic is displayed.

  In the gaming machine J1, the rotation control means is configured to control the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. Which of the first direction and the second direction the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated based on the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by having a rotation direction determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are set in the first direction and the second direction based on the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. Since the rotation direction determining means determines which of the two is to be rotated, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently rotated to the position corresponding to the effect, and the rotation time can be shortened. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the drive means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the rotation of the driving means is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, so that the first rotation is performed. Since the second rotating body can be rotated with respect to the body in different cycles, there is an effect that various combinations of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently displayed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning the prize (or passing through the operating port), there is a condition that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, J1 to J3, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K3, which is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area where the game ball can flow down is provided with a starting opening into which the game ball can enter, and based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening, The lottery is executed, and the effect showing the result of the lottery is executed for a predetermined period. As a presentation showing a lottery result, a game machine is proposed in which a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols are rotated a plurality of times and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, Patent Document 1 : JP 2004-160759 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols, the reel rotation time (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is located in the front is determined by the size of the reel, the number of symbols shown, etc.). However, there is a problem in that the time until the lottery results are displayed becomes longer and the interest in the game is reduced.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is rotated by the driving means, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and the outer peripheral surface of the gaming machine. The first rotary body and the second rotary body in which a plurality of figures are drawn, the production content determination means for determining the production content, the first rotary body and the second rotary body are rotationally controlled, respectively, and the production is performed. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the graphic is displayed in a combination indicating the effect contents determined by the content determination means, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are each a player. Is configured to be changeable between a first position where the graphic is easily visible and a second position where the graphic is more difficult to view than the first position, and the rotation control means is determined by the effect content determination means. Show content When displaying a combination of graphic patterns, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the first rotating body are placed at the first position. The two rotating bodies are made variable.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the rotation control means sets the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a first direction and in a first direction opposite to the first direction. Of the first rotating body and the second rotating body based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. And a rotation direction deciding means for deciding in which of the second direction to rotate.
The game machine according to the technical idea 3 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the transmission means rotates the drive means at different rotation ratios to the first rotating body and the second rotating body. It is something to convey.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1, the driving means, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means, and the plurality of figures are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The first rotating body and the second rotating body which are drawn, the production content determining means for determining the production content, the rotation control of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the production content determining means. At least rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the graphic is displayed in a combination showing the determined effect contents, and the first rotary body and the second rotary body respectively, the player displays the graphic. It is configured to be variable between a first position where it is easy to visually recognize and a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the graphic than the first position, and the rotation control means indicates the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means. Combination of the above figures When displaying the combination, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are placed at the first position. And are variable respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the rotation control means is configured to control the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively. Rotation for deciding in which of the first direction and the second direction the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively rotated based on the content of the effect determined by the effect content determining means. It has a direction determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the rotation time can be shortened.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios. Therefore, there is an effect that various combinations of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently displayed.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (a part of display means)
640a 1st rotating body (a part of symbol display means)
640b Second rotating body (part of the symbol display means)
Part of S305 determination means
S1004 privilege game execution means
S1330 rotation control means
S1721 Part of state setting means

Claims (3)

Drive means,
Transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means,
A first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and have a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface;
Production content determination means for determining production content,
Rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, so that the graphic is displayed in a combination indicating the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means, At least
The first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively have a first position where the player can easily see the graphic,
When the rotation control means displays the combination of the figures indicating the effect contents determined by the effect content determining means, the rotation control means is configured to be changeable to the second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the figure than the first position. First, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body respectively to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively changed to the first position. A gaming machine characterized by being a thing. The rotation control means is configured to be able to control rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, respectively.
Based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means, it is determined which of the first direction and the second direction the first rotating body and the second rotating body are to rotate. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a rotation direction determining means.   3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the transmission means transmits the rotation of the drive means to the first rotary body and the second rotary body at different rotation ratios.

Images